Learning MicroStation
=====================

   Getting Started
   MicroStation on the PC
   Windows Connection
   Fundamentals
   Basic 2D Design and Drafting
   Advanced 2D Design and Drafting
   3D Design and Modeling
   Rendering and Visualizing 3D Models
   Attaching Non-graphical Element Tags
   Labeling Designs
   Generating Drawings from 3D Models
   Plotting
   Exchanging Data With Other Applications
   Translating Designs Between 2D and 3D
   Using Applications


Getting Started
---------------

   Your First MicroStation Session
   Starting MicroStation
   Creating a Design File
   Using a Drawing Tool
   Placing Line Strings and Circles
   Placing Text
   Getting Help
   Deleting Elements
   Using Key-ins
   Ending the Session
   Starting MicroStation
   Using the Mouse or Digitizing Tablet
   Using the Keyboard


Your First MicroStation Session
-------------------------------

This lesson gets you into and out of a Microstation session. If you were an 
experienced user of Version 4, you likely can learn enough to get started 
by skipping to Starting MicroStation.

   Preview


Preview
-------

In this lesson, you will learn about
*  Starting MicroStation
*  Creating a Design File
*  Using a Drawing Tool
*  Placing Line Strings and Circles
*  Placing Text
*  Getting Help
*  Deleting Elements
*  Using Key-ins
*  Ending the Session
   


Starting MicroStation
---------------------

>> Start MicroStation:

1. At the system prompt, enter:
   ustation 
MicroStation displays the Open Design File dialog box.

As MicroStation starts, the startup screen is briefly displayed, followed 
by the MicroStation Manager dialog box.



Creating a Design File
----------------------

>> To create a design file:

1. Start MicroStation without specifying a design file.
   The MicroStation Manager dialog box opens.
2. From the File menu, select New by pointing at New in the menu bar, 
pressing the Data button, and holding it down.
   
If you are      The Data button 
using           is

Two-button mouse

Three-button mouse

Tablet cursor


   The Create Design File dialog box opens.
3. Type a name for your new design file in the Name field.
4. Click the OK button.
5. The Create Design File dialog box closes, and MicroStation displays the 
design file.
Once you are in a MicroStation design file, you can use the keyboard to 
change MicroStation's settings or select tools. You can do this by entering 
key-ins in the command window. A key-in is an instruction for MicroStation 
that you enter in the command window, which is displayed at the top of the 
screen.

The Command Window title bar is highlighted in dark grey on the screen to 
indicate that the Command Window is the destination window for keyboard 
input.



Using a Drawing Tool
--------------------

A MicroStation design is composed of elements, such as lines, ellipses, and 
arcs.

>> Place a line element with the Place Line tool:

1. Point at the Place Line tool in the Main palette, and press the Data 
button.
   The Place Line tool is now selected and its name is displayed in the 
Command Window. When you move the pointer into View 1, the pointer changes 
from an arrow to a crosshair.
2. Press and hold down the Data button as you drag the pointer in View 1. 
As you drag, the line you are placing is dynamically displayed. This 
rubberband-like effect is called dynamic update or rubberbanding.
3. Release the Data button to place the line. If the line appears jagged, 
don't worry. The screen may not have enough dots (pixels) to display this 
particular line without "jaggies."
The crosshair pointer locations where you pressed and released the Data 
button are called data points. These data points specify the endpoints of 
the line. (Do not be concerned here with the length of the line. You will 
learn how elements are sized in the "Key Concepts" section at the end of 
the next lesson.)

Note that the Place Line tool is still selected, as shown in the Command 
Window. The tool is "locked." You can place additional lines simply by 
repeating steps 2 and 3 above. Experienced users like to lock tools as a 
means of increasing efficiency. These lessons assume the use of locked 
tools. For information about how to select tools without locking them, see 
the User's Guide.

Let's get back to placing elements. When you enter a series of data points, 
one after the other, you can press the Data button to enter each one. You 
may find this drawing method easier than dragging.

>> Place a line by pressing and releasing the Data button to enter each 
data point instead of dragging.

1. Press (and release) the Data button to enter a data point in View 1.
   The line you are placing is dynamically displayed as you move the 
crosshair pointer.
2. Enter a second data point and place the line.
   Surprise! Another line is dynamically displayed as you move the 
crosshair pointer. The dynamic line extends from the end of the line you 
just placed. 
   
If you were to enter another data point now, you would have two connected 
lines.

But let's say that you want to start a new line at another location. 
>> Start a new line at another location:

1. Press the Reset button. (On the Mouse, Reset is button 2; on the 
digitizing tablet, button 4.) This is called entering a Reset or Resetting. 

   Observe the "Enter first point" prompt and "Reset/Reject" message in the 
Command Window. You backed up one step in Place Line.
2. Enter a data point in View 1.
3. Enter a second data point and place the line.
   
The Place Line tool is like most element placement tools in that when using 
it, you enter a series of two or more data points. You can choose between 
dragging and pressing the Data button for each data point, and these 
techniques can be used in combination. You can Reset to back up one step. 
Now that you have learned these techniques, place some more lines for 
practice, and then continue with the lesson.



Placing Line Strings and Circles
--------------------------------

You have just seen how easy it would be to draw a series of connected line 
elements with the Place Line tool. A series of line elements is not quite 
as easy to manipulate as a single entity, however, as is a single line 
string element. A line string is a series of connected line segments. The 
process of drawing a line string with the Place Line String tool is similar 
to that of drawing a series of connected line elements. As you might 
expect, a data point defines each vertex of the line string. The difference 
is that you Reset to signal MicroStation that you are finished defining the 
vertices. The Place Line String tool is not in the Main palette so you will 
open a sub-palette to select it.

>> Place a line string:

1. Open the Lines sub-palette (by pressing on the Main palette).
1. Select the Place Line String tool in the Lines sub-palette.
2. Enter a data point in View 1 to define a vertex.
   The first segment of the line string is dynamically displayed as you 
move the crosshair pointer.
3. Enter several more data points to define additional vertices.
4. Reset.
   The line string is placed.
   
The Place Line String tool is one of the few tools with which you cannot 
Reset to back up one step. This is because a line string can have more than 
one segment, and Resetting is the only way you can indicate to MicroStation 
that the line string is complete.

In this example, a Reset was entered after data point 5 to complete the 
line string.

>> Place a circle with the Place Circle by Center tool:

1. In the Main palette, select the Place Circle by Center tool.
   The tool name is displayed in the Command Window.
2. Enter a data point in View 1 to define the center of the circle.
   The circle is dynamically displayed as you move the crosshair pointer.
3. Enter a data point to define the edge of the circle.
   The circle is placed. 
   
There are other ways to place a circle -- by drawing from edge to edge, for 
instance, as you will see in a moment. In fact, there is more than one way 
to place most types of elements.

>> Place a circle with the Place Circle by Edge tool:

1. Open the Circles and Ellipses sub-palette (by pressing on the Place 
Circle by Center tool in the Main palette).
2. In the Circles and Ellipses sub-palette, select the Place Circle by Edge 
tool. 
3. Enter a data point to define a point on the edge of the circle.
4. Enter a data point to define another point on the edge of the circle. 
The circle is dynamically displayed as you move the crosshair pointer.
5. Enter a data point to define a third point on the edge of the circle.
   The circle is placed.
   
Place some more circles. Try both the dragging and pressing techniques for 
entering data points with the Place Circle by Center and Place Circle by 
Edge tools. Because Place Circle by Edge requires three data points, you 
cannot drag to enter them all.

Note:
Now that you have done some basic drawing, you might be wondering how to 
save your work. The answer is: You don't -- MicroStation saves the design 
file to disk as you draw!



Placing Text
------------

>> Place text with the Place Text tool.

1. In the Main palette select the Place Text tool (the one with the A on 
it).
2. In the Text Editor dialog box type the text you want to place.
3. Move the cursor where you want to place the text in the file.
4. Click the Data button.
   The text is placed.
   


Getting Help
------------

MicroStation has an extensive on-line help system. The system can be set to 
provide help on each tool you select. You can browse help topics and 
request searches for text strings in help topics.

>> To browse help topics:

1. From the Help menu, choose Contents.
   or
2. Press <Alt> H.
   The Help Window opens and the Table of Contents is displayed.
   
Tracking gives you help on each tool you select. 

**Alan is still working on this...

>> To turn on tracking:

>> 

>> To see how tracking works:



Tracking is great, but it has its limitations. There will likely be times 
when you won't know which tool you want to select. For those times, it may 
be helpful to search help topics.

>> To find the right tool for drawing an arc with a specific radius:

1. Click the Search button in the Help window.
   The Search dialog box opens.
2. Type arc in the Text field of the Search dialog box. Then click Search.
   A number of help topics related to arcs are displayed in the list box at 
the bottom of the Help window. Place Arc by Keyed-in Radius will give you 
the help you need.
3. Select Place Arc by Keyed-in Radius by double-clicking it.
   The help article on the Place Arc by Keyed-in Radius tool is displayed.
   
   Search Dialog box


Search Dialog box
-----------------

Help topics and articles are arranged in a hierarchy, much like the tool 
palettes. You can learn a lot about MicroStation by browsing the help 
system. A good place to start is the top level of the hierarchy

>> To open the Search dialog box:

1. In the Help window, click the Search button.
   The Search dialog box opens. 
   
Activating MicroStation's context sensitive help mode is another way to 
browse the help system and, at the same time, learn the palettes, menus, 
and settings boxes.

*** The following procedure may not be included. Alan says it could be 
covered by tracking, which is not completed at this point in time. Stay 
tuned.

>> Activate context sensitive help mode and get help on the next tool you 
will learn to use, Delete Element.

1. Point at the Delete Element tool at the bottom-right of the Main palette 
and press <Shft> F1.
   Help on Delete Element is displayed in the Help Window.
   
You can get help on more than one tool in context sensitive help mode. You 
can even get help on menu items and controls in settings boxes and dialog 
boxes.

The Data button is used to operate all controls in MicroStation's settings 
boxes and dialog boxes, as well as the Help window. In the remaining 
lessons, instructions like "point at the Topics button and press the Data 
button" are shortened to "click the Topics button."

All of MicroStation's pull-down menus work like the ones you have used so 
far. In the remainder of this lesson and all remaining lessons, 
instructions like steps 1 and 2 at the bottom of the previous page will be 
combined, as in "From the Help menu, choose On Context."



Deleting Elements
-----------------

Deleting an existing element is one of dozens of element manipulations for 
which MicroStation provides tools.

Suppose you want to erase one of the lines you placed. 

>> Select the line and delete it:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
   The Command Window displays the tool name, and the pointer becomes an 
arrow.
2. Point at the line you wish to delete and press the Data button.
   The line is bracketed with handles (small black squares) to indicate 
that it is selected.
3. Now select the Delete Element tool in the Main palette.
   The line is deleted.
   
Note:
Rather than selecting the tool, you could press <Backspace>.

Try deleting one of the circles.

Suppose you decide that deleting the last deletion was a mistake. 

>> To "undelete" the element:

1. Press <Ctrl-Z> while holding down <Ctrl-Z> (press <z> while holding down 
<Ctrl>). This is the same as choosing Undo from the Edit menu. <Ctrl-Z> is 
the keyboard accelerator.)
   The circle is re-displayed at the same location as before it was 
deleted.
   
It is possible to undo multiple operations in MicroStation. The first 
"undoable" operation is shown as part of the Undo item in the Edit menu. 
Similarly, the first "redoable" operation is shown as part of the Redo item 
in the same menu.

When you delete an element, the element remains in the design file even 
though it is no longer part of the design and you cannot see it. After you 
delete several elements, you may want to reduce or compress the design file 
to its smallest possible size. Try it:
>> To compress the design file:

1. From the File menu, choose Compress Design.
   The message "File Compressed" is displayed in the Command Window.
Compression frees up disk space and makes element locating faster.



Using Key-ins
-------------

To change some of MicroStation's settings you must use the keyboard. You 
can also use the keyboard to enter key-ins in the Command Window. This is 
as an alternate means of selecting tools. There are, in fact, some tools 
that can be selected only with key-ins. MicroStation also has built-in 
utilities called special key-ins that are, for the most part, neither tools 
nor settings.

The MicroStation key-in language is much like English. For example, keying 
in PLACE CIRCLE CENTER selects the Place Circle by Center tool; PLACE 
CIRCLE EDGE, the Place Circle by Edge tool; and DELETE ELEMENT, the Delete 
Element tool. The key-in used to select each tool is shown in the reference 
guide.

You can abbreviate key-ins -- for example, PLACE CIRCLE CENTER can be 
abbreviated to PLA CI and PLACE CIRCLE EDGE to PLA CI E. You don't need to 
use uppercase letters.

>> Select Place Circle by Center with a key-in:

1. Key in pla ci. ("Key in" means to type the text and then press 
<Return>.)
   The Command Window and the Main palette show that the Place Circle by 
Center tool is selected.
   
The Key-in Browser settings box lets you browse the hierarchical keyword 
lists, construct key-ins, and send them to MicroStation without using the 
keyboard. See "Menu Reference" (Help menu) in the reference guide for 
information about using the Key-in Browser settings box.

You can recall previous key-ins by pressing the <> key (up arrow). Take 
advantage of this to construct and submit the key-in pla ci e with just 
four keystrokes:
>> To recall previous key-ins:

1. Press the <> key.
2. "pla ci" is displayed in the key-in area of the Command Window. If the 
Place Circle by Center tool were not already selected, you would need only 
to press <Return> at this point to select it.
3. Type a space and the letter e, and then press <Return>.
   The Command Window and the Main palette show that the Place Circle by 
Edge tool is selected.
   
>> To recall the next to last key-in:

1. Press the <> key on the keyboard.
2. Press <> again.
   The next to last key-in, "pla ci", is displayed in the Command Window.
   
MicroStation even remembers key-ins from previous sessions!

Key-ins -- especially the three-character alternate key-ins (xx=) -- can be 
the most efficient way to check and change settings. Some key-in shortcuts 
are shown in the remaining lessons. The complete list of alternate key-ins 
is in the reference guide appendix, "Alternate Key-ins" and on the back of 
the Quick Reference.

If the insertion cursor is in a settings box when you wish to enter a 
key-in, you must first move it to the Command Window. To do this, press 
<Esc> or click in the Command Window.

You can enter a key-in when the Command Window's title bar is highlighted.



Ending the Session
------------------

>> To exit MicroStation:

1. From the File menu, choose Exit.
   OR 
1. Press <Alt-F>.
2. Press .
   
Note:
<F> and  are mnemonic access characters. Cross reference to User's Guide 
Ch. 1 "Navigating with the Keyboard."



Starting MicroStation
---------------------

Note
You must register your software license before you start working in 
MicroStation. See "Registering Your MicroStation License" on page 2-6 for 
instructions.

>> Start MicroStation:

1. Make sure the current directory is the one where you installed 
MicroStation.
2. At the system prompt, enter:
   ustation [design_file] [-r] [-s] [-w] 
   If you specify a design file (a file that contains a design drawn in 
MicroStation), it is opened as the active design file.
   If you do not specify a design file or MicroStation cannot find the 
design file you specified, the Open Design File dialog box opens, allowing 
you to select a file.
You can specify a command line switch when opening a file:

Command line    Purpose
switch

-r              Opens a design file as 
                read only

-s<script_file> Runs the specified script 
                file

-w<user_name>   Identifies the workspace 
                user





Using the Mouse or Digitizing Tablet
------------------------------------

MicroStation is designed to be used with a graphic input device (mouse, 
digitizing tablet, or digitizing table). For information about which 
graphic input devices are supported by this version of MicroStation, see 
"Introducing MicroStation." The types of input will be explained in this 
lesson and later lessons as they relate to using MicroStation. For now, it 
is important only that you learn the names of the buttons and how to press 
them. 

   Mouse
   Digitizing Tablet
   Reassigning Buttons


Mouse
-----

If your mouse has three buttons, there is one for each of the most common 
types of graphic input to MicroStation. If your mouse has two buttons, you 
simulate the third button by simultaneously clicking both buttons.

The default mouse button assignments are as follows:

Microstation    Invoked by
button

Data            Button 1 (left 
                button)

Tentative       Button 1-Button 2 
                chord

Reset           Button 2 (right 
                button)

Command         Not available

Cursor 1/3D Data<Alt>-Button 1

Cursor 2/3D     <Alt>-button 
Tentative       1-Button 2 chord

Cursor 3-12     Not available



The defaults are appropriate for a two-button mouse. If you are using a 
three-button mouse, you should change Tentative to use a single button 
(rather than the two-button chord) for faster operation. For more 
information see Reassigning Buttons.



Digitizing Tablet
-----------------

Most digitizing tablet cursors (pucks) have at least four buttons. The 
button layout for a typical tablet cursor is shown in the figure. As with a 
mouse, to press the 3D Data button, press the Data button while holding the 
<Mod1> key. To press the 3D Tentative button, press the Tentative button 
while holding the <Mod1> key. The Command button is used to select commands 
on a digitizing tablet menu. 

The default digitizing tablet button assignments are as follows:

Microstation    Invoked by
button

Data            Button 1

Tentative       Button 3

Reset           Button 4

Command         Button 2

Cursor 1/3D DataButton 5

Cursor 2/3D     Button 6
Tentative

Cursor 3-12     Buttons 7-16



If you are using a digitizing tablet, you will probably want to reassign 
the buttons because the mapping between buttons and the button reports sent 
by the tablet to MicroStation varies from one tablet model to another. for 
more information about changing button assignments, see Reassigning 
Buttons.

For details on setting up a digitizing tablet, see Digitizing Tablets.



Reassigning Buttons
-------------------

You can assign button combinations that are
*  A single button.
*  A single button modified by the <Alt> key.
*  Two buttons pressed simultaneously (mouse only).
*  Two buttons pressed simultaneously, modified by the <Alt> key (mouse 
only).
   
To confirm the MicroStation button assignments on your workstation or to 
reassign buttons, use the Button Assignments dialog box, which is opened 
from the User pull-down menu. Button assignments are stored in the user 
preferences file with the name of the X display you are using when you 
assign them. 

For information       See
about

General button assignm"Menu Reference" (User 
                      Menu) in the Reference 
                      Guide

Recording your button The button table in Lesson 
assignments           1, User's Guide

How each MicroStation  "Learning MicroStation" 
button is used        in the User's Guide





Using the Keyboard
------------------

As a PC user, you will have no trouble identifying the keys described in 
the User's Guide. The names of the keys are the same as the labels on your 
keyboard keys.

   Function Keys


Function Keys
-------------

MicroStation PC lets you assign key-in macros to the function keys 
<F1>-<F10> and <Shift-F1>-<Shift-F10>. <Shift-F1>-<Shift-F10> are indicated 
as "F11-F20" in the Function Keys settings box; that is "F11" stands for 
<Shift-F1>, "F12" stands for <Shift-F2>, and so on.

For information about typing international characters, see MicroStation on 
the PC.



MicroStation on the PC
----------------------

With its OSF/Motif-based graphical user interface, MicroStation operates 
almost identically on all supported hardware platforms. This chapter 
contains information on
*  Window Controls
*  Using Dual Logical Screens
*  System-level Environment Variables
*  PC-specific User Preferences
*  MicroStation needs information about your configuration in order to work 
properly. To get this information, every time you start MicroStation 
Version 5.0, it processes the configuration variable files.
*  International Characters
*  Installing Fonts
*  Panning With a Digitizing Tablet
*  PC-Specific Utilities
   
   Window Controls
   Using Dual Logical Screens
   System-level Environment Variables
   Platform-specific Configuration Variables
   PC-specific User Preferences
   International Characters
   Installing Fonts
   Panning With a Digitizing Tablet
   PC-Specific Utilities


Window Controls
---------------

MicroStation PC windows have a window menu that opens when you press on the 
window menu button at the far left of the title bar. Use the window menu 
this way

To                               Choose

Restore the window to its size prRestore
maximizing or minimizing

Reduce the window to its smallestMinimize

Enlarge the window to fill the scMaximize

Lower the window beneath other wiLower

Sink the window beneath the bottoSink
view window

Close the window                 Close



All standard Motif items are listed in the window menu. Those that are not 
available in MicroStation PC are dimmed and cannot be chosen.



Using Dual Logical Screens
--------------------------

Some display adapters support the use of two logical screens on a single 
monitor. If your display adapter supports two logical screens and 
MicroStation is configured to use two logical screens, you can "swap" the 
screens by choosing Swap from the View menu.  

A prefix in the Command Window key-in prompt indicates the active logical 
screen:
   "(1)" indicates the right (primary) screen.
   "(2)" indicates the left (secondary) screen.
   
For information on using multiple screens, see the User Guide.



System-level Environment Variables
----------------------------------

If MicroStation cannot find the configuration variables it needs, it looks 
for system-level environment variables. This means that pre-Version 5.0 
configurations continue to work with Version 5.0 without any modifications. 
If you have a previous version of MicroStation you may have some 
environment variables already set up. MicroStation recognizes these two 
types of variables as follows
*  Environment variables take precedence. MicroStation first looks for a 
variable name. If an environment variable has that name, MicroStation does 
not duplicate it as a configuration variable, but points back to the 
original system-level environment variable.
*  configure.dat maps to the system configuration variable
*  uconfigure.dat maps to the other levels of configuration variables -- 
site, project and user.
   
To differentiate between the two types of variables:
   Configuration variables are internal and are not saved when you exit 
your MicroStation session.
   Environment variables are defined at the system level and remain with 
the program each time you use it.
   
A list of the default system-level environment variables follows:

Environment  Type                   Description
Variable

MS           MicroStation Base DirecThe directory path for where 
                                    MicroStation is installed. 

MS_CONFIG    Main Configuration FileMain MicroStation configuration file 
                                    -- sets up all configuration 
                                    variables. 

MS_EDG       EDG Directories        Directories used by EDG (not 
                                    MicroStation). 

MDL_COMP     MDL Compiler Command LiText string to be inserted at the 
                                    beginning of the command line by the 
                                    MDL compiler (used to specify where to 
                                    search for include files). 

RSC_COMP     Resource Compiler CommaText string to be inserted at the 
                                    beginning of the command line by the 
                                    resource compiler (used to specify 
                                    where to search for include files). 

BMAKE_OPT    BMAKE Options          Command line options for BMAKE. Used 
                                    to search for bmake include (.mki) 
                                    files.


Default configuration variable definitions are stored in "configur.dat" in 
MicroStation's "data" directory (typically "c:\msreview\data"). Changes to 
the default definitions and new definitions are stored in a separate file, 
"uconfig.dat," in the same directory.



Platform-specific Configuration Variables
-----------------------------------------

MicroStation needs information about your configuration in order to work 
properly. To get this information, every time you start MicroStation 
Version 5.0, it processes the configuration variable files.
A list of default platform-specific configuration variables for 
MicroStation PC follows:

Configuration   Type        Use                Description
Variable

 MS_DBMODE      Database     Xbase file sharingFile sharing flag for 
                                               Xbase, either "shared" or 
                                               "nonshared."

 MS_DOSWINDOW   Operation   Enable DOS window   If set to 1, DOS window 
                                               enabled

 MS_UCMRCV      MicroCSL    Location of "gr_ucm Location of the gr_ucmrcv 
                Development                    file

 MS_UCMSND      MicroCSL    Location of "gr_ucm Location of the gr_ucmsnd 
                Development                    file



For information on how to modify configuration variables, see the User's 
Guide.



PC-specific User Preferences
----------------------------

Each user preference covered here is specific to MicroStation PC. That is, 
either the user preference does not apply to versions of MicroStation on 
all other hardware platforms or its default setting is not the same in all 
versions. For more information about user preferences, see "Pull-down 
Menus" (User menu) in the User's Guide.

The following preferences are set in the Preferences dialog box, which is 
opened by choosing Preferences from the User menu in the Command Window.

*  Use Backing Store (DOS and NT)
When backing store is enabled, MicroStation maintains an "offscreen" copy 
of each view window so obscured areas can be refreshed instantly when 
windows are rearranged. 

*  External Progs (Conv.) and External Progs (Ext'd) (DOS only)
The amounts of conventional and extended memory, in KB, available for other 
application tasks when executed from the Command Window (using the DOS 
key-in) or from user commands. Conventional memory (the first MB) is used 
by real mode applications. Extended memory (above the first MB) is used by 
protected mode applications such as MicroStation.

If the specified amount of memory is not available when you request 
execution of an application task, MicroStation attempts to make it 
available by writing a portion of its memory image to a temporary file. 
This temporary file is written to the directory assigned to the MS_TMP 
configuration variable; if that fails, the file is written to the directory 
assigned to MS_SCR. If that also fails, the application task is not 
executed.

By controlling these preferences, you can make extra memory available to 
memory-intensive tasks or prevent unnecessary swapping of memory when using 
tasks with low memory requirements. Values of -1 maximize the amount of 
memory available to application tasks. The default preferences are 0 KB 
(none) of conventional memory and 250 KB of extended memory.

*  On Both Virtual Screens (DOS only)
This preference allows you to specify if you want the tool palette to 
appear on both screens.

*  Dialog Point Size for Left Screen (DOS only)
On the PC, you can select a different point size for the dialog boxes for 
the left screen than those for the right screen. This preference allows you 
to designate the point size you want to use to display dialog boxes on the 
left screen.

*  Gamma Correction (DOS only)
This preference is used to control the brightness of rendered images. Its 
purpose is to compensate for the spectral characteristics of the display 
(or printer). The default value of 2.2 is close to ideal for most monitors. 
The valid range is 0.1-3.0.

Increasing the Gamma Correction setting has the effect of lightening 
images; decreasing it darkens images. A change in this preference is 
effective the next time a view is updated.

Note:
In previous versions, Gamma Correction was referred to as Dither Intensity, 
and 1.0 was the default value. If your rendered images appear too light, 
try setting Gamma Correction to 1.0.

*  Line Join Style (NT only)
This preference is used to select how to display the lines in dialog boxes.

*  Weighted Dynamics (NT only)
This preference enables you to specify the Line weight to be used in 
dynamics.



International Characters
------------------------

The characters that you can place in text elements depend upon the contents 
of the font you use. A font is a collection of individual characters of the 
same typeface.

Font #32, for example, contains most of the international characters.

>> To place text elements with International characters in a file:

1. Edit or create a drawing style that uses font #32 for text.
2. Select the Text tool to open the Text Editor window.
3. Enter International characters by typing the corresponding three digits 
on the numeric keypad (not above the alphabet keys) while holding down the 
<Alt> key.
   


Installing Fonts
----------------

TBD



Panning With a Digitizing Tablet
--------------------------------

MicroStation allows you to pan dynamically while digitizing.

>> To do dynamic panning:

1. Press and hold down the shift key.
2. Hold down the data button and move the mouse.
   
For information about See


How to set up to use aDigitizing Tablets 
digitizing tablet

Sample tablet menus   Chapter 15, User's 
                      Guide 

Digitizing            Chapter 3, User's Guide

Panning               Chapter 1, User's Guide





PC-Specific Utilities
---------------------

There are several types of utilities that can be used with MicroStation 
Review PC to perform special functions. Those covered here are specific to 
the PC platform. For information about other MicroStation Review utilities, 
see "Utilities" in the User's Guide.

The following DOS-specific special key-in (utility that is also a 
MicroStation Review command) is available:

To                       Use

Enter DOS commands withouDOS (!) (%) 
exiting MicroStation Review.



   DOS (!) (%)
   BSISET
   CHECKSUM
   INPTTEST
   MAPMEM
   MARK and RELEASE
   SHOWENV
   SysFree


DOS (!) (%)
-----------

You can use the DOS (!) key-in is used to enter DOS commands without 
exiting MicroStation Review. 

Key in DOS <command> or ! <command>. <command> is any command that can be 
entered at the DOS prompt.

To                          Key in

Invoke a DOS shell for execuDOS or ! 
of multiple DOS commands:

Leave the DOS shell and retuEXIT 
MicroStation Review:



The configuration variable MS_SYSTEM must be set in order to shell out to 
DOS using the DOS or ! key-ins. MS_SYSTEM is enabled by default when 
MicroStation Review is installed. Setting MS_SYSTEM to no value disables 
shelling out to DOS.

To avoid switching video modes, you can direct text output from DOS 
commands into a special DOS window on the graphics screen by using the % 
key-in instead of DOS or !. The DOS window can be activated when the 
following conditions are met:

*  The MicroStation Review configuration variable MS_DOSWINDOW is set to 1.
*  The screen that would normally display DOS text is in graphics mode.
*  The DOS command entered calls a DOS routine or other program that 
outputs text through a video BIOS function. Programs that bypass the BIOS 
and use their own output routines will not work.
   
The following executable utilities (utilities that are started from the DOS 
command line) are available with MicroStation PC. they are installed in 
MicroStation's "utils" directory or the root directory.

To                             Use

Set or check environment variabBSISET
compatibility.

Add the number of characters inCHECKSUM
file.

Check the status of the input dINPTTEST

Display a map of DOS memory to MAPMEM
TSRs, including how much memory each 
uses, or generate a report about 
memory use.

Manage memory used by TSRs.    MARK and RELEASE

Show the current environment vaSHOWENV
definitions.

Display information about the sSysFree
and its memory usage.



There are several types of utilities that can be used with MicroStation 
Review PC to perform special functions. Those covered here are specific to 
the PC platform. For information about other MicroStation Review utilities, 
see "Utilities" in the User's Guide.

MAPMEM, MARK, and RELEASE are part of the TSR Utilities package by 
TurboPower Software of Scotts Valley, California, and are distributed with 
MicroStation Review under license agreement between TurboPower Software and 
Bentley Systems, Inc., an Intergraph affiliate. The TSR Utilities are 
copyright  1986, 1987, 1989 by Kim Kokkonen.



BSISET
------

The BSISET utility ("bsiset.exe" in MicroStation Review's root directory) 
can be used to change environment variables from the DOS command line.

>> To define an environment variable from the DOS prompt:

1. Load MicroStation PC's drivers by entering: 
   review NULL (NULL must be in capital letters).
2. Enter: 
   bsiset <environment_variable>=<string>.
   For example, entering bsiset MS_DEF=c:\projects\ sets MS_DEF to 
"c:\projects\."
   
For information on how to few the environment variables you set, see 
SHOWENV.



CHECKSUM
--------

"CHECKSUM.EXE" is used to compare two files of equal size by summing the 
contents byte-by-byte. The most common use of CHECKSUM is to compare a file 
with a backup copy when the file is suspected of being corrupt.

>> To compare two files:

1. Enter:
   C:\USTATION\UTILS> CHECKSUM <filename>
   <filename> is one of the files to be checked.
   CHECKSUM displays the sum of the file.
2. Repeat for the second file.
3. Compare the output of each run of CHECKSUM. If the sums do not match, 
the files are not identical.
   


INPTTEST
--------

"INPTTEST.EXE" is used to check the status of the input device selected 
with USCONFIG. If a problem with the input device is suspected, INPTTEST 
can provide information to help isolate the problem.

To run a diagnostic on the input device:

Run MicroStation to load the input handler, or enter KEYTAB, KEYMOUSE, or 
KEYBOARD to load the appropriate handler manually.

Exit MicroStation or start a new DOS shell, if necessary.

Enter INPTTEST.

An example of the diagnostic screen display is shown below:

The diagnostic line contains the following information:

*  X pos and Y pos -- These values show the current position (in tablet or 
mouse coordinates, which do not correspond to any MicroStation units) of 
the tablet or mouse pointer. If the input device is working properly, you 
should be able to correlate the movement of the pointer with values you see 
displayed in these columns.
*  Btn -- This field displays the mask for the buttons currently pressed. 
When one or more buttons are pressed, this value should change. When no 
buttons are pressed, the value should be zero.
*  Prox -- If the tablet being used is capable of detecting it, the 
proximity field shows whether the cursor is on or near the tablet. "1" 
indicates the cursor is on or near the tablet while "O" means it is off.
*  Chars -- The Chars field displays a running total of the characters that 
the input handler has received. The value should continuously increase as 
long as the cursor is near the tablet. On some tablets, the cursor must be 
moved for characters to be sent. If the count does not change even when the 
cursor has been moved, a problem exists with the tablet DIP switch 
settings, the cable between the tablet and the PC, or the serial port.
*  Lstchr -- This field displays the last character received. It is 
irrelevant for diagnostic purposes.
*  Errs -- The Err field displays a count of the transmission error numbers 
detected by the serial port. It is not unusual for a limited number of 
errors to occur, but if the number of errors steadily increases, check for 
a mismatch in either the parity or baud settings between the tablet and 
MicroStation.
*  Lsterr -- The Lsterr field indicates the last error that the tablet 
handler detected. If a new error is encountered, it is interpreted and the 
error type displays below the status line.
*  Cmd, X, and Y -- The Cmd field shows the number of the last cursor 
button pressed on the tablet, while the X and Y fields show the position of 
the cursor when the button was pressed. If the button was recognized as a 
Command, Data, Reset, or Tentative button, the button type is displayed 
below the status line.


MAPMEM
------

MAPMEM ("mapmem.exe" in MicroStation Review's "utils" directory) is used to 
display a map of DOS memory. Specifically, it shows memory-resident 
programs known as TSRs (Terminate and Stay Resident), how much memory each 
TSR uses, and what interrupt vectors each controls.

MAPMEM also shows information about any expanded or extended memory in the 
form of a report. The expanded memory report shows each allocated block of 
expanded memory, plus the free and total expanded memory space. The 
extended memory report shows only the total amount of memory available. 
MAPMEM output can be displayed and stored to a file or printed. The reports 
provide the following information:

PSP        Program Segment Prefix. Physical 
           address, specified in 
           hexadecimal, where the program 
           was loaded.

Blks       Number of memory blocks DOS is 
           using to manage the program-- 
           typically two, one for the 
           program itself and another for 
           the environment that stores the 
           program name, path and other 
           environment variables.

Bytes      Number of bytes of memory, 
           specified in decimal, allocated 
           to the program.

Owner      Name of the program that 
           allocated the block. N/A in this 
           column means that the program 
           probably deallocated its 
           environment to reduce memory 
           usage.

Command LinLine entered when TSR was 
           originally loaded. 

Hooked     Indicates what interrupt vectors 
Vectors    the TSR has intercepted. 
           "Disabled" in this column 
           indicates a disabled TSR.



>> To display memory allocation information:

*  At the DOS prompt, enter: MAPMEM
The following command line options can be used. To delimit these options, 
MAPMEM accepts either " / " or  " - ".
   /V*Verbose report -- shows each memory block rather than just one for 
each program. It also contains two additional columns of information: MCB 
and Files. MCB (Memory Control Block) shows the physical address of the DOS 
data structure used by the TSR. Files shows the number of files kept open 
by the TSR.
   /?*Provides a help screen that describes the usage of MAPMEM, the 
version of MAPMEM being run, and the command line options accepted.
   Example


Example
-------

An example of a MAPMEM extended memory report is shown below. MARK has been 
placed in the Owner column for the purpose of examining prior to release. 
See "MARK and RELEASE" for more information about the MARK and RELEASE 
utilities.

PSP  blks  bytes owner    command     hooked 
                          Line        vectors

0008 1     86192 config

1F00 2     3984  command              22 2E

201E 2     3824  NDE

210F 2     1824  MARK     net         CD

2183 2     21328 NB                   5C

26BA 2     1488  MINSES               2A

2719 1     22864 N/A      /L:16       05 17 2F

2CAF 2     1232  PRTSC                09 21 28

2CFE 2     1824  MARK     uStn

2F09 2     3648  KEYMOUSE /SENS=7/    63
                          ENVSIZE=...

2FF0 2     10928 BSIEGA   /TYPE=1 /   64
                          TEMP=C:...

329C 2     5952  RMSVCINT             65

3413 2     442064free





MARK and RELEASE
----------------

MARK and RELEASE ("mark.com" and "release.exe" in MicroStation Review's 
"utils" directory) are helpful in managing TSRs (terminate and stay 
resident programs). MARK marks a position in memory above which TSRs can be 
released. RELEASE removes the TSRs from memory without requiring a system 
reboot.

MARK should be run before installing any memory-resident programs (for 
example, MicroStation Review drivers) for the first time to mark the 
current position in memory. Each time MARK is placed in memory, it consumes 
about 1600 bytes of RAM space, which is used to store a copy of the system 
interrupt vector table and other information which RELEASE uses to restore 
the system. A common place to call MARK is from your "AUTOEXEC.BAT" file.

>> To mark a position in memory: 

1. At the DOS prompt, enter: 
   MARK
2. Install the TSRs you want using the normal method for each TSR. 
   
>> To remove a TSR(s) from memory:

1. Enter: RELEASE /K
   RELEASE removes all of the memory above the last MARK, and will restore 
the system to the state at the time the MARK was made.
   
The following command line options can be used. To delimit these options, 
RELEASE accepts either  " / " or  " - ".
   /E*Do not access expanded memory (EMS). This option is available 
specifically for systems running early EMS drivers that do not correctly 
implement all of the EMS 3.2 system calls. Avoid using this option unless 
an EMS-related problem has occurred during or after running RELEASE.
   /K*Release memory, but keep mark in place. As shown above, this option 
is useful when releasing and reloading a TSR repeatedly. It avoids the need 
to replace mark each time the TSR is released. Using /K in combination with 
mark also prevents RELEASE from deleting mark.
   /S*Put string (<16 characters) into keyboard buffer on exit. This option 
followed by at least one space and then a short string (up to 15 
characters) tells RELEASE to put this string into the keyboard buffer just 
before exiting. RELEASE automatically adds a carriage return to the end of 
the string. 
   /?*Write a Help screen.
   
   Example


Example
-------

There are a number of variations for using MARK and RELEASE. Some of the 
more common scenarios are illustrated below. 

*  MARKs can be stacked in memory, as shown in the batch file below. In 
this example, the first call to RELEASE would remove TSR3 and the last 
MARK, the second call would remove TSR2 and its MARK, and so on.
   MARK
   TSR1
   MARK
   TSR2
   MARK
   TSR3
*  MARK can be called using a command line parameter. In the example below, 
the parameter specifies a mark name that allows releasing TSRs to a 
specific point in memory. A mark name can be any string up to 126 
characters in length. The name cannot include white space (blanks or tabs). 
Upper or lower case is allowed. This example loads the three TSRs as in the 
previous example.
   MARK TSR1
   TSR1
   MARK TSR2
   TSR2
   MARK TSR3
   TSR3
   RELEASE can also be called using a parameter that specifies a mark name. 
Since RELEASE always removes all TSRs including and beyond the one named, 
entering RELEASE TSR2, for example, would remove both TSR2 and TSR3 from 
memory. 
*  As noted earlier, entering RELEASE only removes the last TSR and the 
last mark from memory. By using protected marks, it is possible to change 
this behavior so that specific TSRs are released by explicitly specifying 
their names. A protected mark is placed by giving it a name that starts 
with an exclamation point (!). In the example below, !TSR3 specifies a 
protected mark. The only way to remove TSR3 in this case is by entering 
RELEASE !TSR3. 
   MARK TSR1
   TSR1
   MARK TSR2
   TSR2
   MARK !TSR3
   TSR3
   If RELEASE or RELEASE TSR3 is entered without the protected mark, the 
error message "No matching marker found or protected marker encountered" 
will occur. In this case, no TSRs would be released from memory.


SHOWENV
-------

SHOWENV ("showenv" in MicroStation's root directory) is used to display the 
environment variables you set.

>> To display current environment variable definitions from the DOS prompt:

1. Load MicroStation's drivers by entering: 
   review NULL (NULL must be in capital letters).
2. Enter: showenv
   A list of the current environment variable definitions is displayed.
   
See BSISET for instructions on how to define an environment variable from 
the DOS prompt.



SysFree
-------

SYSFREE ("sysfree. exe" in MicroStation Review's "utils" directory) is used 
to display information about the system and its memory usage. Information 
provided includes

*  The type of CPU.
*  DOS version.
*  The total conventional memory in the system. This is broken down into 
the amount of memory used by DOS and any resident programs, and how much is 
available to MicroStation Review.
*  The total extended memory in the system. Also shown is the amount 
reserved both by bottom up and top down allocation.
*  The extended memory available for MicroStation Review.
   
>> To display memory usage information:

1. At the DOS prompt, enter: 
   
   SYSFREE
   An example of output from SYSFREE is:
   MicroStation Free Memory Utility - Version 1.7 DOS Version 5.0 CPU Type: 
80386
   System Memory Usage Summary


System Memory Usage Summary
---------------------------

Conventional Memory (first megabyte)

Total contiguous640K
from 0 Mb

DOS/Resident    259K

Available       381K



Extended Memory (above first megabyte)

Total contiguous5376K
from 1 Mb

Reserved (top-do0K
alloc.)

Reserved (bottom0K
alloc.)



Non-conventional memory sources available to MicroStation:

Extended Memory

There is 5376K of extended memory available for MicroStation.



















Windows Connection
------------------

Windows Connection is a set of MDL applications and a custom display driver 
that allow MicroStation PC to be more compatible with Microsoft Windows 
Version 3.1. With Windows Connection
*  MicroStation's display appears in a window named MicroStation Graphics 
on the Windows desktop. You can move, stretch, minimize, maximize, and 
overlap the MicroStation Graphics window just as you can any other Windows 
application window.
*  You can use the Windows Clipboard to copy and paste text or graphics to 
or from MicroStation design files and other Windows applications. You can 
paste audio notes as linked objects in a design file. 
*  You can establish dynamic data exchange (DDE) links with other Windows 
applications in MicroStation design files. *
   
Note:
Under Windows Connection, MicroStation still operates as a 32-bit protected 
mode application and allows complete access to all features.

   Hardware Requirements
   Software Requirements
   Running MicroStation Under Windows
   Sharing Data With Other Windows Applications
   Troubleshooting
   Performance Considerations


Hardware Requirements
---------------------

The hardware required for Windows Connection is the same as for 
MicroStation and Windows. 

To run MicroStation under Windows with performance that is comparable to 
MicroStation's performance under DOS requires at least 2-4 MB more RAM than 
running MicroStation under DOS. This is because Windows requires more 
memory than DOS. The exact amount of extra memory required depends on the 
number and type of other Windows applications that are used at the same 
time as MicroStation. 



Software Requirements
---------------------

Windows Connection requires Microsoft Windows Version 3.1 running in 386 
enhanced mode.
The 386 enhanced settings in the Windows Control Panel affect the operation 
of MicroStation's display driver. During installation, the Windows 
Connection SETUP program automatically adjusts these settings for 
MicroStation:
*  The Windows in Foreground priority setting is set to match that used by 
MicroStation (the default is 100).
*  Exclusive in Foreground is turned off.
*  The Minimum Timeslice setting affects the interactive feel of the 
display driver, so a value in the range of 20-30 is set to bring about 
acceptable results.
   
For more information on settings, see Performance Considerations. 

Note:
To play pasted audio notes, you must have appropriate sound drivers 
installed in Windows. Some drivers make sounds with the built-in PC 
speaker; others are for sound cards such as Adlib and Sound Blaster.

To use the Windows Clipboard and dynamic data exchange, the WINCLIP MDL 
application ("winclip.ma") must be loaded. WINCLIP adds items to the 
Command Window's Edit menu that allow data to be copied and pasted between 
MicroStation and other Windows applications. The installation program adds 
WINCLIP to the MS_DGNAPPS configuration variable definition so that it is 
loaded automatically when you run MicroStation under Windows.



Running MicroStation Under Windows
----------------------------------

Nearly all MicroStation operations when running under Windows are identical 
to MicroStation running under DOS.

This section covers how to start MicroStation under Windows and the icons 
in the uStn Windows Connection group and the icons that appear on the 
desktop when MicroStation is started.

   Windows Connection group 
   Starting MicroStation
   Icons that appear on the desktop when MicroStation is started


Windows Connection group 
-------------------------

The installation program creates a Program Manager group called "uStn 
Windows Connection," which contains the following icons
   Double-clicking the MicroStation icon starts MicroStation in the 
MicroStation Graphics window on the desktop alongside other Windows 
applications.
   Double-clicking the Configuration Utility icon starts the Windows 
Connection Configuration Utility, which creates a separate set of 
configuration files for MicroStation under Windows (based on the standard 
configuration files). After using usconfig to reconfigure MicroStation, if 
you want the changes to be in effect when running MicroStation under 
Windows, use this utility to update the separate set of configuration files 
for MicroStation under Windows.
   Double-clicking the DOS MicroStation icon starts MicroStation in 
full-screen "DOS" mode using the standard configuration files. Whether 
MicroStation can run in full-screen mode depends upon the Windows display 
driver and the graphics adapter in your system. Most Windows drivers let 
you to run MicroStation in full-screen VGA mode.
   


Starting MicroStation
---------------------

>> To start MicroStation under Windows:

1. Double-click the MicroStation icon.
   The MicroStation Graphics, uStn Server, and MicroStation Text icons 
appear on the desktop. MicroStation starts in the MicroStation Graphics 
window. You can use the Open Design File dialog box to open a design file.
   OR
1. Double-click the DOS icon.
2. At the DOS prompt, change to the directory where you installed 
MicroStation.
3. At the system prompt, enter:
   ustation [design_file] [-r] [-s] [-w] 
   If you specify a design file (a file that contains a design drawn in 
MicroStation), it is opened as the active design file.
   If you do not specify a design file or MicroStation cannot find the 
design file you specified, the Open Design File dialog box opens, allowing 
you to select a file.
   
Hint:
To associate all files with the ".dgn" extension with MicroStation, that 
is, to make them automatically start MicroStation when their icon is 
double-clicked:

1. Choose Associate from the Windows File Manager's File menu. 
2. Enter the following in the Associate With field:
   <MicroStation_directory>\winconn\winbat.exe
   MicroStation_directory is the root MicroStation directory.
   


Icons that appear on the desktop when MicroStation is started
-------------------------------------------------------------

When MicroStation is started, these icons appear on the desktop
   The MicroStation Graphics icon represents the MicroStation Graphics 
window when it is minimized. The MicroStation Graphics window automatically 
opens when the MicroStation icon is double-clicked.
   The uStn Server icon represents an application that provides DDE and 
Clipboard services to MicroStation. This icon does not have a graphics 
window associated with it and cannot be maximized. To display the amount of 
free virtual memory in the system in this icon's place, turn on Enable Free 
Memory Display in its control menu. The server application automatically 
terminates when you exit MicroStation.
   The MicroStation Text icon represents the MicroStation Text window when 
it is minimized. The window is used to display any text messages generated 
by MicroStation. MicroStation's text messages are normally displayed only 
during initialization. In most cases, you can ignore them. The window is 
minimized by default.
   


Sharing Data With Other Windows Applications
--------------------------------------------

Windows Connection lets MicroStation share data with other Windows 
applications by using the Clipboard to copy and paste data in a variety of 
formats including text, comma separated values (CSV), bitmaps, metafile 
pictures, MicroStation key-ins, and audio notes.

Text and audio notes can be pasted with dynamic data exchange (DDE) links.

   Copying to the Clipboard
   Clipboard Output Format dialog box
   Pasting from the Clipboard
   Sending key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link


Copying to the Clipboard
------------------------

Windows Connection application adds a sub-menu to the Copy item in the 
Command Window's Edit menu.

>> To copy text to the Clipboard:

1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the text.
2. From the Edit menu's Copy sub-menu, choose Selected Text.
   The text is copied to the Clipboard and can be pasted into another 
application and edited. It is copied as ASCII text; line breaks are 
retained.
   
>> To copy graphics to the Clipboard:

1. (Optional) If you want to copy graphics as a bitmap, check, and if 
necessary, adjust the settings in the (*XRef. Clipboard Output Format 
dialog box). 
2. Set up a view in MicroStation that contains the elements(s).
3. From the Edit menu's Copy sub-menu, choose one of the following:
   -Vectors to copy the selected elements as vectors.
   -View Rectangle to select a rectangular part of a view as a bitmap. 
After you choose View Rectangle, use the Element Selection tool to select 
the bounding rectangle. Everything within the bounding rectangle, including 
rendered images, backgrounds, pull-down menus, and dialog boxes, is copied 
to the Clipboard.
   -View Contents to copy everything in a view as a bitmap. Select the view 
by clicking in it.
   -View Window to copy everything in a view including its border as a 
bitmap. Select the view by clicking in it.
   -Ustn Screen to copy everything in the MicroStation Graphics window as a 
bitmap, even if part of it is obscured by other (Windows) windows.
   


Clipboard Output Format dialog box
----------------------------------

Used to set the format of images copied to the Clipboard. Opens when copy 
Clipboard control is chosen from the Edit menu.

   Type
   Mode


Type
----

Sets the... Microsoft Windows (BMP) is the only option**True??.



Mode
----

The choices depend on the Type.



Pasting from the Clipboard
--------------------------

Windows Connection adds a sub-menu to the Paste item in the Command 
Window's Edit menu. The items available depend on the application from 
which the data was copied and the format of the the Clipboard's contents. 
Windows Connection allows text, bitmapped graphics, and audio notes to be 
pasted in a design file. 

   Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links
   Pasting text
   Pasting graphics
   Pasting audio notes
   Link Manager settings box
   Open Source
   Open All Links
   Cancel Link
   Edit Link


Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links
---------------------------------

Text and audio notes can be pasted in a design file with DDE links. A 
linked item is automatically updated in the design file when the 
originating file is changed in the source (or server) application.
*  If text is pasted with a DDE link, when both the source application (for 
example, a word processor or spreadsheet) and MicroStation are running, 
changing the text in the source application causes the linked text in 
MicroStation to automatically change.
*  When an audio note's icon is clicked in the design file, the sound file 
to which it is linked is played. 
   
When you paste an item with a DDE link, if MicroStation displays an alert 
box with the message "MicroStation requested server is not responding," 
make sure that:
*  All source applications are located in the proper directories.
*  The directories in which the server applications are found are included 
in the DOS PATH configuration variable. The DOS PATH configuration variable 
can be specified in the "autoexec.bat" file.


Pasting text
------------

>> To paste text, either with or without a DDE link:

1. Copy text to the Clipboard from any application.
2. Go back to MicroStation.
3. To paste the text without a DDE link, choose Text from the Edit menu's 
Paste sub-menu.
   or
   To paste the text with a DDE link, choose Linked Text from the Edit 
menu's Paste sub-menu. (The text must be from an application that supports 
DDE.)
   The text dynamically displays.
4. Enter a data point to place the text. 
   The text is placed as a text node element with its origin at the 
position where the data point was entered. The only formatting retained 
with the text is line breaks.
>> To start the application that is the source of linked text in a design 
file:

1. Double-click the text.
   


Pasting graphics
----------------

>> To paste a bitmapped graphic in the design:

1. Copy the image to the Clipboard from any application.
2. Go back to MicroStation.
3. From the Edit menu's Paste sub-menu, choose Bitmap. 
   An outline of the image dynamically displays.
4. Enter a data point to place the image in the design.
   
Note:
In 3D design files, pasted bitmaps are easiest to handle if they are pasted 
in a Top view. If you place bitmaps in a view that is not a Top view, the 
handles that appear when you select the image work properly but may appear 
skewed.

Note:
For those technically inclined, the image is **(what kind of element in the 
design file??).



Pasting audio notes
-------------------

Windows' Sound Recorder applet can copy audio notes stored as "wav" files 
to the Clipboard. Audio Notes can be pasted as linked objects in a design 
file.

>> To paste an audio note:

1. Copy the audio note to the Clipboard.
2. Go back to MicroStation.
3. From the Edit menu's Paste sub-menu, choose Audio Note. 
4. Enter a data point to place the audio note in the design.
   The audio note is marked in the design by an icon that looks like a 
microphone.
   
>> To play an audio note:

1. Double-click its icon. 
   OR
1. From the Edit menu, choose Links. 
2. The *XRef. Link Manager settings box opens. In the Link list box, select 
the audio note's DDE string.
3. Click the Open Source button.
   
Note:
The source "wav" file must be available for the audio note to be played. If 
the "wav" file is on a file server and the server is mapped to the same 
drive letter on multiple PCs, and if all of the PCs have appropriate sound 
hardware and drivers, then the audio note can be played on all the PCs 
without modification.

Note:
The reference to the "wav" file is user attribute data associated with the 
microphone bitmap, a type 87 and 88 raster element.



Link Manager settings box
-------------------------

Lists the DDE string for each DDE link and lets you maintain links.

A DDE string identifies the application, topic, item, and type of a DDE 
link. A DDE string can have up to 255 characters. 



Open Source
-----------

Starts the Windows application that created the selected audio note or text 
link.

Hint:
You can also open the source application for a linked object by 
double-clicking the text node or audio note in the design.



Open All Links
--------------

Starts the Windows application(s) that created every audio note or text 
link in the design.



Cancel Link
-----------

Removes the selected link. The text node or audio note remains in the 
design file.
*  If the link was a text link, the text will no longer be updated when its 
former source is changed.
*  If the link was an audio note, it can no longer be played.
To re-establish the DDE link,repaste the audio note or linked text from the 
original source.



Edit Link
---------

Opens the Edit Link dialog box, which is used to edit the selected link, 
mainly to mend broken links that result when the source file for a linked 
object is moved or deleted.

   Program
   Topic
   Item
   Link Type


Program
-------

Sets the name of the DDE server -- usually the name of the source 
application. This is sometimes called the service or program.



Topic
-----

Sets the general data name. For most applications a topic is a filename.



Item
----

Sets the item's number/name for the DDE link as defined internally by the 
source application. 



Link Type
---------

Sets the type of DDE link, either Text or Sound.

Warning:
Do not change the Link type unless you also change the file named in the 
Topic field. This might bring MicroStation and Windows to an abrupt halt.



Sending key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link
--------------------------------------------------

You can send key-ins to MicroStation through a DDE link. For example, you 
can create a macro in a spreadsheet that starts a DDE "conversation" with, 
and send key-ins to, MicroStation.

MicroStation understands the following types of DDE requests:
*  INITIATE -- establish a DDE link with MicroStation.
*  EXECUTE -- pass key-in(s) to MicroStation.
*  TERMINATE -- ends DDE conversation with MicroStation.
   


Troubleshooting
---------------

If the MicroStation Graphics window does not update properly, turn on 
Offscreen Bitmaps (in the Options menu beneath the Windows title bar in the 
MicroStation Graphics window). 

If the PC has a 16-color VGA driver, the colors of bitmap images pasted 
into the design file may not be accurately displayed due to the interaction 
between the design file color table and Windows' system color palette. 
Avoid this problem by using a 256-color Windows video driver.



Performance Considerations
--------------------------

Intro

   Hardware accelerators
   Dual screens
   Offscreen Bitmaps
   Permanent swap file
   Color display


Hardware accelerators
---------------------

Since the display driver uses the Windows Graphical Device Interface (GDI) 
to display graphics, it can be used with any display adapter that supports 
Windows. In addition, any hardware that improves Windows performance (such 
as Windows accelerators) will also improve the speed with which graphics 
are displayed on the screen MicroStation shares with Windows.



Dual screens
------------

The Windows Connection display driver can take advantage of dual-screen 
systems. MicroStation on one screen shares the desktop with other Windows 
applications, and the second display is driven directly. The pointer passes 
freely between screens as it does in any dual-screen MicroStation 
configuration. 

However, only MicroStation graphics can be displayed on the screen 
dedicated to MicroStation. For example, you cannot move the Program Manager 
window onto the dedicated MicroStation screen. Display updates are 
generally faster on the dedicated screen, since MicroStation has exclusive 
access to it.

In a dual-screen system, most display adapters other than a VGA or SuperVGA 
can be used for the dedicated screen. If a VGA or SuperVGA screen is used 
as the dedicated screen, Windows attempts to display multiple DOS sessions 
on it and conflicts with MicroStation's dedicated use of the screen. When a 
VGA or SuperVGA screen is used in dual-screen configurations, Windows must 
be configured to run with the VGA card as its display device.



Offscreen Bitmaps
-----------------

If Offscreen Bitmaps is turned on, a copy of all MicroStation graphics is 
saved in a buffer so they can be instantly redisplayed when the 
MicroStation Graphics window is resized or the desktop is rearranged. This 
significantly speeds up switching between MicroStation and other Windows 
applications.

>> To turn Offscreen Bitmaps on:

1. From the Options menu (located beneath the title bar in the MicroStation 
Graphics window), choose Offscreen Bitmaps.
Note:
Turning on Offscreen Bitmaps increases MicroStation's memory usage. The 
amount of memory used for offscreen bitmaps is calculated by the formula:

Memory Used in Kb =Horizontal Pixels)x (Vertical Pixels) x (Bits Per Pixel) 
8 x 1024

Bits Per Pixel is the number of bits required to store a pixel's color; 4 
in a 16-color display and 8 in a 256-color display.

For example, the memory required by Offscreen Bitmaps for a 1024 x 768, 
256-color display is:
(1024) x (768) x (8)= 768 KB 8 x 1024

Note:
Offscreen Bitmaps may slow screen update speed since elements must be drawn 
both on screen and in the buffer.



Permanent swap file
-------------------

The time it takes Windows to switch between MicroStation and other 
applications can be shortened by the use of a permanent swap file. For 
information about creating a permanent swap file, see "Optimizing Windows" 
(Changing Swap File Settings) in the Microsoft Windows User's Guide.



Color display
-------------

The Windows Connection display driver automatically senses the color 
capabilities of the display hardware used by Windows and adjusts 
MicroStation to use them.
*  If Windows is running on a true color display system, 3D renderings 
display in true color. 
*  On color-palette-based display hardware (most 16- and 256-color 
systems), MicroStation dithers renderings to approximate true colors (just 
as it does under DOS). The total number of colors available to MicroStation 
may be less than the number supported by the hardware since Windows 
reserves some colors for its own use and use by other Windows applications. 
This may reduce the quality of rendered images.
   
MicroStation Graphics

MicroStation

MicroStation Text

DOS MicroStation



Fundamentals
------------

In this chapter, you will find a lesson and procedures concerning the most 
basic operations in MicroStation. These include
*  Navigating the graphical user interface (using pull-down menus, dialog 
boxes, and tool palettes)
*  MicroStation's "flow"
*  Working with design files
*  Using drawing tools
*  Working with Views
*  Adjusting settings
*  Command Window key-ins
   
For those who are familiar with AutoCAD, the final part of this chapter 
compares these aspects of MicroStation to that software.

   MicroStation Fundamentals
   Backing up a design file
   Palettes and sub-palettes
   Fitting the active design
   Windowing
   Zooming and panning
   Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control
   Adjusting a setting to affect drawing
   Window Navigation
   Using Pull-down Menus
   Using Dialog Boxes and Settings Boxes
   Working with Design Files in MicroStation
   Exiting MicroStation
   Using Drawing Tools
   Working with Views
   Using On-line Help
   Command Window Key-ins
   Using Tablet Menus


MicroStation Fundamentals
-------------------------

In Introducing MicroStation, you learned how to start MicroStation, how to 
open a design file, and how to place some elements. You also learned which 
keys on your keyboard correspond to MicroStation logical keys. (If you did 
not start with that volume, read it now. You need that information first.)

This lesson gives you an idea of the "flow" of MicroStation. For example, 
you will see how drawing tools are organized in palettes and sub-palettes, 
how you can use the view controls even in the middle of drawing, and how 
settings influence the operation of drawing tools.

In this lesson, you will learn about:
*  Backing up a design file
*  Palettes and sub-palettes
*  Fitting the active design
*  Windowing
*  Zooming and panning
*  Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control
*  Adjusting a setting to affect drawing
   
Note:
These exercises are meant to be performed consecutively. In each exercise, 
it is assumed that you have just completed the preceding exercise.



Backing up a design file
------------------------

MicroStation saves all changes to elements in a design file to disk as they 
are made. This preserves your work in case of a power failure and frees you 
from having to remember to save your work. It also lets you "undo" many 
operations if you change your mind.

As with all data files, though, it is best to make back-up copies of your 
design files from time to time. That way, if you go too far down a wrong 
path, you can return to a back-up copy.

>> Back up the file "office.dgn"

1. Start MicroStation and open the design file "office.dgn," which is 
installed in MicroStation's "learning" directory.
2. From the File menu, choose Save As.
   The Save Design File dialog box opens.
3. In the Name field, key in off_bak.dgn.
4. Click the OK button.
   MicroStation creates the back-up file "off_bak.dgn" and opens it as the 
active design file. All changes you make to the design will be saved in 
that file. "Office.dgn" remains intact for later use.
   
Hint:
All the sample files supplied with MicroStation are "backed up" on the 
delivery media. If you want to start over with one, reinstall the sample 
files. (If there are any sample files that you do not want overwritten 
during reinstallation, rename them or move them to another directory.)



Palettes and sub-palettes
-------------------------

MicroStation's tools and view controls are represented by icons grouped in 
palettes. Palettes can be opened, closed, and moved freely about the 
screen, just like views, settings boxes, and dialog boxes.

Some tools and controls are located on sub-palettes. One tool in each 
sub-palette is displayed in its parent palette, and sub-palettes can be 
"torn off" the parent and used independently.

>> Open the Main palette and tear off the View Control sub-palette:

1. Open the Palettes menu by clicking the word Palettes in the Command 
Window menu bar and look at the various palettes available.
   The triangular marks to the right of palette names means that those 
palettes have sub-palettes that can be opened directly.
2. Drag the pointer to the first item in the Palettes menu, Main.
   To drag the pointer, hold the Data button down while you move the 
pointer. 
   A sub-menu of sub-palettes pops up.
3. Without moving the pointer into the sub-menu, release the Data button to 
choose Main from the Palettes menu.
   The Main palette opens.
4. Open the View Control sub-palette by placing the pointer over the view 
control tool (the icon in the lower left corner of the Main palette) and 
holding the Data button down.
   The View Controls sub-palette displays next to the Main palette as long 
as you hold the Data button down.
5. Select any other view control by dragging the pointer to the view 
control in the sub-palette and releasing the Data button.
   As you drag the pointer across the sub-palette, look for the name of 
each view control in the Command Window. 
   The newly-selected view control now appears in the lower left corner of 
the Main palette. You can select it again, if need be, without opening the 
View Control sub-palette again. The view control is highlighted and its 
name and a prompt appear in the Command Window.
6. Tear off the View Control sub-palette so that it floats in its own 
window by repeating step 4 and then dragging the pointer away from the Main 
palette.
   As you drag the pointer far enough away from the Main palette, a 
rectangle representing the View Control sub-palette is dynamically 
displayed -- it moves with the pointer to indicate where the sub-palette 
will be displayed when you release the Data button.
7. Release the Data button to float the View Control sub-palette.
   


Fitting the active design
-------------------------

As you move view windows about on the screen, the content of the views 
stays the same. Use the view controls to change the part of the design 
displayed in each view.

View 1 shows a receptionist's desk and some plants (unless someone has 
changed it). The design includes the floor plan of an entire office 
building.

>> Use the Fit Active Design view control to display the entire design in 
View 1:

1. Select the Fit Active Design view control by clicking it in the View 
Control sub-palette. (This tool's icon represents a scene visible through a 
window with curtains at the top.)
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select View." The prompt is the 
second line of text on the right side of the Command Window. It tells you 
what to do next using the selected tool or view control (the name of which 
is just to the left of the prompt).
2. Select View 1.
   You select a view the same way you select a tool or view control. Move 
the pointer anywhere inside the area of the view and click the Data button.
   Notice that the Fit Active Design view control remains selected and that 
the prompt "Select View" remains in the Command Window. When you have 
several views open, you can select as many as you like to fit the entire 
active design in each of them.
3. Reset to deselect the Fit Active Design control.
   To Reset, click the Reset button. Resetting generally backs you out of 
whatever procedure you are performing.
Hint:
While using the view controls, if you "lose" the design and find yourself 
looking at an empty view, just fit the view with the Fit Active Design view 
control to regain your bearings.

As you work with view windows in these exercises, if the View Control 
sub-palette is in the way, place the pointer on its title bar, hold down 
the Data button, and drag the palette out of the way. You can move a 
palette or change the size of a view while a view control such as Fit 
Active Design is active.



Windowing
---------

Use View 1 to refer to the entire design and open a second view to examine 
details of the design.

>> Resize View 1 and display the floor plan in it:

1. Place the pointer over the lower right corner of View 1's window border.
   When the pointer is precisely over the corner of the window border, it 
becomes a diagonal double arrow. The pointer can then be used to resize the 
view window.
2. When the pointer becomes a diagonal double arrow, drag the corner 
towards the upper left corner until the view occupies only the upper left 
corner of the screen below the Command Window.
3. Use the Fit Active Design view control to display the entire view in 
View 1.
   The design includes a border and reference lines that extend far beyond 
the floor plan. There is no need to see these in their entirety in View 1.
4. In the View Control sub-palette, select the Window Area view control.
   The Window Area view control (represented by an empty window with 
curtains at the top) is used to enlarge a part of the design contained in 
the view to fill the whole view.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select Window Origin."
5. Place the pointer inside View 1 just above and to the left of the floor 
plan and click the Data button.
   Selecting a point in a view by placing the pointer there and clicking 
the Data button is called "entering a data point."
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select window corner."
6. Move the pointer just below and to the right of the floor plan.
   As you move the pointer, a rectangular box indicating the area to be fit 
is dynamically displayed.
7. Enter the second data point so that the entire floor plan is enclosed by 
the rectangular box.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select view."
8. Enter a data point anywhere in View 1 to select that view.
   The area defined with the Window Area view control fills the view (to 
the extent possible, given the difference between the shape of the area you 
defined and the shape of the view.) 
   
>> Open View 2 and display a detail of the design in it:

1. From the View menu's Open/Close sub-menu, choose 2 to open View 2. 
   View 2 opens.
2. Move and resize View 2, by dragging it by its title bar and dragging its 
resize borders, so that it fills the entire right half of the screen below 
the Command Window.
   The Window Area view control is still selected.
3. Enter two data points in View 1 (as in steps 5-7, above) to define the 
area around the conference table in the upper left quadrant of the floor 
plan.
4. Enter a data point in View 2 to fit the area defined into View 2.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to examine other details of the design (such as a 
stairwell or work cubicle.) The smaller the area you define in View 1, the 
greater the magnification in View 2.
   
Note:
You may prefer dragging the pointer to define a (rectangular) area to 
window rather than entering the data points with separate clicks of the 
Data button. Press the Data button while the pointer is in one corner of 
the area you want to define and drag the pointer to the opposite corner. 
When you release the Data button, the area will be defined.



Zooming and panning
-------------------

The Zoom Out and Zoom In view controls also let you increase or reduce the 
scale at which part of a design is displayed in a view. The zoom controls 
have effects similar to a zoom lens on a camera, magnifying or shrinking an 
image.

>> Use the Zoom Out and Zoom In view controls:

1. Use the Window Area view control to display the receptionist's desk in 
View 2.
2. In the View Control sub-palette, select the Zoom In view control (a 
magnifying glass with a plus sign).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select point to zoom about."
3. In View 2, enter a data point in the center of the typewriter on the 
receptionist's desk.
   When you zoom in or out, the point at which you place the data point 
becomes the center of the view. Therefore, the center of the typewriter is 
displayed at the center of View 2, and the size of each element displayed 
in the view is doubled.
4. In the View Control sub-palette, select the Zoom Out control (a 
magnifying glass with a minus sign).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select point to zoom about."
5. In View 2, enter three data points consecutively in the center of the 
typewriter.
   Again, the location of each data point becomes the center of View 2. 
With each data point the size of the elements displayed is halved.
   
A convenient way to change the part of the design displayed in a view 
without changing the magnification is to dynamically pan (another camera 
metaphor) in a view.

>> Pan dynamically within View 2:

1. Place the screen pointer near the center of View 2.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key on the keyboard while you press and hold down 
the Data button to define the anchor point. (You can then release the 
<Shift> key, but keep the Data button depressed.)
3. While keeping the Data button depressed, drag the pointer a short 
distance directly to the right of the anchor point.
   The design begins to pan (shift) in the direction you dragged the 
pointer. The further you drag the pointer from the anchor point, the faster 
the panning.
   You also control the direction of the panning by dragging the pointer. 
Imagine an arrow starting at the anchor point and ending wherever you drag 
the pointer. Panning follows the direction of the imaginary arrow, and the 
panning speed increases with the length of the imaginary arrow.
   Panning stops when you release the Data button.
   


Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control
-------------------------------------------------

Suppose you wanted to draw a line diagonally across the floor plan from the 
steel I-beam in the upper left corner to the I-beam in the lower right 
corner. The I-beams are small relative to the distance between them and are 
surrounded by other elements in the design. If you had to draw the line in 
a single view, you would not be able to accurately place the ends of the 
line on the I-beams. With MicroStation, you can solve the problem by 
interrupting your drawing to use the view controls.

>> View a detail of the upper left I-beam in View 2 and start to place a 
line:

1. Use the Window Area view control to display a small rectangle containing 
the upper left corner of the floor plan in View 2.
   The I-beam is gray and is located at the intersection of the two dashed, 
green lines just inside the corner of the floor plan. If you cannot see the 
I-beam, use the Zoom Out view control to increase the portion of the design 
visible in View 2. When you find the I-beam, use the Zoom In view control 
to increase the magnification again and to place the I-beam in the center 
of the view.)
2. In the Main palette, select the Place Line tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter first point."
3. Enter a data point at the intersection of the two green lines that cross 
the I-beam.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter end point."
4. Move the pointer around in both views without pressing the Data button.
   MicroStation dynamically displays a line from the I-beam to any area in 
the design that you move the pointer. If you place the pointer directly 
over a view's resize border, the line no longer displays and the pointer 
becomes a double arrow. Even though the Place Line tool is selected, you 
can resize views, change settings, and use the view controls.
   
>> View a detail view of the lower right I-beam and finish placing the 
line:

1. Use the Window Area view control to display a small rectangle containing 
the lower right corner of the floor plan in View 2.
2. Reset twice.
   The first Reset clears the prompt "Select view," but leaves the Window 
Area view control selected (so you could identify another view in which to 
display the selected area). The second Reset de-selects the Window Area 
view control and reselects the Place Line tool.
3. To complete placing the line, enter a data point at the intersection of 
the two green lines over the I-beam in the lower right corner of the floor 
plan.
   


Adjusting a setting to affect drawing
-------------------------------------

Some CAD software requires that you set various parameters every time you 
perform an operation. MicroStation uses settings that control its behavior 
until you change them. This is more efficient, but it means that you have 
to keep the active settings in mind (or displayed on the screen).

In this exercise, you will see how one kind of setting can be adjusted and 
displayed.

>> Open the design file "floor.dgn:"

1. From the File menu, choose Open.
   The Open File dialog box opens.
2. Select the file "floor.dgn" and click OK.
   The office design closes and "floor.dgn" opens.
   
>> Create a detailed view of Office 101:

1. Click the maximize button at the far right end of the title bar of View 
1.
   View 1 expands to fill the screen.
2. Use the Window Area view control to enlarge Office 101 to fill the view.
   
>> Tear off the Lines sub-palette and set the Angle setting to 45d:

1. Place the screen pointer on the Place Line tool (in the upper right 
corner of the Main palette) and hold the Data button down to open the Lines 
sub-palette.
   Notice that two of the tools in the palette (including the Place Line 
tool) have downward-pointing triangles. Controls for adjusting settings 
that affect those tools "pop down" when the Lines sub-palette is torn off.
2. Tear off the Lines sub-palette by dragging it away from the Main 
palette.
3. If the Place Line tool is not already selected, select it in the 
sub-palette.
   Below the tool are two settings that control its behavior, Length and 
Angle. By default, these constraint settings are not turned on.
4. Press <Tab> to highlight the Angle field.
5. Key in 45.
   When you key in text, you type the text and then press <Return> or <Tab> 
to submit the text to MicroStation. In this step, after you type 45, press 
<Tab>.
6. Turn on the Angle setting by clicking the check button to the left of 
the Angle field.
   
>> Draw a rectangle to represent a desk parallel to the wall in the lower 
right side of the office:

1. Enter a data point to define the corner of the desk that will be closest 
to the bottom of the screen.
2. Move the pointer up and to the right until the dynamically displayed 
line reaches a point on which the desk corner closest to the right side of 
the screen will lie.
   As you move the pointer, the line you are placing displays at a 45d 
angle. It lengthens as you move the pointer towards the upper right corner 
of the screen, and it shortens as you move the pointer towards the lower 
left corner of the screen. (MicroStation is constraining the line so that 
it lies upon an infinitely long line that passes through the data point. If 
you move below and to the left of the first data point you placed, the line 
extends from the data point in the opposite direction.)
3. Enter a data point to define the second desk corner.
   Notice that the Place Line tool is still active and that the 45d 
constraint is still in effect.
4. Select (highlight) the numbers in the Angle field by dragging the 
pointer across them, and then key in 135.
   Now as you move the pointer, the new line displays at a 135d angle.
5. Enter a data point to define the third corner of the desk -- it should 
be above and to the left of the second desk corner.
6. Repeat step 4, but key in 225.
7. Enter a data point to define the last desk corner.
   To make the desk shape close properly, enter the data point with the 
screen pointer over the first corner of the desk. That will make the two 
long sides of the desk the same length.
8. Repeat step 4, keying in 315.
9. Enter the final data point at the first corner of the desk.
   
Note:
This procedure demonstrates the effect of the Angle constraint setting, but 
is far from the best way to place rectangular shapes in MicroStation. Using 
the New User workspace, you could use the Place Block tool.

>> Close the Lines sub-palette and place another line:

When you select the Place Line tool from the Main palette without tearing 
off the Lines sub-palette, you cannot see the Length and Angle settings, 
but they still constrain the placement of lines if they are turned on.
1. Close the Lines sub-palette by double-clicking the window control button 
in the upper left corner of the Lines sub-palette.
2. Enter a data point anywhere in the design.
3. Move the pointer about the screen.
   Since Angle is still set at 315d and is turned on, the line that 
dynamically displays is constrained to 315d (or 135d).
4. Tear off the Lines sub-palette and turn off the Line Angle constraint.
   
Hint:
If you open the Tool Settings window (from the Settings menu), it displays 
tool settings, if there are any, for the selected tool. Its title bar 
displays the name of the selected tool or view control.

   Waiting for page break h1 from MG.


Waiting for page break h1 from MG.
----------------------------------



Window Navigation
-----------------

The Command Window, views, tool palettes, dialog boxes, and settings boxes 
are displayed graphically in windows. Windows contain controls that can be 
operated graphically, by clicking or dragging, and constrols that can be 
operated or take input from the keyboard. 

The window in which a keystroke will have an effect is said to have the 
keyboard focus. (Most often, the Command Window has the keyboard focus.) 
The title bar of the window that has the keyboard focus is highlighted in 
dark gray. One way to give a window the keyboard focus is to click in the 
window.

You can also use the keyboard to move the keyboard focus from one window to 
another. Use these keys to "navigate" between windows:

Key        Function

<Esc>      Moves keyboard focus from settings 
           (non-modal) box to the Command Window's 
           key-in area.

<Alt-F6>   Moves keyboard focus from one settings box 
           (or Command Window) to the next.

<Alt-Shift-Same as <Alt-F6> but moves through the 
           windows in the reverse order.


   To move the keyboard focus to the Command Window:
   To move the keyboard focus from one window to another:


To move the keyboard focus to the Command Window
------------------------------------------------

1. Click in the Command Window.
   or
   Press <Alt-F6> until the Command Window's title bar is highlighted.
   or
   Press the <Esc> key repeatedly. (Usually, you need to press <Esc> only 
once.)
   When the Command Window has the keyboard focus, the cursor in the key-in 
area blinks.
   


To move the keyboard focus from one window to another
-----------------------------------------------------

1. Click in the desired window.
   or
   Press <Alt-F6> until the desired window's title bar is highlighted.
   


Using Pull-down Menus
---------------------

Pull-down menus (menus, for short) are used in MicroStation to activate 
most non-drawing functions. Each menu is a list of one or more words (menu 
items).

MicroStation's main menu bar is in the Command Window (or the system menu 
bar, if there is one). Other menu bars are located in many of 
MicroStation's settings boxes and dialog boxes. All MicroStation's menus 
operate in the same manner.

   Operating pull-down menus with the mouse
   Operating menus with the keyboard


Operating pull-down menus with the mouse
----------------------------------------

These procedures show how to operate pull-down menus with a mouse. You can 
also operate and "navigate" menus with the keyboardOperating menus with the 
keyboard.

   To open a menu:
   To post a menu:
   To choose a menu item:
   To close a posted menu (without choosing an item):
   To close an open menu (without choosing an item):
   Symbols in menu items
   Keyboard accelerators


To open a menu
--------------

1. Point at the menu name in the menu bar and press the Data button.
   


To post a menu
--------------

1. Click the menu name in the menu bar.
   


To choose a menu item
---------------------

1. With the menu open but not posted (the Data button pressed and held 
down), drag the pointer over the item and release the button.
   If you decide you do not want to choose any item, drag the pointer off 
the menu and release the button.
   or
   With the menu posted (Data button released), point at the item and click 
it.
   If you decide you do not want to choose any item, press the Reset 
button.
   
Whether you post and click or drag is a matter of personal preference; 
MicroStation lets you choose menu items both ways.

When you open or post a menu, some items may be dimmed (gray rather than 
black). You cannot choose a dimmed menu item. When certain conditions are 
met, a dimmed menu item is enabled (turns black) and can be chosen. For 
example, when no element or text is selected, the Cut and Copy menu items 
in the Edit menu are dimmed. The Cut and Copy menu items are enabled only 
when text in the Text Editor or one or more elements are selected.



To close a posted menu (without choosing an item)
-------------------------------------------------

1. Click outside the menu.
   
Once opened, a menu is posted when you release the Data button.



To close an open menu (without choosing an item)
------------------------------------------------

1. Drag the pointer out of the menu and release the Data button.
   


Symbols in menu items
---------------------

Choosing an item with an ellipsis (...) opens a dialog box. For information 
about using dialog boxes and settings boxes, see Using Dialog Boxes and 
Settings Boxes.

A check button displayed with an item tells you whether the named option or 
attribute is in effect. Clicking the check button toggles the option on or 
off. When several mutually-exclusive items are listed in a menu, an 
arrowhead to the left of an option or attribute tells you which one is in 
effect.

An arrowhead to the right of the item text indicates that a sub-menu opens 
when you click that item or drag the pointer over it.



Keyboard accelerators
---------------------

Keyboard accelerators are provided for choosing some menu items. 
Accelerators are shown to the right of menu items. Pressing <Ctrl-O>, for 
example, chooses Open from the File menu.

To use the keyboard accelerator for choosing Exit from the File menu 
(<Ctrl-Q>), you must press <Return> afterward.

Note:
Some key names in the menus are logical key names. MicroStation uses 
logical key names because different systems have different keyboards. To 
determine the correspondence between logical key names and actual keys on 
your keyboard, see Introducing MicroStation.



Operating menus with the keyboard
---------------------------------

In each menu name and menu item, one character is underlined. That 
character is the mnemonic access character. It identifies the keyboard key 
that can be pressed to open the menu or choose the menu item.

For example, to choose Open from the File menu in the Command Window (with 
the window title bar highlighted in dark grey), press <Alt-F> to post the 
File menu, and then <O> to choose Open.

   Keyboard focus


Keyboard focus
--------------

The menu or menu item upon which the next keystroke will act is said to 
have the keyboard focus. 

Before you can use the keyboard to operate a menu, some control in the same 
window as the menu you wish to operate must have the keyboard focus. For 
information about navigating between windows with the keyboard, see Window 
Navigation.

Menu items with the keyboard focus are displayed with a 3D highlight.

Use the following keys to operate menus. (It is assumed that a control in 
the same window as the menu bar has the keyboard focus.)

Key        Function

<F10>      Toggles activation of menu bar (if 
           inactive, activates it; if active, 
           deactivates it and closes any open menu).

<Alt-      * If menu bar is inactive, activates it 
mnemonic   and posts menu with corresponding 
access     underlined mnemonic access character.* If 
character> menu bar is active, posts menu with 
           corresponding access character.

Key        * If menu bar is active but a menu is not 
identified posted, posts menu with corresponding 
by mnemonicunderlined mnemonic access character.* If 
access     menu is posted, chooses item with 
character  corresponding access character.

<Home>     * In menu bar, moves to leftmost menu.* In 
           posted menu, moves to first item.

<End>      * In menu bar, moves to rightmost menu.* 
           In posted menu, moves to last item.

<Left>     * In menu bar, moves to menu to the left; 
           at extreme left, wraps to rightmost menu.* 
           In posted menu, moves to next menu. (In 
           posted sub-menu, closes sub-menu and moves 
           to parent menu.)

<Right>    * In menu bar, moves to menu to right; at 
           extreme right, wraps to leftmost menu.* In 
           posted menu, moves to child sub-menu of 
           selected item, if any -- otherwise to next 
           menu.

<Up>       * If no menu is posted, posts selected 
           menu.* In posted menu, selects item above 
           current item; at top, wraps to bottom.

<Down>     * If no menu is posted, posts selected 
           menu.* In posted menu, selects item below 
           current item; at bottom, wraps to top.

<Return>   Chooses selected menu item.

<Esc>      * If menu is posted, closes menu but 
           leaves menu bar active.* If no menu is 
           posted but menu bar is active, deactivates 
           menu bar.





Using Dialog Boxes and Settings Boxes
-------------------------------------

MicroStation has dialog boxes for a variety of operations, including 
opening and saving different types of files. For example, the Open Design 
File dialog box is used to open a design file. The Save Plotfile As dialog 
box is used to name and save a plotfile you are creating.

A settings box is a dialog box that can be left open on the screen while 
you work. Other dialog boxes must be closed before you can go on to 
something else. The controls in both work the same way, so the term "dialog 
box" can generally be assumed to include settings boxes.

   Controls
   Selecting files
   Dialog box and settings box navigation


Controls
--------

Dialog boxes have controls called buttons, check buttons, fields, list 
boxes, and option menus. 
*  Buttons are areas that you click to start an operation. A button, 
usually labeled "OK," must be clicked to start the open or save operation 
and dismiss (close) the dialog box.
*  Check buttons are areas that you click to turn a setting on or off. When 
off, a check button is light gray and appears to project upwards. When on, 
the check button is dark and appears to be drepressed.
*  A field is an area into which you can key in text or numbers. In a 
"non-modal" settings box (one that can remain open while you work), what 
you key in has no effect until you press <Tab> or otherwise move the 
keyboard focus out of the field.
*  List boxes are rectangular areas in which files, directories, or other 
items are listed for selection or reference. When an item is selected, it 
is displayed as light text on a dark background. For more information about 
selecting files, see Selecting files.
*  Option menus are menus that pop up when you press on the currently 
chosen menu item text.
*  Radio buttons are diamond-shaped controls that let you turn on one of 
several mutually exclusive items, just as the buttons on a car radio allow 
you to tune in only one station at a time. When off, a radio button is 
light gray and appears to project upwards. When on, the radio button is 
dark and appears to be drepressed.
   
If a button in a dialog box is outlined, pressing the <Return> key on the 
keyboard is the equivalent of clicking that button with the mouse. For 
example, the OK button in the Open Design File dialog box is outlined, so 
you can press <Return> rather than clicking the OK button to open the 
selected file. You can also double-click the desired file in the Files list 
box to open it, rather than selecting the file in the Files list box and 
then clicking the OK button.

   Keyboard focus
   Within a dialog box, to move the focus from one field or list box to 
another:


Keyboard focus
--------------

The dialog box control upon which the next keystroke will act is said to 
have the keyboard focus. 

Before you can use the keyboard to operate a control in a dialog box, some 
control in the same dialog box must have the keyboard focus. You can click 
in a dialog box to give it the keyboard focus. For information about 
navigating between windows with the keyboard, see Window Navigation.

In dialog boxes, the keyboard focus is indicated by a yellow rectangle, the 
active control indicator. The keyboard focus in a text field is also 
indicated by the insertion point, which shows where characters you type are 
inserted.



Within a dialog box, to move the focus from one field or list box to 
another
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Press the <Tab> key until the keyboard focus reaches the desired field 
or list box.
   or
   Press the appropriate arrow key(s) (<Up>, <Down>, <Right>, and <Left>)
   or
   Click in the appropriate field or list box.
   


Selecting files
---------------

Dialog boxes often let you select a file to open, attach, or operate on in 
some other way.

   To select a file for an operation in a dialog box:
   To modify the filter selection:
    To display the files in a different directory:
   To display the directories on a different disk:
   To select a list of files:


To select a file for an operation in a dialog box
-------------------------------------------------

1. Click the filename in the Files list box.
   or
   Key in the filename in the Name field. 
   
If there are more filenames than can be displayed at once in the Files list 
box, use the scroll bars to see additional filenames. If the desired file 
is not listed, modify either the filter or directory selections. The file 
filter selection appears in the Filter field. 



To modify the filter selection
------------------------------

1. In the Filter field, key in the desired filter. 
   
For example, to list only those files whose names end in ".dgn," use the 
file filter "*.dgn."

The directory selection is shown in the Directory option menu.



 To display the files in a different directory
----------------------------------------------

1. If the files you wish to display are in a sub-directory of the current 
directory, double-click the sub-directory in the Directories list box.
   or
   If the files are in a directory above the current directory in the tree 
structure, choose the directory from the Directory option menu.
   
The first time you use a dialog box, the initial directory selection is the 
directory specified in the definition of a configuration variable. (Setting 
Configuration Variables) For example, the default definition of the MS_DEF 
configuration variable specifies that MicroStation's "learning" directory 
is the initial directory selection in the Open Design File dialog box the 
first time the dialog box is used. After you use the dialog box, 
MicroStation "remembers" the name of the file you selected and the 
directory in which it was located. It automatically selects them the next 
time you open the dialog box.



To display the directories on a different disk
----------------------------------------------

1. Double-click the disk drive letter in the Directories list box.
   
Disk drive letters or names are displayed at the end of the list of 
directories in the Directories list box.



To select a list of files
-------------------------

1. TBD


Dialog box and settings box navigation
--------------------------------------

This table summarizes keyboard navigation within dialog and settings boxes

Key        Function

<Alt-      Moves to control with corresponding 
mnemonic   underlined mnemonic access character.
access 
character 
key>

<Tab>      Moves to next control. The order of 
           movement is generally from left to right 
           and from top to bottom.

<Shift-Tab>Moves to preceding control (reverse 
           order).

<space bar>* In text field, types a space character.* 
           In any other type of control, operates the 
           control (equivalent to clicking).

<Left><Righ* In text field, moves insertion point 
           left or right; stops at beginning and end 
           of text.* In any other type of control, 
           moves to next or preceding control.

<Up><Down> * In list box, selects next or preceding 
           entry; stops at top and bottom of list.* 
           In any other type of control, moves to 
           next or preceding control.

Alphanumeri* In text field, types the corresponding 
keys       character.* In list box, selects next item 
           beginning with the character.

<Return>   Presses the default button, if any. 
           Otherwise, in text field, same as <Tab>. 
           Otherwise, same as <space bar>.

<Esc>      Presses the Cancel button, if any. In 
           (non-modal) settings box, moves to the 
           Command Window's key-in area.





Working with Design Files in MicroStation
-----------------------------------------

MicroStation's File menu has items for creating, opening, saving, closing, 
and compressing design files.

You cannot have more than one design file open or active in MicroStation at 
a time. If you open a design file when one is already active, MicroStation 
automatically closes the first file. However, you can view the contents of 
other design files by attaching them for reference to the active design. 

   To open a design file as the active design file:
   To create a design file and open it as the active design file:
   To select a different seed file:
   To close the active design file:
   To "save as:"
   To make a backup copy of the active design file:
   To compress the active design file:


To open a design file as the active design file
-----------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Open (or press <Ctrl-O>).
   The Open Design File dialog box opens.
2. From the Type option menu, choose uStn, if it is not already chosen.
   The default filter is "*.dgn." Only filenames with the extension ".dgn" 
are displayed in the Files list box.
3. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field.
   For example, changing the filter to "*.*" displays all files in the 
current directory.
4. (Optional) To select a different source directory, use the Directories 
list box or option button.
5. In the Files list box, select the desired design file.
   or
   In the Name field, key in the name of the desired design file.
6. Click the OK button.
   


To create a design file and open it as the active design file
-------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose New (or press <Ctrl-N>).
   The Create Design File dialog box opens.
   The default filter is "*.dgn."
   The file specification for the default seed design file is displayed 
above the OK and Cancel buttons.
2. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field. 
   The file list is useful for avoiding assigning the new file the filename 
of an existing file.
3. (Optional) To select a different seed design file, use the Select Seed 
File dialog box (see To select a different seed file:).
4. (Optional) To select a different destination disk or directory, use the 
Directories list box.
5. In the Name field, key in a name for the new design file.
   Although the extension ".dgn" is often used to indicate a MicroStation 
design file, any or no extension is acceptable.
6. Click the OK button.
   


To select a different seed file
-------------------------------

1. In the Create Design File dialog box, for example, click the Seed 
button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box opens.
   The default filter is "s*.dgn."
2. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field.
3. (Optional) To select a different source directory, use the Directories 
list box.
4. In the Files list box, select the desired seed file.
   or
   In the Name field, key in the name of the desired seed file.
5. Click the OK button.
   


To close the active design file
-------------------------------

1. Open another design file as the active design file.
   or
   From the File menu, choose Close (or press <Ctrl-W>).
   
When you choose "Save As" from the File menu, you can save the active 
design file with a different name, in a different directory, or on a 
different disk. MicroStation also closes the active design file and opens 
the newly saved file as the active design file.



To "save as"
------------

1. From the File menu, choose Save As.
   The Save Design As dialog box opens.
2. From the Type menu, choose uStn, if it is not already chosen.
   The default filter is "*.dgn."
3. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field.
4. (Optional) To select a different destination disk or directory, use the 
Directories list box.
5. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field.
6. (Optional) To save the active design file under a different name, key in 
the new name in the Name field.???PING RAY: THIS IS NOT OPTIONAL (NAME OF 
ACTIVE FILE DOESN'T AUTOMATICALLY APPEAR IN NAME FIELD AS IT SHOULD)
7. Click the OK button.
   


To make a backup copy of the active design file
-----------------------------------------------

1.  Key in BACKUP. 
   This key-in makes a copy of the active file with the extension "bak" in 
the directory in which the active file is located. The active file is not 
closed. For more information, see *Xref.


To compress the active design file
----------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Compress Design.
   
Warning:
Compressing the active design file prevents previous changes from being 
undone.



Exiting MicroStation
--------------------

As you work, MicroStation saves all changes you make to the active design 
file to disk. After you close the design file, you can no longer undo 
changes with MicroStation's Undo feature. Therefore, be sure to undo any 
unwanted changes to the design file before you exit MicroStation.

   To exit MicroStation:


To exit MicroStation
--------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Exit (or press <Ctrl-Q> and then <Return>).
   


Using Drawing Tools
-------------------

MicroStation has dozens of drawing tools (called tools, for short). They 
are organized for convenient selection in tool palettes or for short, 
palettes. The Main palette opens automatically the first time you start 
MicroStation.

Tools are represented in palettes by icons. For simplicity, the term "tool" 
is used to refer both to a tool and its icon.

   Working with tool palettes
   Working with the selected tool
   Coping with mistakes


Working with tool palettes
--------------------------

There are two levels of palettes. Palettes on the first (top) level have no 
special name; those on the second (bottom) level are called sub-palettes. 
For example, the Lines sub-palette is one of many sub-palettes of the Main 
palette. (However, the term "palette" is often used to refer to palettes 
and sub-palettes collectively.)

The Palettes menu and its sub-menus show the arrangement of palettes and 
sub-palettes. Each item in the menu corresponds to a palette. A sub-menu is 
present for each palette that has sub-palettes. Each item in each sub-menu 
corresponds to a sub-palette. For example, the Main item in the Palettes 
menu has a sub-menu, in which Lines is but one of many items.

Note:
Several palettes and sub-palettes cannot be accessed from the New User 
workspace. For more information about the New User workspace, see *Xref.

A palette or sub-palette that is open on the screen in its own window is 
said to be floating. However, you can select a tool in a sub-palette 
without floating it. This makes it easier for you to select tools in 
sub-palettes without cluttering the screen.

In every palette that has sub-palettes, one tool from each sub-palette is 
displayed. For example, one of the tools in the Lines sub-palette is always 
displayed in the upper right corner of the Main palette. The sub-palettes 
can be opened and a tool selected through the "parent" palette.

   To open (and float) a palette:
   To open a sub-palette:
   To open and float a sub-palette:
   Selecting tools in palettes
   To select a tool from a palette or sub-palette (locked selection):
   To select a tool from a palette or sub-palette (single-shot):


To open (and float) a palette
-----------------------------

1. From the Palettes menu, choose the item for the desired palette.
   
For example, to open the Fence palette, choose Fence from the Palettes 
menu.



To open a sub-palette
---------------------

1. In the palette that is the "parent" of the desired sub-palette, press on 
the tool that is the "representative" from the sub-palette (and hold the 
Data button down).
   
For example, to open the Lines sub-palette, press on the upper rightmost 
tool in the Main palette (Place Line in the default palette configuration). 
As long as you hold down the Data button, the Lines sub-palette remains 
open. You can drag across the sub-palette to select a tool. When you 
release the Data button, the sub-palette closes and the selected tool is 
displayed in the Main palette.



To open and float a sub-palette
-------------------------------

1. In the appropriate palette, press on the tool from the desired 
sub-palette, and drag the sub-palette off of the parent palette. You have 
to drag the pointer a certain distance from the palette before it is "torn 
off." When the pointer is far enough away, the outline of the sub-palette 
is dynamically displayed.
   or
   From the Palettes menu sub-menu for the appropriate palette, choose the 
item for the desired sub-palette.
   
For example, to open and float the Lines sub-palette, either press on the 
upper rightmost tool in the Main palette and drag the Lines sub-palette off 
of the Main palette, or choose Lines from the Palette menu's Main sub-menu.

Note:
Some palettes contain view controls, as well as tools. View controls are 
used to change the portion of the design displayed in view windows. For 
more information, see Working with Views.



Selecting tools in palettes
---------------------------

Only one tool (or view control) is selected at a given time. The name of 
the selected tool is shown in the Command Window (see Using the Command 
Window). If the palette or sub-palette from which the tool was selected is 
floating, the tool is highlighted. By default, the default selected tool is 
the Element Selection tool.

By default, when you select a tool with a single click, it is locked -- the 
tool remains active even after you have used it. You can continue to use 
the tool, without having to select it again, until you select another tool.

You can select a tool for a single use by double-clicking it 
("single-shot") -- after you use the tool once, the default tool is 
automatically selected. (If no default tool is selected, no tool is 
selected after a single-shot operation.)



To select a tool from a palette or sub-palette (locked selection)
-----------------------------------------------------------------

1. Click the tool.
Hint:
If the desired tool is in a sub-palette of a floating palette, you can 
select the tool by pressing on the visible tool from that sub-palette, 
dragging the pointer to the desired tool, and releasing the Data button.



To select a tool from a palette or sub-palette (single-shot)
------------------------------------------------------------

1. Double-click the tool.
   
Note:
The user preference, Single Click, lets you select the tool for single-shot 
operation with a single click and select and lock the tool with a 
double-click..



Working with the selected tool
------------------------------

MicroStation provides several aids to help you use tools. To control 
settings that affect the way a tool works, you can use pop-down fields or 
the Tool Settings window. The Command Window gives you prompts, error 
messages, and other information about the selected tool.

   Tool settings
   To open the Tool Settings window:
   Using the Command Window
   Data points
   To enter a data point:
   Resets
   To enter a Reset:


Tool settings
-------------

Tool settings affect the operation of a specific tool. For example, the 
Angle setting constrains the angle at which a line can be drawn with the 
Place Line tool. Tools that have associated settings display a 
downward-pointing triangle (v).

Rather than making you adjust the settings for a tool each time you select 
that tool, MicroStation's settings remain in effect until you change them. 
This makes MicroStation more efficient to use, but it means that you have 
to keep the active tool's settings in mind or displayed on the screen.

Controls for adjusting tool settings can be displayed in two ways. If the 
sub-palette containing the selected tool is floating, the controls appear 
in a pop-down, an area that "pops down" beneath the sub-palette. For 
example, when the Lines sub-palette is floating and the Place Line tool is 
selected, the Length and Angle controls are displayed in the pop-down below 
the sub-palette. 

Alternatively, you can open the Tool Settings window. When it is open, it 
shows the controls for adjusting tool settings (if any) for the selected 
tool.



To open the Tool Settings window
--------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Tool Settings.
   
Note:
The pop-down and Tool Settings window display only settings specific to the 
selected tool. Not all settings are specific to particular tools. For 
example, element attributes and locks affect the placement of elements with 
many tools.



Using the Command Window
------------------------

The Command Window is MicroStation's "command center." It contains the main 
MicroStation menu bar and serves as the place to enter key-ins. (See 
Command Window Key-ins.) It also displays a variety of useful information, 
including prompts, error messages, and the name of the selected tool. If 
you are not sure "where you are" with a tool, look in the Command Window.

There are six fields in the Command Window, three on the left and three on 
the right. They are, from top to bottom, beginning on the left:
   Status field -- Information about which locks are on. For more 
information about locks, see *Xref.
   Command field -- The name of the selected tool or view control.
   Key-in area -- A field in which you can type key-ins (textual short-cuts 
that by-pass the graphical user interface). For more information about 
key-ins, see Command Window Key-ins.
   Message field -- Information about current settings, including the 
active level, element class, line weight, line style, color, and so on. For 
more information about these settings see *XRef(Ch2).
   Prompt field -- A message to guide you in using the selected tool or 
view control or the active tool modifier.
   Error field -- Error messages.
   


Data points
-----------

A data point is graphic input that, depending on the context:
*  Designates a point in a design (for element placement or selection, for 
example)
*  Designates the view in which it is entered (for fitting or updating, for 
example)
*  Accepts an operation (deleting an element, for example) rather than 
rejecting it.
   
In MicroStation, all open views are active. That is, you do not need first 
to select a view to work in; you can place and manipulate elements in any 
open view. This aspect of MicroStation is so powerful that you can even 
begin placing an element in one view and finish placing it in another view. 
For an example, see Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control. For 
more information about working with views, see Working with Views.



To enter a data point
---------------------

1. Position the pointer on the desired location in a view.
2. Press the Data button.
   
Note:
MicroStation offers a variety of more precise techniques for entering a 
data point. For information about these techniques, see *Xref.



Resets
------

Resetting in MicroStation is similar to pressing the Escape key in some 
other programs. For example, resetting will "back" you out of most 
procedures in MicroStation that have several steps. If a view control is 
selected, a Reset (or two) will de-select the view control and reselect the 
drawing tool selected when the view control was selected. 



To enter a Reset
----------------

1. Press the Reset button.
   


Coping with mistakes
--------------------

Within certain limits, you can undo operations in MicroStation to recover 
from a mistake. (For information about "undoing" viewing operations, see 
Negating viewing operations.)

   To undo (negate) the last operation:
   To undo all of the operations recorded in the undo buffer:
   To undo (negate) the last undo operation:


To undo (negate) the last operation
-----------------------------------

1. From the Edit menu, choose Undo <operation> (or press <Alt-Backspace>).
   
For example, suppose that you just placed a line with the Place Line tool. 
To undo this operation, you would choose Undo place line from the Edit 
menu.

Hint:
After you undo the last operation, the operation just before it ordinarily 
becomes undoable. You can, therefore, undo a series of operations by 
repeatedly choosing Undo from the Edit menu.

Note:
One limit on the undo operation is the size of the undo buffer, an area of 
memory (RAM) set aside by MicroStation for recording operations. The 
smaller the undo buffer, the fewer operations can be negated. See *Xref for 
more information about the undo buffer.

Note:
A second limitation on undoing is that you cannot undo operations made 
before the design file was last closed or compressed. When you close the 
design file (including "saving as"), the undo buffer is emptied. For more 
information about compressing a design file, see *Xref.



To undo all of the operations recorded in the undo buffer
---------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Edit menu's Undo sub-menu, choose All.
   


To undo (negate) the last undo operation
----------------------------------------

1. From the Edit menu, choose Redo <operation> (or press <Alt-Ins>).
   


Working with Views
------------------

Whether you have a single small display or enormous dual monitors, 
MicroStation's views help you make the most of your system. You can 
configure the views for maximum efficiency, taking into account your 
system, your project, and your working style.

   Arranging views on the screen
   Using view controls
   Setting view attributes
   Negating viewing operations
   Using saved views
   Saving the view configuration


Arranging views on the screen
-----------------------------

MicroStation lets you arrange any or all views anywhere and in any shape on 
the screen. Views can be easily be arranged into two "standard" layouts. If 
you "lose" a view, choosing one of these standard arrangements can help you 
regain your bearings.

One standard arrangement of views is tiling. When the views are tiled, each 
open view is assigned an equal amount of screen space, and the views are 
arranged by number. By default, tiling orders views from left to right and 
top to bottom.

The second standard arrangement is cascading. When the views are cascaded, 
each view is the same size, but only the lowest numbered view is entirely 
visible. The other open views are stacked beneath the lowest numbered view 
with only their title bars visible. You can "flip" through the views by 
choosing Bottom to Top from the View menu.

   To open a view:
   To close a view:
   To cascade views:
   To bring the bottom view to the top:
   To tile views:
   To maximize a view (enlarge it to fill the screen):
   To restore a view (to its size before maximizing):
   To minimize a view (reduce it to its smallest size):
   To restore a view (to its size before minimizing):
   To move a view with the pointer:
   Using the resize borders
   To resize a view with the pointer:


To open a view
--------------

1. From the View menu's Open/Close sub-menu, choose the number of the view 
you want to open.
   
   Check buttons to the right of open views' numbers appear to be depressed 
(darker). Check buttons to the right of closed views' numbers are not 
depressed (lighter).
   


To close a view
---------------

1. From the View menu's Open/Close sub-menu, choose the number of the view 
you want to close.
   or
   Double-click the window menu button on the left end of the view's title 
bar.
   or
   From the view's window menu (which you open by pressing on the window 
menu button on the left end of the view's title bar), choose Close (or 
press <Alt-F4>).
   


To cascade views
----------------

1. From the View menu, choose Cascade.
   


To bring the bottom view to the top
-----------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Bottom to Top.
   


To tile views
-------------

1. From the View menu, choose Tile.
   Views are tiled from lowest to highest beginning in the upper left 
corner of the screen and progressing from left to right. If there are more 
than two views open, MicroStation arranges the views into an upper and a 
lower row. If you have views open on more than one screen, each screen's 
views will be tiled on the screen on which they are open.
   
Note:
If you are accustomed to the way IGDS tiled four views, you can turn on the 
user preference Tile like IDGS (in the More Preferences dialog box). If 
exactly four views are open on a screen, they will be tiled in the order 
IGDS tiled views.



To maximize a view (enlarge it to fill the screen)
--------------------------------------------------

1. Click the view's Maximize button, the larger of the two buttons on the 
right end of its title bar.
   or
   From the view's window menu, choose Maximize (or press <Alt-F10>).
   


To restore a view (to its size before maximizing)
-------------------------------------------------

1. Click the view's Maximize button.
   or
   From the view's window menu, choose Restore (or press <Alt-F5>).
   


To minimize a view (reduce it to its smallest size)
---------------------------------------------------

1. Click the view's Minimize button, the smaller of the two buttons on the 
right end of its title bar.
   or
   From the view's window menu, choose Minimize (or press <Alt-F9>).
   


To restore a view (to its size before minimizing)
-------------------------------------------------

1. Click the view's Minimize button.
   or
   From the view's window menu, choose Restore (or press <Alt-F5>).
   


To move a view with the pointer
-------------------------------

1. Position the pointer on the title bar of the view.
   The pointer becomes a four-arrow shape.
2. Press and hold down the Data button.
3. Drag the view to the desired location.
   


Using the resize borders
------------------------

The four borders of a view are called resize borders because dragging them 
resizes the view. For example, by dragging the right resize border, you can 
make the view wider or narrower. By dragging a corner of the resize border, 
you can change both the height and width of a view. The pointer indicates 
the directions in which you can drag the border or corner.



To resize a view with the pointer
---------------------------------

1. Position the pointer on one of the view's resize borders or corners.
   
To:                 Position the pointer  The pointer 
                    here:                 becomes:

Increase or decreaseOn the top or bottom  A vertical double arrow
view's vertical sizeresize border

Increase or decreaseOn the right or left  A horizontal double 
view's horizontal siresize border         arrow

Change the view's heOn one of the four borA diagonal double arrow
and width simultaneocorners (small lines on 
                    the border mark the 
                    corners)


2. Press and hold down the Data button.
3. Drag the border or corner to resize the view as desired.
   
Note:
There are variations in the above procedures on some systems. If you have 
trouble with a procedure or suspect a difference between a procedure and a 
system convention, see Introducing MicroStation.



Using view controls
-------------------

View controls are used to change the portion of the design displayed in 
views. All view controls can be selected by choosing items in the View 
menu. The most commonly used view controls can also be selected in the View 
Control sub-palette (a sub-palette of the Main palette).

To:                      Use thi:

Update (redraw) views.   Update View (*Xref)

Window an area in a view Window Area (*Xref)
defining diagonally opposite 
corners of the area.

Window an area in views bWindow Center (*Xref)
defining the center.

Increase the magnificatioZoom In (*Xref)
views.

Decrease the magnificatioZoom Out (*Xref)
views.

Fit the active design in Fit Active Design 
                         (*Xref)



Arguably the two most useful view controls are Window Area and Fit Active 
Design. With these view controls, you can fit the entire design in a view 
(for the "big picture" or to get your bearings) and designate an area to 
display in another view to see details.

The Update View view control is provided to redraw the display when an 
operation leaves a view with an incomplete display. For example, if you 
delete an element that crosses in front of (and partially obscures) another 
element, the part of the underlying element that should be revealed might 
not be redrawn automatically.

Note:
The Window Center view control is not accessible in the New User workspace.

Note:
For more information about view controls, see *Xref:View Menu in Ref Guide.

   Pop-up menu
   To use the pop-up menu to select a view control:


Pop-up menu
-----------

Using the pop-up menu is an easy way to select view controls. 



To use the pop-up menu to select a view control
-----------------------------------------------

1. With the screen pointer in a view, press (and hold down) the <Shift> 
key.
2. Click or press the Reset Button.
   The pop-up menu is activated at the screen pointer location. If you 
clicked the Reset button, the menu is posted. If you pressed the Reset 
button, the menu opens.
3. Choose the item that corresponds to the view control you want to select.
   The view control is selected.
   
Note:
.If the tool that is selected when the pop-up menu is activated supports 
*Xref: Tool modifiers, each item in the pop-up menu activates a different 
tool modifier rather than a view control.

Note:
The method of activating the pop-up menu is a user preference, View 
Popups:, in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box. However, 
the default preference, Press Reset Button, is not yet supported. The 
default method in this Beta version, described above, is actually Shift 
Reset Button. See *Xref.



Setting view attributes
-----------------------

Views have a number of attributes that you can adjust individually for each 
view. Some view attribute settings determine whether parts of a design -- 
elements on particular levels, text, area fill, and drawing aids such as 
the grid -- will be displayed. Others determine from what angle the view is 
seen (rotation) and the manner in which the design is displayed -- with or 
without perspective, dynamic updating, and so on. (Many of these view 
attributes are not accessible in the New User workspace.)

   Level display
   To change the named levels displayed in views:
   To change the numbered (unnamed) levels displayed in a view:
   To apply the level map of the chosen view to all views:
   Rotation
   To change the rotation of a view:
   Other view attributes
   To change the display mode for a view:
   To turn other view attributes on or off:
   To apply the same attributes to all views:


Level display
-------------

Each element in the design is on one of 63 drawing levels. Levels are 
analogous to transparent overlays: In different combinations they make it 
easier to see parts of a design; together, they show the entire design. 

Levels can be named and grouped hierarchically. For example, levels named 
"chairs," "tables" and "desks" could be grouped together as "furniture" and 
turned on or off as a group. In turn, "furniture" could be a part of a 
higher level group of levels.

The Level Names settings box is used to control level display with named 
levels.



To change the named levels displayed in views
---------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. Select the name of a level you want to change in the Levels list box.
3. From the Display menu in the Level Names settings box, choose On (to 
turn on display) or Off (to turn off display).
4. Select the views in which you want the change to take effect by entering 
a data point inside each.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 for each additional level whose display status you want 
to change.
   
The View Levels settings box is used to control level display with unnamed 
levels.



To change the numbered (unnamed) levels displayed in a view
-----------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Levels (or press <Ctrl-E>).
   The View Levels settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose 
level map you want to change.
   The level map for the chosen view is displayed. The highlighted numbers 
identify the levels that are displayed in the view. The circled level 
number is the active level for element placement; the active level cannot 
be turned off in any view.
3. Click on and drag through level numbers to adjust the level display 
settings. To turn a single level on or off, click that level number. To set 
many levels at once, drag on the level map. To set a rectangular block of 
levels, press <Shift> while dragging.
4. Click the Apply button. 
   


To apply the level map of the chosen view to all views
------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Levels (or press <Ctrl-E>).
   The View Levels settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose 
level map you want to apply to all views.
   The level map for the chosen view is displayed. The highlighted numbers 
identify the levels that are displayed in the view. The circled level 
number is the active level for element placement; the active level cannot 
be turned off in any view.
3. (Optional) If you wish to adjust the level display settings before 
applying them to all views, click on and drag through the desired level 
numbers. To turn a single level on or off, click that level number. To set 
many levels at once, drag on the level map. To set a rectangular block of 
levels, press <Shift> while dragging.
4. Click the All button.
   


Rotation
--------

The View Rotation settings box can be used to control view rotation.



To change the rotation of a view
--------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Rotation.
   The View Rotation settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose the number of the view whose rotation 
you want to change.
   The view rotation is graphically displayed above the Std option menu.
3. Choose a standard orientation from the Std option menu. If the active 
design file is 2D, top is the only standard orientation.
   or
   Specify a custom rotation by clicking or pressing on the "+" and "-" 
controls. If necessary, set Step to change the rotation increment (in 
degrees) for each click.
4. Click the Apply button.
   
Note:
For information about other view rotation methods, see *Xref:View menu.

Note:
The View Rotation settings box is not accessible in the New User workspace.



Other view attributes
---------------------

The view attribute settings other than level display and rotation are 
controlled through the View Attributes settings box. Some determine whether 
parts of a design and drawing aids will be displayed. Others determine the 
manner in which the design is displayed.



To change the display mode for a view
-------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>).
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose 
display mode you want to change.
3. From the Display Mode option menu, choose the desired display mode.
   TBD ???EXPLAIN 2D DISPLAY MODES. XREF FOR EXPLANATIONS OF 3D-SPECIFIC 
DISPLAY MODES
4. Click the Apply button.
   


To turn other view attributes on or off
---------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>).
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose 
attributes you want to change.
3. Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the check buttons 
to the left of the appropriate items.
4. Click the Apply button.
   


To apply the same attributes to all views
-----------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>).
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose 
display mode you want to apply to all views.
3. (Optional) Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the 
check buttons to the left of the appropriate items.
4. Click the All button.
   


Negating viewing operations
---------------------------

The last eight viewing operations for each view are stored in memory. The 
stored viewing operations include use of view controls and changes in view 
attributes.

   To negate a viewing operation:
   To reinstate a negated viewing operation:


To negate a viewing operation
-----------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Previous.
2. Enter a data point in a view to select it.
   You can repeat this procedure up to eight times, depending upon how many 
viewing operations have been performed in the selected view.
   


To reinstate a negated viewing operation
----------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Next.
2. Enter a data point in a view to select it.
   You can repeat this procedure up to eight times, depending upon how many 
viewing operations have been negated in the selected view.
   


Using saved views
-----------------

A saved view is a view definition that is given a name and saved in the 
design file. You create the definition by setting up a source view as a 
model and saving it. The saved view can be recalled and attached (applied) 
to a destination view so that the destination view has the same attributes 
and displays the same portion of the design as the source view.

The Saved Views settings box is used to name, save, attach, and delete 
views.

Note:
The Saved Views settings box is not accessible in the New User workspace.

Note:
For information about special ways to use saved views in 3D, see Using 
saved views in 3D.

   To name and save a view:
   To attach a saved view:
   To delete a saved view:


To name and save a view
-----------------------

1. Set up the source view so that the desired portion of the design is 
displayed and the view attributes are as desired.
2. From the View menu, choose Saved.
   The Saved Views settings box opens.
3. From the View option menu, choose the number of the source view.
4. In the Name field, key in a name for the view. The maximum number of 
characters in the name is six. Valid characters include the letters of the 
alphabet (upper and lower case letters are treated the same), numbers, "_", 
".", and ",".
5. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description of the view. 
The maximum number of characters in the description is 27. Valid characters 
include the letters of the alphabet (upper and lower case letters are 
treated the same), numbers, "_", ".", ",", and the space.
6. Click the Save button.
   


To attach a saved view
----------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Saved.
   The Saved Views settings box opens.
2. From the Dest View option menu, choose the number of the destination 
view.
3. In the list box, select the saved view you want to attach.
4. Click the Attach button.
   


To delete a saved view
----------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Saved.
   The Saved Views settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the saved view you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
   


Saving the view configuration
-----------------------------

A design's view configuration consists of the screen positions and 
attributes of all views -- open, closed, and saved -- and a description of 
the portion of the design contained in each view. Changes to the view 
configuration are not automatically saved in the design file, but they can 
be manually saved.

Warning:
If you do not save changes to the view configuration before you close the 
design file, the changes are discarded: When you reopen the design file, 
the view configuration is the same as it was when it was last saved.

   To save the view configuration in the design file:


To save the view configuration in the design file
-------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Save Settings (or press <Ctrl-F>).
   
Note:
Choosing Save Settings saves many settings specific to the design file in 
addition to the view configuration. For information about the other 
settings saved, see *Xref.



Using On-line Help
------------------

MicroStation features extensive on-line help. The Help Menu and Help window 
are used to access on-line help.

The Help window is a special non-modal dialog box that has the following 
features:
*  It can be resized in the same way as a view. Text is re-flowed when the 
Help window is resized. See Using the resize borders for information about 
resizing a window. 
*  Text is displayed in multiple fonts, boldface, and color.
*  Hypertext, which appears underlined in blue by default, lets you easily 
move between articles on related topics. Clicking hypertext causes the Help 
window to "jump" -- that is, to display the help article on that topic.
   
   To select and view an article from a list of topics:
   To scroll through an article:
   To display a different article:
   To display one of the displayed article's sub-topics:
   To search for text:
   To display the article for a topic in which text was found:
   To display a recently-viewed topic:


To select and view an article from a list of topics
---------------------------------------------------

1. From the Help menu, choose Contents.
   or
   Key in HELP.
   The Help window opens and the Table of Contents is displayed.
2. Click the desired topic.
   


To scroll through an article
----------------------------

The table lists the scrolling options.

To          Do the following:
scroll:

One line    Click either scroll arrow.

One window  Click the scroll bar above or below the 
            scroll box.

ContinuouslyPoint to either scroll arrow and hold 
            down the Data button.

To any      Drag the scroll box up or down.
position





To display a different article
------------------------------

The table lists ways to display a different article.

To display the:       Click in the Help 
                      window:

Article on a topic    the hypertext
highlighted as hypertext

Next article in help fNext (>>) button

Previous article in hePrevious (<<) button
file

Last article you vieweBack button

The displayed article'Up button
"parent"

Top level topic list  Contents button



Note:
Pressing the Up button repeatedly eventually causes the top level topic 
list to display.



To display one of the displayed article's sub-topics
----------------------------------------------------

1. Scroll to the end of the article.
   If the topic has sub-topics, they are listed at its end.
2. Click the sub-topic you want to view.
   


To search for text
------------------

1. In the Help window, click the Find button.
   The Find settings box opens.
2. In the Text field, key in the text.
3. (Optional) Adjust search options.
   - To restrict the search to sub-topics of the article displayed in the 
Help window, choose Subtopics of Current Topic from the In option menu.
   - To search article text instead of only topic names, turn off Topic 
Names Only.
   - To search only for text that contains character sequences that exactly 
match the specified text, turn on Whole Words Only.
   - To search only for text that matches the capitalization of the 
specified text, turn on Match Case.
4. Click the Find button.
   Topics in which the specified text is found are listed in the Found 
Topics list box.
   


To display the article for a topic in which text was found
----------------------------------------------------------

1. In the Find settings box, double-click the topic in the Found Topics 
list box.
   The article is displayed in the Help window.
   


To display a recently-viewed topic
----------------------------------

1. In the Help window, click the History button.
   The History window opens, displaying a list of the most recently-viewed 
help topics (up to 40).
2. To go to a topic in the list, double-click the topic.
   
Note:
If you run MicroStation Version 5.0 under Microsoft Windows (including 
Windows NT), you will also be able to use the Windows help system while 
running MicroStation. For more information, see *Xref: Introducing MS PC.



Command Window Key-ins
----------------------

Key-ins are typed instructions entered into the Command Window to control 
MicroStation. The effect of nearly all key-ins can be obtained using the 
graphical user interface. However, a key-in can be quicker at times, 
especially since MicroStation recognizes abbreviations.

There are several ways to find key-ins. If you know (or can guess) the 
first word of the key-in, you can use the Key-in Browser settings box. It 
lets you "build" key-ins: You scroll through the first words of key-ins, 
select one, scroll through words that can follow the selected word, select 
one, and so on. Then you can submit the key-in to MicroStation.

Other places to find key-ins are the Quick Reference card, the Help system, 
and the table of key-ins on *Xref.

MicroStation recognizes abbreviated key-ins, as long as the abbreviation is 
not ambiguous. For example, the key-in "MDL LOAD <application_name>" can be 
abbreviated "MDL L <application_name>." As long as the abbreviation is 
unique, there is no ambiguity.

Before you enter key-ins, the Command Window must have the keyboard focus. 
(See To move the keyboard focus to the Command Window:.) When the Command 
Window has the keyboard focus, the blinking text cursor appears in the 
key-in area.

   To select a tool, tool modifier, or view control using a key-in:
   To construct and submit a key-in using the Key-in Browser:
   Recalling key-ins
   Editing key-ins


To select a tool, tool modifier, or view control using a key-in
---------------------------------------------------------------

1. In the key-in area of the Command Window, key in the key-in text. If 
necessary, edit the key-in using the procedures described in Editing 
key-ins.
   By convention, to "key in" the key-in means to type the text into the 
key-in area and to press <Return>.
   


To construct and submit a key-in using the Key-in Browser
---------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Help menu, choose Key-in Browser.
   or
   In the key-in area of the Command Window, key in ?.
   The Key-in Browser settings box opens.
2. Select a keyword in the leftmost list box.
   The selected keyword is displayed in the key-in area of the Command 
Window, and subordinate second-level keywords are shown in the next list 
box in the Key-in Browser.
3. As necessary, select additional keywords, one per list box from left to 
right, until the desired key-in is constructed.
4. To submit the key-in, click the Key-in button or press <Return>.
   
Hint:
To open the Key-in Browser with a known keyword(s) already selected, key in 
the string in the Command Window that consists of the known keyword(s), 
followed by ?. For example, to most quickly browse key-ins that begin with 
PLACE CIRCLE, key in place circle ?. The Key-in Browser will open with 
place already selected in the leftmost list box and circle already selected 
in the next list box.



Recalling key-ins
-----------------

MicroStation stores submitted key-ins in a buffer so you can recall them 
and, if necessary, edit them. This feature is similar to some operating 
systems' command line editors. When the buffer is full, the earlier key-ins 
are deleted as necessary to make room for the latest ones.

   To recall a key-in:


To recall a key-in
------------------

1. Press the <Up> key repeatedly until the desired key-in text appears in 
the key-in area.
   


Editing key-ins
---------------

The basic editing keys available for text editing in MicroStation can be 
used to edit text in the key-in area, whether the text was recalled from an 
earlier key-in or entered directly. Cut, copy and paste are not available. 
For more information about editing text, see Introducing MicroStation.

   To move the text cursor in the key-in area:
   To delete text in the key-in area:
   To delete a range of text in the key-in area:
   To delete all the text in the key-in area:
   To replace a range of text in the key-in area:


To move the text cursor in the key-in area
------------------------------------------

1. Press the <Left> and <Right> keys
   or
   Click with the pointer where you want the cursor.
   


To delete text in the key-in area
---------------------------------

1. Press the <Del> or <Backspace> key.
   


To delete a range of text in the key-in area
--------------------------------------------

1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer.
2. Press the <Del> key.
   


To delete all the text in the key-in area
-----------------------------------------

1. Reset or press <Esc>.
   


To replace a range of text in the key-in area
---------------------------------------------

1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer.
2. Key in the new text.
   


Using Tablet Menus
------------------

   Sample menus


Sample menus
------------

The ATTACH MENU (AM=) key-in is used to attach, activate, and deactivate 
tablet menus.

   To attach and activate a command menu:
   To attach and activate a matrix menu:
   To select a tool or view control using a command or matrix menu:
   To deactivate the command menu:
   To deactivate a matrix menu:
   To attach a cursor button menu:
   To select a tool or view control using a cursor button menu:
   To deactivate a cursor button menu:


To attach and activate a command menu
-------------------------------------

1. Tape the menu to the lower left corner of the tablet surface.
2. Key in AM=<menu>,cm
   menu is the name of the menu.
3. Enter a data point to identify the menu origin at the lower left corner 
of the menu.
4. Enter a data point on the upper right corner of the menu.
   The message "Menu successfully attached" is displayed in the Command 
Window.
   


To attach and activate a matrix menu
------------------------------------

1. Tape the menu to the lower left corner of the tablet surface.
2. Key in AM=<menu>,m<#>.
   menu is the name of the menu, and # is a number in the range 1-3, 
indicating the first, second, or third matrix menu.
3. Enter a data point to identify the menu origin at the lower left corner 
of the menu.
4. Enter a data point on the upper right corner of the menu.
   The message "Menu successfully attached" is displayed in the Command 
Window.
   


To select a tool or view control using a command or matrix menu
---------------------------------------------------------------

1. Position the tablet cursor on the menu block for the desired tool or 
view control.
2. Press the Command button.
   


To deactivate the command menu
------------------------------

1. Key in AM=,cm.
   


To deactivate a matrix menu
---------------------------

1. Key in AM=,m<number>.
   # is a number in the range 1-3, indicating the first, second, or third 
matrix menu.
   


To attach a cursor button menu
------------------------------

1. Key in AM=<menu>,cb.
   menu is the name of the menu.
   


To select a tool or view control using a cursor button menu
-----------------------------------------------------------



To deactivate a cursor button menu
----------------------------------

1. Key in AM=,cb.
   
   



















Basic 2D Design and Drafting
----------------------------

   Basic 2D Design and Drafting
   Create a new design file
   Draw a simple 2D design
   Savable Settings
   Preparing to Draw
   Setting the Active Element Attributes
   Tools
   Using Grid Lock
   Using Precision Input
   Dynamic Alignment
   Using Tentative Points
   Manipulating and Modifying Elements
   Using Cells
   Using Points
   Using the Settings Groups Window


Basic 2D Design and Drafting
----------------------------

In the lesson in *Xref, you saw how MicroStation's tool palettes are 
organized. You used some of the tools and view controls and saw how 
settings can influence the action of tools.

   Preview


Preview
-------

In this lesson, you will use MicroStation's basic features for drawing 2D 
designs. After you create and open a new design file, you will see how 
easily MicroStation's line styles, tentative points, and cells let you draw 
a simple architectural plan.

You will learn how to:
*  Create a new design file.
*  Draw a simple 2D design.
   
In creating the design, you will
*  Set element attributes.
*  Place elements with precision input.
*  Select and use line styles.
*  Use tentative points and snapping.
*  Attach a cell library, browse through it, and place cells.
   
Note:
These exercises are meant to be performed consecutively. In each exercise, 
it is assumed that you have just completed the preceding exercise.



Create a new design file
------------------------

MicroStation is supplied with a variety of templates or seed design files. 
(*Xref) Since MicroStation has no defaults for most settings (except for 
user preferences), each seed file has settings that are convenient "default 
settings" for a different type of designing and drafting. 

When you create a new design file, MicroStation copies a seed file, gives 
the copy the name you designate, and opens that copied design file as the 
active design file.

To prepare for this exercise, start MicroStation and open any design file.

>> Create the design file "myoffice.dgn:"

1. From the File menu, choose New (or press <Ctrl-N>).
   The Create Design File dialog box opens.
2. Click the Seed button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box opens.
   The seed files available to you are displayed in the Files list box. 
Since you are making a 2D architectural drawing in this lesson, select the 
seed file "sdarch2d.dgn," a 2D seed file for architectural designs.
3. Click the OK button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box closes. The file name "sdarch2d.dgn" is 
displayed in the Seed File area of the Create Design File dialog box, and 
the cursor is blinking in the Name field (unless you have clicked in some 
other area of the dialog box).
4. Key in the file name, "myoffice.dgn" in the Name field.
5. Click the OK button.
   MicroStation creates the new design file, closes the active design file, 
and opens the new file as the active file. Views 1 and 2 are open and 
cascaded.
   
Picking an appropriate seed file -- whether one delivered with MicroStation 
or one you create for yourself -- can save you a lot of time changing 
settings for the type of work you need to do. Next you will look at some of 
the settings in your new file, which are those in the seed file.

>> Check the settings of "myoffice.dgn:"

1. From the Settings menu, choose Working Units (*Xref).
   The Working Units settings box opens. Master units are set to feet (') 
and inches ("). There are 12 inches per foot and 8,000 positional units 
(the smallest unit of distance in MicroStation) per inch. This means that 
your working (drawing) area is a square 44,739 feet on each side and that 
you can place elements to an accuracy of one 8,000th of an inch. For more 
information about working units, see Design plane.
2. Click the Cancel button to close the Working Units settings box.
3. From the Settings menu, choose Grid.
   The Grid settings box opens. Grid points are arranged orthogonally and 
with an X to Y aspect ratio of 1 (they form squares), each one inch (one 
sub unit) from the next. Every 12th grid point is displayed as a reference 
point (a small cross). Thus, the reference grid points are laid out in 
feet. Grid Lock, which forces data points to lie exactly on a grid point, 
is not turned on. For more information about the grid, see Grid.
4. Close the Grid settings box.


Draw a simple 2D design
-----------------------

You are designing an office for a CAD manager. The office will be furnished 
with a regular desk, tables, a PC, and chairs. The office is 10 feet by 18 
feet in size, with windows on one of the shorter walls.

>> Select a line style to represent interior walls:

1. From the Element menu, choose Line Styles. 
   The Line Styles settings box opens.
2. Click the Show Detail check button to turn it on.
   The settings box enlarges.
3. In the Names list box, select Interior Wall.
   The description and a sample of the line style are displayed at the 
bottom of the settings box.
4. In the Names list box, double-click Interior Wall
   or
   Click the large button on which the sample of the line style is 
displayed.
   LC=Interior Wall is displayed in the Command Window, indicating the line 
style named Interior Wall is the Active Line Style.
5. Close the Line Styles settings box, sink it, click Show Detail again to 
shrink it, or drag it out of the way.
   
When you use precision input, you place elements at precise locations by 
keying in exact coordinates in the design file, rather than specifying 
locations with graphical input from the mouse.

>> Place the interior walls with precision input:

1. Maximize View (??)[I hope some thought is given to how views are set up 
in the seed file. I sent a message to SLK about this.]
2. In the Main palette, select the Place Line tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter Datapoint" [needs to be 
changed to "Enter data point" - or "Enter data point to begin line"]
3. In the Command Window, key in POINT ABSOLUTE 0,0 or XY=0,0.
   The POINT ABSOLUTE or XY= key-in lets you enter a data point at absolute 
coordinates. The location at which the X and Y values are 0 is the Global 
Origin. A line is dynamically displayed from the Global Origin to the 
screen pointer.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter Datapoint" [needs to be 
changed to "Enter data point" - or "Enter data point to end line"]
4. In the Command Window, key in POINT DISTANCE 14,0 or DI=14,0.
   The key-in POINT DISTANCE or DI= lets you enter a data point at a 
precise distance and angle from the last data point. In this case, the 
distance is 14 master units and the angle is 0.
5. In the Command Window, key in POINT DELTA 0,12 or DL=0,12.
   The key-in POINT DELTA or DL= directs MicroStation to enter a data point 
at coordinates specified by reference to the last data point. In this case, 
there is no change (0) in the X coordinate value for the new data point. 
The Y value of the data point is 12 master units greater than that of the 
last data point.
6. In the Command Window, key in POINT VDELTA -14,0 or DX=-14,0.
   The key-in POINT VDELTA or DX= is similar to the DL= key-in, except that 
the coordinate values refer to the X-axis and Y-axis of the view. The axes 
of this view and of the design are congruent, so the DX= and DL= key-ins 
are equivalent. (If the view had been rotated, the axes of the view might 
not match those of the design.)
7. In the Command Window, key in XY=0,0.
   The four walls of the office are in place.
   
Note:
The rectangle you have just drawn could have been created more easily with 
the Place Block tool.

>> Make openings in the wall for two windows and a door:

Two windows will be placed on the wall to the left, and one door on the 
wall to the right. To make room for them, parts of the walls need to be 
deleted.

1. Open the Modify Element sub-palette and select the Delete Part of 
Element tool.
   (Put image of Modify Element tool here.)
   The Delete Part of Element tool is the fourth tool in the top row of the 
Modify Element sub-palette.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select start pnt for partial 
delete." [needs to be changed]
2. In the Command Window, key in XY=0,10.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select end pnt for partial delete." 
[needs to be changed]
3. In the Command Window, key in DI=3,270.
   The Delete Part of Element tool is still selected. The prompt in the 
Command Window is "Select start pnt for partial delete."
4. In the Command Window, key in XY=0,5.
5. In the Command Window, key in DI=3,270.
   The left wall is partially deleted to make room for the windows. The 
Delete Part of Element tool is still selected.
6. In the Command Window, key in XY=14,5.
7. In the Command Window, key in DI=3,270.
   Part of the right wall is deleted to make room for a door.
   
>> Select another line style to represent windows:

1. From the Element menu, choose Line Styles. 
   The Line Styles settings box opens. If you want to see samples of the 
line styles, turn on Show Detail as before.
2. In the Names list box, double-click Window.
3. Close the Line Styles settings box, sink it, or drag it out of the way.
   
One way to place elements precisely with graphical input from the mouse is 
by snapping a tentative point to an existing element. To snap a keypoint to 
an element, place the pointer over or very near the element and press the 
Tentative button. (For information about how to press the Tentative button 
on your system, see Introducing MicroStation.)

As its name implies, a tentative point is a precursor to a data point. If 
the tentative point is properly located, you can enter a data point at its 
location by "accepting" the tentative point. If the tentative point is not 
where you want it, place another tentative point.

If entered close enough to an element, a tentative point snaps to (is 
located precisely on) a keypoint on the element. (For more information 
about snapping and keypoints, see Snapping tentative points to elements. 

Since the openings for the windows are precisely drawn, you can use 
tentative points to place the windows precisely on the ends of the lines 
representing the walls. 

>> Place the windows by snapping to the walls:

1. In the Main palette, select the Place Line tool.
2. Point at the left end of the wall parallel to and closest to the top of 
the screen (where the upper window opening begins).
3. Press the Tentative button.
   If the pointer was close enough to the end of the line that represents 
wall, the tentative point snaps to it, large cross hairs appear at the end 
of the line, and the line is highlighted.
   If the tentative point does not snap to the end of the line, simply try 
again.
4. Enter a data point anywhere in the view to accept the tentative point.
   The large cross hairs disappear, the tentative point becomes a data 
point, and a line is dynamically displayed from the end of the line 
representing the wall to the pointer.
5. Snap a tentative point to the upper end of the wall segment between the 
two window openings.
   The tentative point snaps to the end of the line that represents the 
wall, large cross hairs appear at the end of that line, and the line is 
highlighted.
6. Enter a data point to accept the placement of the tentative point.
   The first window is placed.
7. Reset.
8. Repeat the procedure in steps 2 through 6 to place a window in the lower 
opening in the wall.
   
Suppose you were designing an office and that you had to place identical 
representations of chairs, desks, and other pieces of furniture throughout 
the design. It would certainly be tedious to draw the same things over and 
over or to use the Copy Element tool to duplicate them repeatedly. It would 
be more efficient to draw each piece of furniture once, store it in a file, 
and place copies of the drawing wherever needed.

MicroStation's cells and cell libraries give you the ability to do just 
that. A cell is a complex element composed of primary or other complex 
elements (in effect, a small drawing) that can be stored in a file, the 
cell library, for repeated use in one or many designs. (For more 
information about complex elements, see *XRef(Ch3)).To make the cells in a 
cell library available for use with a design file, you associate the cell 
library with the design file by "attaching" the library to the design file. 
(MicroStation can search "unattached" cell libraries for a particular cell, 
though. See *Xref (Using Multiple Cell Libraries)).

>> Attach the cell library "myoffice.cel" to the design file 
"myoffice.dgn":

1. From the File menu's Cell Library sub-menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.
2. (Optional) If the file or files in the "/learning/cell" directory are 
not listed, select the "/learning/cell" directory from the Directories list 
box.
3. Select the cell library, "myoffice.cel" in the Files list box.
4. Click the OK button.
   
There are a variety of ways to use cells (you can use them for patterning 
and as line terminators, for example). In this exercise, you will place 
cells in the design as though you were placing a line or other element.

>> Select the "door" cell as the active placement cell (Active Cell):

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens. The name of the attached cell 
library is shown in the title bar.
2. Select the cell named "door."
3. In the Active Cells section below the list box, click the Placement 
button.
   The name of the selected cell is displayed to the right of the Placement 
button.
4. Close the Cell Library settings box, drag it out of the way, or sink it 
beneath the view.
   
>> Place a door cell in the opening for the door in the design:

1. From the Main palette, tear off the Cells sub-palette.
2. Select the Place Active Cell tool.
   In the pop-down, "door" is the active cell. There are also controls for 
rotating (Active Angle) and scaling the cell as it is placed. It is not 
necessary to adjust those controls in this case.
   As you move the pointer about the screen, the cell is dynamically 
displayed. The cell contains representations of a door frame, an open door, 
and the sweep.
3. On the wall to the right of the view, snap a tentative point to the top 
of the line where the door opening begins.
   Large cross hairs show that the cell will snap to this location.
4. Enter a data point to accept placement of the cell.
5. Reset to de-select the Place Active Cell tool.
   
In the cell library, there are a variety of other cells that represent 
office furnishings such as a desk, a table, chairs, computer hardware and a 
telephone. Now that you have completed this lesson, for more practice 
placing cells, select other cells as the Active Cell and place them in the 
office to furnish it.



Savable Settings
----------------

You can keep many settings, such as working units and the view 
configuration, in effect between sessions. To preserve changes in these 
settings between sessions, they must be saved.

   To save settings:


To save settings
----------------

1. From the File menu, choose Save Settings (or press <Ctrl-F>).
   
For more information about the settings that can be saved, see Preparing to 
Draw.



Preparing to Draw
-----------------

Except for user preferences, there are no default settings in MicroStation. 
The settings described in the following sub-sections can be saved. To 
preserve changes in these settings between sessions, they must be 
explicitly saved. See Savable Settings.

   Seed files
   Design plane
   Working units
   Coordinate readout
   Grid
   Level structure


Seed files
----------

When you create a design file, you identify a seed file as a template for 
the design file. The new design file is actually a copy of the seed file.

Seed files do not (necessarily) contain elements, but, like other design 
files, they do contain settings and view configurations. Having a seed file 
with customized settings keeps you from having to adjust settings each time 
you create a design file. If you wish, you can have a different seed file 
for each type of drawing you do.

A number of discipline-specific seed files are provided with MicroStation, 
in addition to the generic seed files, "seed2d.dgn" and "seed3d.dgn." The 
settings saved in these seed files are commonly used in:
*  Architecture
*  Mapping
*  Mechanical Engineering
   
   To select a seed file:
   To create a custom seed file:


To select a seed file
---------------------

1. In the Create Design File dialog box, click the Seed button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box opens.
   The default filter is "s*.dgn."
2. (Optional) To change the filter, key in the desired filter in the Filter 
field.
3. (Optional) To select a different source directory, use the Directories 
list box.
4. In the Files list box, select the desired seed file.
   or
   In the Name field, key in the name of the desired seed file.
5. Click the OK button.
   


To create a custom seed file
----------------------------

1. Create a design file.
2. Adjust settings.
3. (Optional, not recommended) Place elements.
4. Save settings.
5. Close the file.
   


Design plane
------------

In 2D drafting, the MicroStation equivalent of a sheet of drafting paper is 
the design plane. The design plane is composed of points at which you enter 
data points when placing elements in a design. Each point in the design 
plane has associated x (horizontal) and y (vertical) positions or 
coordinates. The design plane, then, is simply a Cartesian coordinate 
system upon which your design lies.

Coordinates are expressed in the form (x,y). The point known as the Global 
Origin is set to the exact center of the design plane [should not be the 
case; check on it] and assigned the coordinates (0,0) in the seed files 
provided with MicroStation. Any point to the right of this Global Origin 
has a positive x value, and any point to the left has a negative x value. 
Any point above the Global Origin has a positive y value, and any point 
below has a negative y value.

You can change the location or coordinates of the Global Origin. For 
example, an architect may want all coordinates to be positive values. A 
mapper or surveyor may need to use a grid system, defined by a government 
agency, that references all locations to a specific point. For most 
purposes, though, the Global Origin in the provided seed files is fine.

When you enter a data point, MicroStation saves its coordinates as 32-bit 
integers. Accordingly, the design plane has 232 (4,294,967,296) points in 
each dimension. The distance between two adjacent points is the smallest 
distance MicroStation can address. This distance is one positional unit or 
unit of resolution (UOR).

The 3D design cube is analogous to the 2D design plane. See *Xref.



Working units
-------------

Although MicroStation "thinks" in positional units, it lets you draw in 
"real world" units like feet and inches, or meters and centimeters. These 
real world units are called working units.

Working units are composed of master units (the largest units in common use 
in a design) and fractional sub-units. The number of positional units per 
sub-unit is the working resolution. 

Distances in design files are sometimes expressed in the form of three 
numbers separated by colons in the form "MU:SU:PU." (Distances are always 
keyed in using this system.) For example, "3:4:100" represents three master 
units (MU), four sub-units (SU), and 100 positional units (PU). The 
following table contains more examples of distances expressed in this form.

Working Units      MU:SU:PU      Distance

Feet / inches /    120:10: (or   120 feet, 10 
thousandths        120:10)       inches

Miles / feet / inch350::6        350 miles, 6 
                                 inches

Millimeters /      :500: (or :500One half 
thousandths                      millimeter

Yards / feet / inch:12:8         12 feet, 8 
                                 inches

Yards / feet / inch::11          11 inches



Working resolution determines the precision with which elements are drawn 
and the working area of the design plane. The working area is the size, in 
working units, of the design plane; the size of the design cannot exceed 
the working area. Because the design plane is square, there is an inverse 
relationship between precision and working area. 

Working unit settings consist of working units and working resolution. 
These settings are specific to a design file. The working unit settings in 
the discipline-specific seed files (*Xref) provided with MicroStation are 
commonly used in the respective disciplines. Some of the provided seed 
files have English working unit settings and others have metric settings. 
(For settings that make it easy to convert back and forth between metric 
and English working units, see *Xref.)

After you create a design file but before you begin to draw, you should 
confirm that the working unit settings provide adequate precision for your 
design task and a working area that exceeds the projected size of the 
design. Both requirements can usually be met with large margins.

Consider the following examples.
*  For a map of the state of Alabama, you might specify miles and feet as 
master units and sub-units, respectively. If you then set working 
resolution of 1,000 positional units per sub-unit, adjacent data points can 
be entered as close as 1/1000 of a foot on a design plane stretching 800 
miles in each dimension. Alabama is 330 miles long and 200 miles wide, so 
the design plane has a lot of room to spare.
*  For a building plot plan, you might specify feet and inches as master 
units and sub-units, respectively. If you then set 8,000 positional units 
per sub-unit, adjacent data points can be entered as close as 1/1,000 of an 
eighth of an inch on a design plane stretching 44,739 feet in each 
dimension (about 81/2 miles) -- enough room for a whole city!
*  For a design of a mechanical part measuring 150 mm per side, you might 
set millimeters as master units. If you then set 100 positional units per 
sub-unit (with sub-units and master units the same), adjacent data points 
can be entered as close as 1/100 of a millimeter on a design plane 
stretching 42,949,672 mm in each direction -- plenty of room for adding 
other assemblies.
   
Maintaining consistent working units and working resolution in a design 
lets you draw elements "full size" without regard for the scale of the 
plotted drawing. The plotting scale -- for example, 1/4":1' or 1:50 
(metric) -- is determined only when you create the plot. In fact, the 
design can be plotted at any scale. See *Xref: "Plotting."

Working area is expressed as working units square rather than square 
working units.

Note:
Although some designs are dimensionless (schematics, for example), the 
concepts described here still apply.

   To set working units:


To set working units
--------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Working Units.
   The Working Units settings box opens.
2. In the Master Units field, key in one or two characters (such as ' or 
"ft") as the name of the master units.
3. In the Sub Units [should be Sub-Units] field, enter one or two 
characters (such as """ or "in") as the name of the sub-units.
4. In the Resolution section, enter the number of sub-units per master unit 
in the first field.
   The label for this field changes with the settings in the master units 
and sub-units fields. It has this syntax: <master_unit_name> Per 
<sub-unit_name>.
5. Enter the number of positional units per sub-unit in the second field in 
the Resolution section.
   The label for this field has the syntax: Pos Units Per <sub-unit_name>.
6. Click OK.
   
Note:
For more information about the Working Units settings box, see *Xref.



Coordinate readout
------------------

Coordinate readout is the setting that controls the format in which and the 
accuracy with which MicroStation displays coordinates, distances, and 
angles in the Command Window and settings boxes.

   To set coordinate readout:


To set coordinate readout
-------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Coordinate Readout.
   The Coordinate Readout settings box opens. This settings box contains 
five option menus.
2. From the Format option menu in the Coordinates section, choose one of 
the following:
   -- Master Units
   -- Sub Units [should be Sub-units]
   -- Working Units
3. From the Accuracy option menu in the Coordinates section, choose the 
number of decimal places (1 to 4) or the denominator of the fractions (2 to 
64) in which fractions of the units chosen from the Format menu are 
displayed.
4. From the Format option menu in the Angles section, choose "DD.DDDD" for 
decimal angle readout or "DD MM SS" for angle readout in degrees, minutes, 
and seconds.
5. From the Mode option menu in the Angles section, choose Conventional 
(the angle is measured counter-clockwise from the design plane positive 
x-axis), Azimuth (the angle is measured clockwise from the design plane 
positive y-axis), or Bearing (the angle is measured differently in each 
quadrant; see *Xref).
6. From the Accuracy option men u in the Angles section, choose the number 
of decimal places (0 to 4) to which fractional angle measurements will be 
displayed.
   
Note:
For more information about the Coordinate Readout settings box, see *Xref 
(RefGd).



Grid
----

The grid consists of evenly-spaced points in the design plane. They serve 
as a visual measurement and alignment aid at certain magnifications, and 
they can assist in accurate placement of elements when grid lock is on. 
Grid Lock forces each data point to be placed precisely on a point in the 
grid.

The spacing between grid points and spacing between grid references 
(highlighted grid points -- every 12th point, for example) are collectively 
known as grid units. Grid unit settings are specific to a design file. The 
appropriateness of grid unit settings for a design task is related to the 
size of the design, working units, and the required precision.

   To set up grid units:
   To turn display of the grid on or off in a view:
   To turn display of the grid on or off in all views:


To set up grid units
--------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Grid.
   The Grid settings box opens.
2. In the Master / Grid field, enter the distance (in working units) 
between points in the grid. (For information about working units, see 
Working units).
3. In the Reference Grid field, enter the number of grid points between 
grid references.
4. From the Configuration option menu, choose
   -- Orthogonal for grid points laid out orthogonally (along lines 
perpendicular to the x-axis and y-axis of the design plane).
   -- Isometric for grid points laid out isometrically (along lines at 30d 
from the x-axis and y-axis of the design plane).
   -- Offset for grid rows offset by half the distance between horizontal 
grid points.
5. In the Aspect Ratio (X/Y) field, key in the ratio between the distance 
between grid points along the design x-axis and the distance between grid 
points along the y-axis.
   In Isometric configuration, this ratio is fixed.
   For more information about the Grid Settings box, see *XrefRefGd.
   


To turn display of the grid on or off in a view
-----------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view.
3. Turn the Grid check box off or on.
4. Click Apply.
   


To turn display of the grid on or off in all views
--------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. Turn the Grid check box off or on.
3. Click All.
   
Note:
For more information about the View Attributes settings box, see 
*XrefRefGd.



Level structure
---------------

When you assign drawing levels to groups, you can hide or display related 
levels easily. MicroStation's level structure is analogous to an operating 
system's directory structure

It is most efficient to define and save a level structure before beginning 
to draw. A variety of pre-defined level structures are installed in 
MicroStation's "data" directory (Workspace modules???). You can save your 
own level structures as resource files to use with other design files.

   To apply an existing level structure to the active design file:
   To create the highest-level groups:
   To create subordinate groups:
   To drop (remove) a group:
   To name a level and assign it to a group:
   To remove a level from the level structure:
   To save the active design file's level structure as a resource file:


To apply an existing level structure to the active design file
--------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. From the settings box's File menu, choose Open.
   The Open Level Structure dialog box opens.
3. In the Files list box, select the level structure file.
4. Click the OK button.
   
When you create your own level structure, you can group individual levels 
and groups of levels hierarchically for easy manipulation. It is easiest to 
map out all hierarchical groups before defining the level structure. 
MicroStation lets you define the level structure by adding new levels and 
groups to existing groups. Therefore, you must create the highest-level 
groups first, then create lower-level groups within those groups, and, 
last, assign individual levels to existing groups.



To create the highest-level groups
----------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. From the setting box's Group menu, choose Create.
   The Level Group dialog box opens.
3. In the Name field, key in a (unique) name of 16 characters or fewer.
4. Click OK.
   The group name is displayed in the Group list box.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all the highest-level groups are listed 
in the Group list box.


To create subordinate groups
----------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. In the Group list box, double-click the name of an existing group to 
open it.
   Any levels within the group are displayed in the level list box. In the 
Group list box, the symbol [..] appears, and any subordinate groups are 
listed beneath it.
3. (Optional) Continue double-clicking subordinate groups in the Group list 
box until you have opened the desired group. 
   To move back up the hierarchy of subordinate groups, double-click the 
[..] symbol.
4. From the Group menu, choose Create.
   The Level Group dialog box opens.
5. In the Name field, key in a (unique) name of 16 characters or fewer.
6. Click OK.
   The group name is displayed in the Group list box.
   


To drop (remove) a group
------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. In the Group list box, select the group's name.
3. From the Group menu, choose Drop.
   The group is removed, along with all subordinate groups in the level 
hierarchy, and all levels assigned to the group and subordinate groups are 
removed from the level structure.
   
Drawing levels are numbered 1 through 63. You cannot change those numbers, 
but you can give each level a unique name.



To name a level and assign it to a group
----------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. In the Group list box, double-click the name of the desired group.
   The names of levels assigned to the group and subordinate groups, if 
any, are displayed.
3. From the Level menu, choose Assign.
   The Level Name dialog box opens.
4. In the Number field, key in the number of the level to be named and 
assigned to the open group.
5. In the Name field, key in a name of 16 or fewer characters.
6. (Optional) In the Comment field, key in a comment of 32 or fewer 
characters.
   


To remove a level from the level structure
------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. In the Level list box, select the desired level name and number.
3. From the Level menu, choose Remove.
   


To save the active design file's level structure as a resource file
-------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Names.
   The Level Names settings box opens.
2. From the setting box's File menu, choose Save.
   The Save Level Structure dialog box opens. By default, level structure 
files are given the extension ".lvl" and are stored in MicroStation's 
"data" directory (Wkspc module???).
3. In the Name field, key in a name for the level structure file.
4. Click OK.
   
Note:
For more information about the Level Names settings box, see *XrefRefGd.



Setting the Active Element Attributes
-------------------------------------

When you place an element, the design plane locations of the data points 
used to draw the element are stored in the design file. In addition, a 
number of element attributes are stored.

Element attributes include:
*  level
*  color
*  line weight
*  line style
*  fill color (for closed elements)
   
Attributes are determined by settings. For example, while the Active Color 
is set to red, the color attribute of newly placed elements is red.

Changing an active setting has no effect on previously placed elements. 
However, you can change any attribute of a previously placed element to the 
corresponding active setting. See (*Xref to appropriate tool).

Note:
These attributes compose what is called element symbology:

*  color
*  line weight
*  line style
*  fill color (for closed elements)
   
The symbology of any previously placed element can be changed to the active 
symbology (the Active Color, Active Line Weight, Active Line Style, and 
Active Fill Color) with a single tool.

   Color
   Line Weight
   Line Style
   Using a Line Style:
   Level symbology
   Other element attributes


Color
-----

MicroStation stores the Active Color and the color attribute of each 
element as a value in the 0-255 range. To display an element in color, 
MicroStation looks in the data structure called the active color table for 
the color that corresponds to the element color value. You can modify 
colors in the active color table.

The active color table is depicted graphically in MicroStation as a 16 x 16 
palette of colored tiles called a color palette.

You can also change the colors in the active design file by attaching a 
different color table to it. The attached color table is automatically 
activated each time the design file is reopened. Each seed design file 
supplied with MicroStation has a color table already attached.

Color tables are stored as independent files. The active color table can be 
saved to a file for future attachment to any design file.

Note:
For more information about working with color tables, see *Xref.

   To set the Active Color:


To set the Active Color
-----------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Color.
   The Color sub-menu (a color palette) opens.
2. Select the desired color in the color palette.
   OR
1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. If you know the number of the desired color, key it into the Color 
field.
   Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right of the Color text and 
drag across the color palette to select the desired color.
   


Line Weight
-----------

MicroStation stores the Active Line Weight and the line weight attribute of 
each element as a value in the 0-31 range.

   To set the Active Line Weight:


To set the Active Line Weight
-----------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Weight.
   The Weight sub-menu opens. A selection of built-in line weights is 
displayed in the menu.
2. Select the desired line weight in the pop-up display.
   OR
1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. If you know the number of the desired line weight, key it into the 
Weight field.
   Otherwise, choose the desired line weight from the option menu to the 
right of the Weight field.
   
Note:
For information on setting the Active Fill Color, see Area and fill.

Note:
For more information about the Element Attributes settings box, see 
*Xref(refGuide)



Line Style
----------

Of all element attributes, line style generally has the greatest effect on 
an element's appearance. A line style definition may specify
*   A stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap strokes of varying 
lengths.
*   Small drawings called point symbols at varying intervals.
   
Note:
Line style definitions are customizable. The default array of line styles 
in the Line Styles settings box are intended as samples. In most cases, 
line styles should be set up by a site or project manager. For information 
about customizing line styles, see *Xref: User's Guide ch.15 "Creating 
Custom Modules".

   Line style modifiers


Line style modifiers
--------------------

Line style modifiers or overrides allow some characteristics of a line 
style to be modified on a per-element basis without requiring separate line 
style definitions.

Modifiers are available for the following stroke pattern and stroke 
attributes:
*  Start and end widths. These modifiers are applied to each stroke and can 
be used to create wide or tapered elements.
*  Stroke pattern shift.
   
In addition, a Scale Factor modifier is available. This modifier is applied 
to all length values in the line style definition.



Using a Line Style
------------------

1. Set the Active Line Style. See To set the Active Line Style:.
2. (Optional) Activate any desired line style modifiers. See Activating 
line style modifiers.
3. Place elements with the Active Line Style and any active modifiers.
   
   To set the Active Line Style:
   Activating line style modifiers
   To override the starting or ending width for each dash stroke in 
elements placed with the Active Line Style:
   To apply a scale factor to all displayable characteristics of the Active 
Line Style:
   Internal line styles


To set the Active Line Style
----------------------------

1. From the Element menu's Line Style sub-menu, choose Custom.
   The Line Styles settings box opens.
2. In the list box, double-click the name of the desired line style in the 
list.
   or
   In the list box, select the name of the desired line style, and click 
the large button at the bottom of the settings box on which a sample of the 
selected line style is displayed. (To make the large button visible, you 
must first turn on the Show Detail check button.)
   OR
1. In the Command Window, key in ACTIVE STYLE <style_name> or 
LC=<style_name>.
   


Activating line style modifiers
-------------------------------

Line style modifiers are activated in the Line Styles settings box. The 
large Sample button in the settings box shows the line style selected in 
the list box with active modifiers applied.

Note:
The New User workspace user interface does not let you activate line style 
modifiers.



To override the starting or ending width for each dash stroke in elements 
placed with the Active Line Style
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu's Line Style sub-menu, choose Custom.
   The Line Styles settings box opens.
2. (Optional) To set the starting width, turn on Origin, and key in the 
desired width, in master units, in the Origin field.
3. (Optional) To set the ending width, turn on End, and key in the desired 
width, in master units, in the End field.
   


To apply a scale factor to all displayable characteristics of the Active 
Line Style
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu's Line Style sub-menu, choose Custom.
   The Line Styles settings box opens.
2. Turn on Scale Factor, and key in the desired scale factor in the Scale 
Factor field.
   
>> To shift or adjust stroke patterns differently than specified in the 
Active Line Style definition:

1. From the Element menu's Line Style sub-menu, choose Custom.
   The Line Styles settings box opens.
2. To shift stroke patterns relative to the beginning of elements or 
element segments, choose Distance from the Shift option menu, and key in 
the shift distance, in master units, in the Distance field.
   or
   To adjust stroke patterns such that a fraction of the first strokes in 
stroke patterns are displayed at the start and end of elements or element 
segments, choose Fraction from the Shift option menu, and key in the 
fraction, in decimal, in the Fraction field.
   
Note:
While the Change Element Attributes tool in the *Xref: Change Element 
sub-palette is used to adjust the line style modifiers of an existing 
element as a set, MODIFY key-ins can be used to adjust individual line 
style modifiers. For more information, see *Xref.



Internal line styles
--------------------

As with previous versions of MicroStation, you can still set the Active 
Line Style to an internal line style (0-7) with the Element menu's Line 
Style sub-menu, the Element Attributes settings box, or the ACTIVE STYLE 
(LC=) key-in. However, internal line styles (also known as line codes) are 
based on output device coordinates, and therefore are not truly WYSIWIG 
like named line styles. Hence, it is recommended that you use named line 
styles instead of numbered line styles.



Level symbology
---------------

Each element in a design file has its own symbology. To make it clearer 
which elements are on a particular level, you can define an alternative 
symbology for all elements on a level. You can then display the elements 
with their "normal" symbology or with the level symbology.

   To define level symbology:
   To display elements using level symbology:


To define level symbology
-------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.
   The Level Symbology settings box opens.
2. For each attribute (color, [numbered] line style, or line weight) to be 
set, turn on the attribute under Settings.
3. Adjust the desired controls.
   The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those in the 
Element Attributes settings box. For information about using those 
controls, see To set the Active Color: and To set the Active Line Weight:.
4. In the list box on the left side of the settings box, select a level or 
a range of levels and press Apply.
   (To select a range of levels, select a level at one end of the range and 
then select the level at the other end while pressing the <Shift> key.)
   OR
   Double-click a level.
   


To display elements using level symbology
-----------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.
   The Level Symbology settings box opens.
2. For each level attribute (color, line weight, or line style) to be 
displayed in place of the elements' own attributes, turn on the 
corresponding check box under Overrides.
3. Click OK.
4. From the View menu, choose Attributes (or press <Ctrl-B>).
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
5. From the View option menu, choose the desired view.
6. Turn on the Level Symb(ology) attribute.
7. Click Apply or All.
8. (Optional) If necessary, update the open views.
   
Note:
For more information about the Level Symbology settings box, see 
*Xref(RefGuide).



Other element attributes
------------------------

In addition to color, line weight, and line style, elements have these 
attributes
*  Area (solid or hole)
*  Fill (transparent, opaque, or outline)
*  Class (primary or construction)
   
   Area and fill
   To set the Active Area:
   To set the Active Fill Type and Color:
   To turn Area Fill on or off in a view:
   Class
   To set the Active Class:


Area and fill
-------------

The area and fill attributes apply only to closed elements such as circles, 
ellipses, and polygons. Closed elements completely enclose the area within 
their boundaries. 

A closed element can be patterned when its area attribute is solid. A 
closed element cannot be patterned when its area attribute is hole.

By default, a closed element is displayed in a wireframe view by lines in 
the Active Color that outline the area occupied by the element. The area of 
the element inside the outline is transparent.

A closed element is filled when the area within its outline is displayed as 
a solid area of color. The color is determined by the Active Fill Color. 
When an element is opaque, it is displayed as a solid shape of the Active 
Color. In that case, the lines outlining the element are not discernible 
since the "fill" has the same color.

Note:
In any view, opaque and filled elements are displayed as outlines unless 
the Area Fill view attribute is on for that view. In other words, turning 
off Area Fill in a view hides the "fill."

The effects of the fill attribute and the Area Fill view attribute are 
summarized in this chart:

Type of      Fill Area on     Fill Area off
fill

Transparent  No fill displayedNo fill displayed

Opaque       Element "filled" No fill displayed
             with Active Color

Outline      Element filled wiNo fill displayed
             Active Fill Color



Note:
A series of lines or a closed line string can also enclose an area. (See 
*Xref to Place Line String in RG). However, MicroStation treats neither as 
a shape. Therefore, neither can be assigned an area or fill attribute. For 
more information on setting Area Fill, see *Xref.



To set the Active Area
----------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the Area option menu, choose Solid or Hole.
   


To set the Active Fill Type and Color
-------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette, drag off the Circles & Ellipses or Polygons 
sub-palette.
   The sub-palette opens.
2. From the sub-palette's Fill Type option menu, choose Transparent, 
Opaque, or Outline.
3. If you know the number of the desired color, key it into the Fill Color 
field.
   Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right of the Fill Color 
field and drag across the color palette to select the desired color.
   


To turn Area Fill on or off in a view
-------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu in the settings box, choose the desired view.
3. Click the Area Fill check box.
4. Click Apply or All.
   
Note:
For more information about the Element Attributes settings box, see 
*XrefRefGd.



Class
-----

By convention, elements with the class attribute of Construction are used 
as drawing aids. For example, you might place a construction element in a 
particular location as an element to snap other elements to, but you would 
not plot the construction element when the design is complete. The elements 
that are actually part of the design usually have the class attribute of 
Primary.



To set the Active Class
-----------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction.
   


Tools
-----




To:                      Use a tool in the:

Place a line             XrefRefGd

Place line strings       XrefRefGd

Place polygons           XrefRefGd

Place circles and ellipseXrefRefGd

Place arcs               XrefRefGd(Arcs 
                         sub-palette)

Place points             XrefRefGd(Points 
                         sub-palette)

Copy elements            XrefRefGd(Copy Element 
                         sub-palette)

Make "mirrored" copies ofXrefRefGd(Mirror Element 
elements                 sub-palette)

Modify (the shape or sizeXrefRefGd(Modify Element 
elements                 sub-palette)

Change (attributes, levelXrefRefGd(Change Element 
of) elements             sub-palette)

Use the fence            XrefRefGd(Fence palette)

Place the fence          XrefRefGd(Place Fence 
                         sub-palette)

Copy the contents of the XrefRefGd(Fence Copy 
                         sub-palette)

Make "mirrored" copies ofXrefRefGd(Fence Mirror 
fence contents           sub-palette)

Change symbology or levelXrefRefGd(Fence Change 
fence contents           sub-palette)

Delete the contents of thXrefRefGd(Fence Delete 
fence                    sub-palette)

Measure distances and areXrefRefGd(Measure 
                         palette)

Analyze mass properties  XrefRefGd(?)





Using Grid Lock
---------------

When Grid Lock is on, all data points and tentative points are forced to 
fall precisely on a point in the grid.

   To set Grid Lock:


To set Grid Lock
----------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
2. Turn Grid Lock on or off.
   OR
1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Toggles.
   The Lock Toggles settings box opens.
2. Turn Grid Lock on or off.
   


Using Precision Input
---------------------

Precision input is a method of entering data points with the keyboard. 
Using this method, you can specify the exact location of a data point using 
any of the following:
*  design plane coordinates.
*  distance and angle relative to the view x-axis, from the most recently 
entered tentative point or data point.
*  distances, along the design plane axes, from the most recently entered 
tentative point or data point.
*  distances, along the view axes, from the most recently entered tentative 
point or data point.
   
Locks have no effect on the entry of data points with precision input.

   To ... TBD
   To ... TBD
   To ... TBD


To ... TBD
----------

1. 


To ... TBD
----------

1. 


To ... TBD
----------

1. 


Dynamic Alignment
-----------------

Dynamic update can be enhanced with dynamic alignment for these tools:
*  Place Line tool
*  Place Multi-line tool
*  Place Line String tool
*  Place Shape tool
*  Place Circle tool Xref
*  Place Arc tool Xref
*  Place Ellipse tool Xref
   
Dynamic alignment enhances dynamic update by displaying temporary alignment 
lines that lie along vectors from alignment points. Alignment points 
include data points entered when placing elements and tentative points 
snapped to elements. They also include the points set forth in the 
following table when the corresponding elements are selected. (Xref 
selecting elements)

Elements        Alignment 
                points

Lines, line     All vertices
strings, 
multi-lines, 
conics, point 
curves, point 
strings, and shapes

Arcs, ellipses, Center
circles

Text and text noOrigin



For all these elements, vectors passing through the alignment points 
include (depending on the setting of the Alignment option menu) the axes of 
the design plane, the axes of the view, or the axes of the auxiliary 
coordinate system. 

For alignment points in the first group of elements in the table, other 
vectors are also calculated. One is a collinear vector, which lies along 
the line formed by the last two data points entered. The others are 
orthogonal vectors, which are perpendicular to the element at the last two 
data points entered.

The temporary lines are displayed when the pointer is within the locate 
tolerance of the vectors, and a data point or a tentative point placed 
while the lines are displayed snaps to the line (or to the intersection of 
two or more temporary lines). This lets you snap precisely to a variety of 
significant points that are not located on any element. 

Thus, dynamic alignment provides these features:
   As you move the pointer, temporary lines are displayed to indicate 
alignment with alignment points.
   Each successive data point defines the origin of a temporary rectangular 
coordinate system. As you move the pointer, the dynamically displayed 
element is highlighted in red when it is collinear [or within the Locate 
Tolerance (user preference) of being so] with any axis.
   Each successive pair of data points defines an axis of a temporary 
rectangular coordinate system. As you move the pointer, the dynamically 
displayed element is highlighted in red when it is perpendicular to or 
collinear with [or within the Locate Tolerance of being so] the defined 
axis.
   
>> To activate dynamic alignment:

1. Select the tool with which you want to use dynamic alignment.
2. In the tool's pop-down or in the Tool Settings window, turn on 
Alignment.
   
To base dynamic axis     In the tool's 
alignment on:            pop-down or in the Tool 
                         Settings window, choose 
                         from the Alignment 
                         option menu:

The axes of the design plDrawing

The axes of the view     View

The axes of an auxiliary Auxiliary
coordinate system



The above procedure assumes Dynamics is turned on for the views to be used 
for drawing.



Using Tentative Points
----------------------

A tentative point is a form of graphic input that is used to:
*  Preview the location of the next data point.
*  Define a point of reference for entry of the next data point. (The data 
point is usually entered by precision input.)
   
It is also possible to snap a tentative point to an existing element (put 
it directly on the element). Tentative point snapping helps you accurately 
construct new elements that are either connected to existing ones or 
precisely related to existing ones.

Using snaps, for example, you can:
*  Place a line perpendicular or parallel to another line.
*  Place a circle tangent to an arc or a B-spline curve.
*  Place a cell at the centroid of a shape.
   
Note:
As of this writing, some of the snaps are under development and may not 
behave in this Beta version as they will in Version 5.

   Snapping tentative points to elements


Snapping tentative points to elements
-------------------------------------

Snapping is affected by the Snap Lock settings. There are three basic Snap 
Lock settings: an on/off toggle, the snap mode, and the snap mode override. 


If the Snap Lock toggle is off, tentative points do not snap to elements, 
but display the coordinates of the tentative point in the Command Window's 
Status field. 

When Snap Lock is on, the way a tentative point snaps to an element is 
controlled by the snap mode. You can choose a snap mode from the Locks 
settings box's Mode option menu or from the Command Window's Snaps menu. 
You can also choose a snap override mode by holding down the <Shift> key 
and pressing the Tentative button. A pop-up menu of the snaps is displayed 
under the pointer. (If you use the Snaps menu or the Snaps pop-up menu, you 
must press the <Shift> key as you choose the snap mode.) 

If you choose a snap mode from the Command Window's Snaps menu or the Snaps 
pop-up menu without pressing the <Shift> key, you are choosing a snap mode 
override. The override mode is effective only for the next operation; it is 
similar to a "single shot" tool selection. After you have snapped a 
tentative point, the override is cancelled and the snap mode becomes 
effective again.

The active snap mode or override is displayed in the Command Window's 
Message field. For example, when the snap mode is set to Keypoint, the 
status "TP=KeyPts" is displayed. (In this case, "TP" stands for "tentative 
point.")

How close the pointer must be to an element to snap a tentative point to it 
depends upon the locate tolerance. (For information about setting the 
locate tolerance, see *XRef.)

With Snap Lock on, when you enter a tentative point on or near an element, 
the following occurs.

*  When the snap mode is Nearest, the tentative point snaps to the point on 
the element nearest to the pointer. 
*  When the snap mode is Keypoint, the tentative point snaps to the nearest 
keypoint on the element. See Element keypoints.
*  When the snap mode is Midpoint, the tentative point snaps to the 
midpoint of the segment of the element closest to the pointer. (If the 
element is an elliptical arc, the tentative point snaps to the point on the 
arc at half the sweep angle, as opposed to the point at half the arc 
distance.)
*  When the snap mode is Center, the tentative point snaps to the center of 
elements (such as circles, arcs, text, and so on) that have centers and to 
the centroid of other elements, including shapes, open line strings, and 
B-splines.
*  When the snap mode is Origin, the tentative point snaps to the origin of 
a cell. It also snaps to the centroid of a B-spline, the first data point 
in a dimension element, the origin of text or a text node, and the first 
vertex of a line, multi-line, line string, or shape.
*  When the snap mode is Bisector, the tentative point snaps to the 
midpoint of an entire line string, multi-line, or complex string, rather 
than to the midpoint of the closest segment. It also snaps to the midpoint 
of a line or arc. (If the element is an elliptical arc, the tentative point 
snaps to the point on the arc at half the arc distance, as opposed to the 
point on the arc at half the sweep angle.)
Note:
The Bisector snap mode has not been implemented in this Beta version.

*  When the snap mode is Intersection, two tentative points are required, 
although more can be used. The first tentative point snaps to one element, 
and that element is highlighted. The second tentative point snaps to 
another element, and the two segments used to find the intersection of the 
two elements are displayed in dashed lines. (If the two elements do not 
actually intersect, but projections of the elements would intersect, the 
segments include projections of the elements to the intersection.) You can 
continue placing tentative points until the desired intersection is 
reached; the last two tentative points determine where the intersection 
snap lies.
*  When the snap mode is Tangent, the tentative point constrains the edge 
of the element you are placing to be tangent to an existing element. The 
tentative point dynamically slides along the element to maintain the 
tangency as you move the pointer to complete the placement of the element.
*  When the snap mode is Tangent Point, the tentative point constrains the 
edge of the element you are placing to an existing element. The tentative 
point does not move dynamically as you move the pointer, but is locked in 
place.
*  When the snap mode is Perpendicular, the tentative point snaps to an 
existing element and the line you are placing is constrained to be 
perpendicular to the element at the tentative point. The tentative point 
slides dynamically along the element in order to maintain the 
perpendicularity as you move the pointer to complete the placement of the 
element.
*  When the snap mode is Perpendicular Point, the tentative point snaps to 
an existing element and constrains the line you are placing so that the 
line is perpendicular to the element at the tentative point. The tentative 
point does not move dynamically as you move the pointer, but is locked in 
place.
*  When the snap mode is Parallel, the tentative point snaps to an existing 
element, but does not define a point through which the line you are placing 
will pass. Instead, when you accept the tentative point, the line you then 
place will be parallel to the line to which the tentative point was 
snapped.
*  When the snap mode is Through Point, the tentative point defines a point 
through which the element you are placing (or an extrapolation of it) must 
pass. The tentative point actually snaps to element keypoints.
   
   Snapping to cells
   Element keypoints
   To enter a tentative point to preview a data point:
   To enable snapping:
   To change the number of element keypoints on each element segment:
   To snap a tentative point to an element at a keypoint:
   To snap a tentative point to an element at a point other than a 
keypoint:
   To snap a tentative point to the intersection of two elements:
   To enter a tentative point for reference:


Snapping to cells
-----------------

To snap to the origin of a cell, set the snap mode to Origin. When the snap 
mode is not set to origin, tentative points snap to component elements 
within the cell. For example, when the snap mode is Keypoint and you press 
the tentative button while the pointer is near a line in a cell, the 
tentative point will snap to a keypoint on the line, not the origin of the 
cell.



Element keypoints
-----------------

Keypoints are regularly-spaced points in an element to which a tentative 
point will snap. The number of keypoints on each segment of a linear 
element (line, line string, or shape) is one greater than the Snap Lock 
Divisor setting. If Snap Lock Divisor is 1 (as in all seed files supplied 
with MicroStation), keypoints are as shown in the figure. The midpoint of a 
linear element is a keypoint only if the Snap Lock Divisor is an even 
number.

Note:
For text, the keypoint is determined by the justification attribute. That 
attribute and others specific to text elements are described in 
*Xef:Labeling Designs.



To enter a tentative point to preview a data point
--------------------------------------------------

1. Position the pointer on the location at which you plan to enter a data 
point.
2. Press the Tentative button. (For information about the Tentative button 
on your system, see *Xref.)
   Large cross hairs are displayed. The intersection of the lines in the 
cross hairs marks the location of the tentative point. If the tentative 
point snaps to an element, the element is highlighted.
   


To enable snapping
------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full (or Toggles).
   The Locks (or Locks Toggles) settings box opens.
2. Turn on Snap Lock.
3. (This step can only be done in the Locks settings box.) To enable 
snapping to element keypoints, set Snap Lock Mode to Keypoint.
   or
   To enable snapping to points other than element keypoints, set Snap Lock 
Mode to Project.
   


To change the number of element keypoints on each element segment
-----------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
2. Set Snap Lock Divisor to a value one less than the desired number of 
keypoints.
   
For example, to create element keypoints on the endpoints and the first, 
second, and third quarter points of element segments, set Snap Lock Divisor 
to 4.



To snap a tentative point to an element at a keypoint
-----------------------------------------------------

1. Enable snapping to keypoints. See To enable snapping:.
2. Position the pointer on or near the desired keypoint.
3. Press the Tentative button. (For information about the Tentative button 
on your system, see *Xref.)
   If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element, the element is 
highlighted.
   


To snap a tentative point to an element at a point other than a keypoint
------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Enable snapping to points on elements other than keypoints. See To 
enable snapping:.
2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point.
3. Press the Tentative button. (For information about the Tentative button 
on your system, see *Xref.)
   If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element, the element is 
highlighted.
   


To snap a tentative point to the intersection of two elements
-------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
2. Turn on Intersection.
3. Position the pointer on or near the intersection.
4. Press the Tentative button. (For information about the Tentative button 
on your system, see *Xref.)
   If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element, the element is 
highlighted.
   


To enter a tentative point for reference
----------------------------------------

1. Position the pointer on the desired reference point.
2. Press the Tentative button. (For information about the Tentative button 
on your system, see *Xref.)
   OR
1. Snap a tentative point to an existing element on or near the desired 
reference point. See Snapping tentative points to elements.
   


Manipulating and Modifying Elements
-----------------------------------

Once elements are placed, you can move, copy, rotate, delete, and otherwise 
change them. In some cases, the manipulation must be precise -- in other 
cases, an approximation is sufficient.

When precision is not important, the easiest way to perform element 
manipulations and modifications is to use the Element Selection tool in the 
Main palette. Most basic element manipulations and modifications can be 
performed with the Element Selection tool, including:
*  moving
*  copying
*  scaling
*  moving vertices
*  modifying axes
   
   Selecting elements
   Manipulating and modifying selected elements
   Specialized element manipulation tools
   Using Specialized Element Manipulation Tools
   Using the fence to group elements for manipulation
   Using fence manipulation tools


Selecting elements
------------------

>> To select a single element:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Click the element you want to select.
   
While the Element Selection tool is selected, the pointer becomes an 
arrowhead with an aperture encircling the tip. The aperture denotes the 
design plane area in which MicroStation searches for elements. The aperture 
size or Locate Tolerance is a user preference that is adjustable in the 
Preferences dialog box (see *Xref "Menu Reference" (User menu) in the 
reference guide).

Hint:
If the desired element is visible in the aperture but you cannot select it, 
check the following:

*  To select a shape, the pointer must be close to one of the enclosing 
lines. To select an ellipse, the pointer must be close to the circumference 
or center. 
*  Level Lock -- When Level Lock is on, only elements on the active level 
can be selected.
*  Grid Lock -- When Grid Lock is on, elements can be selected only where 
they lie on grid points. Some elements may not lie on any grid points.
   
>> To select one or more elements:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Drag around the area containing the elements you want to select. As you 
drag, a dynamic rectangle outlines the area.
3. Release the Data button.
4. All elements that are completely inside the dynamic rectangle are 
selected.
   
>> To select all elements (including those not visible):

1. Choose Select All from the Edit menu (or press <Ctrl-A>).
   
Note:
When the active design file is large, choose this item with care. It takes 
some time for MicroStation to select many elements, and elements are 
selected regardless of whether they are visible.

>> To select an additional element:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Control-click the element to select it. (Control-click means to hold 
down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the Data button.)
   
>> To select one or more additional elements:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Hold down the <Ctrl> key and drag around the area containing the 
additional elements you want to select.
   Be careful not to point at any element that is already selected as you 
press the Data button.
   To select also elements overlapping the dynamic rectangle, hold down the 
<Shift> key as well as the <Ctrl> key as you drag.
3. Release the Data button.
   All elements that are completely inside (or inside or overlapping) the 
dynamic rectangle when you release the Data button are added to the set of 
selected elements.
   
>> To deselect an element:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Control-click the element to deselect.
   
>> To deselect all elements:

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Click somewhere in the view where there is no element.
   
Note:
If you select a single element, all other elements are deselected.



Manipulating and modifying selected elements
--------------------------------------------

EleTo move elements with the Element Selection tool:
   To copy elements with the Element Selection tool:
   To scale or modify a selected element:


To move elements with the Element Selection tool
------------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the element or elements to be moved. See Selecting elements.
   Each selected element is bracketed with handles.
3. Drag a selected element by any point on the element that is not a 
handle.
   


To copy elements with the Element Selection tool
------------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the element or elements to be copied. See Selecting elements.
   Each selected element is bracketed with handles.
3. From the Edit menu, choose Duplicate (or press <Ctrl-D>).
   The duplicate element(s) are dynamically displayed and selected.
4. (Optional) Reposition the duplicate element(s) by dragging a selected 
element by any point that is not a handle.
   


To scale or modify a selected element
-------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the element. See Selecting elements.
   The selected element is bracketed with handles.
3. Drag the appropriate handle to make the desired change, as follows:
   
Element:        Handle:          Modification:

                MidpointEndpointsRadius[a]Sweep angle

BlockB-spline 
curveComplex 
chainComplex shape

Circle          Axis endpoint    Modify axis

Ellipse         Corner           Scale about center

CurveLineLine 
stringMulti-lineShape[b]

                Left or rightTop Scale width about opposite 
                bottom           handleScale height about opposite 
                                 handle

[a]If the arc is elliptical, both axes are scaled.
   
[b]Except for rectangular shapes (blocks).
   
   

Specialized element manipulation tools
--------------------------------------

When you need to manipulate elements with more precision than possible with 
the Element Selection tool alone or to delete elements, use MicroStation's 
specialized element manipulation tools.
   
   These tools can be used in conjunction with the Element Selection tool 
or by themselves.
   
   

Using Specialized Element Manipulation Tools
--------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the element(s). See Selecting elements.
3. Select the specialized tool.
4. Perform the desired manipulation. See the tool reference in the 
Reference Guide.
   OR
1. Select the specialized tool.
   The prompt "Identify element" is displayed in the Command Window.
2. Enter a data point on or near a desired element to identify the element. 
In some cases it may be helpful to first snap a tentative point to the 
element. See Snapping tentative points to elements and Identifying 
elements.
   The element is highlighted, and the prompt "Accept/reject element" is 
displayed in the Command Window.
3. To accept the element and continue with the manipulation, enter a data 
point anywhere in any view except on an element.
   or
   To identify a different element, Reset and return to step 2.
4. Enter additional data points to perform (and in some cases, repeat) the 
desired manipulation. See *Xref_refguide.
5. (Optional) Repeat steps 2-4 for each additional element. (The tool must 
have been locked upon selection in step 1.)
   
Note:
The first method is referred to as noun-verb because the element(s) are 
distinguished before the specialized tool is selected. The second method is 
referred to as verb-noun. All specialized tools work with the verb-noun 
method. Not all can be operated noun-verb. When you select a tool that does 
not work on a noun-verb basis, MicroStation automatically de-selects any 
selected elements.

   Example
   Identifying elements


Example
-------

The simplest of the specialized element manipulation tools is Delete 
Element in the Main palette. You need only distinguish (select or identify) 
the element(s) to be deleted.

Suppose you want to delete three elements. Assume the elements are in plain 
view (each without any nearby elements). Here a shortcut applies to the 
verb-noun procedure: You can combine the steps of accepting one element for 
deletion and identifying the next element. This shortcut is illustrated 
here in the verb-noun procedure:
1. In the Main palette, select the Delete Element tool. (For this example, 
it is assumed the tool is locked.)
   The prompt "Identify element" is displayed in the Command Window.
2. Enter a data point on or near one of the elements to identify it.
   The element is highlighted, and the prompt "Accept/reject element" is 
displayed in the Command Window.
3. Enter a data point on or near another one of the elements.
   The first element is deleted, and the second element is highlighted.
4. Enter a data point on or near the third element.
   The second element is deleted, and the third element is highlighted.
5. Enter a data point anywhere in any view except on an element.
   The third element is deleted.
   
Here is the noun-verb procedure:
1. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the elements.
3. In the Main palette, select the Delete Element tool (or press the 
<Backspace> key).
   The elements are deleted.
   


Identifying elements
--------------------

When you select a tool to manipulate an element before you select the 
element to be manipulated, MicroStation will prompt you to identify the 
element. For example, if no element is selected when you select the Delete 
Element tool, MicroStation displays the prompt "Identify element" in the 
Command Window.

The pointer for identifying an element has a circular aperture that works 
like the aperture on the Element Selection arrowhead pointer. When an 
element is identified, MicroStation highlights the element and waits for 
you to perform the next step. If you identify the wrong element, as 
sometimes happens when elements are close together, just Reset. If 
MicroStation cannot find an element on or near the location of the data 
point, it displays the message "Element not found" in the Command Window.

If you have trouble identifying an element, check the pointer position and 
the locks mentioned in Selecting elements.



Using the fence to group elements for manipulation
--------------------------------------------------

In addition to using the Element Selection tool (*Xref) to group elements 
for manipulation, you can group elements with the fence. The fence creates 
a temporary grouping of elements that is ended when the design file is 
closed, if not before. For information about permanent groupings, see 
*XRef(Ch 3 - groups).

Most often, the fence is placed around elements to group them for 
manipulation, just as the pointer is dragged around elements to select them 
with the Element Selection tool. However, the fence has two additional 
grouping capabilities. It can be used:
*  as a void to exclude elements inside (or overlapping) the fence 
boundary.
*  to clip elements that cross the fence boundary, like a cookie cutter, so 
that only the parts inside the fence boundary (or outside in the case of a 
void) are subject to manipulation.
   
The fence can be placed as a rectangle or as a polygon. If the fence it is 
rectangular, it is referred to as the fence block, if polygonal as the 
fence shape. As a polygon, the fence can be constructed with as few as 3 
vertices or as many as 97. The fence is displayed on screen as a closed 
shape with the color used to highlight identified elements.

   To place the fence as a rectangle:
   To place the fence as a polygon:
   To remove the fence if it is already displayed:
   To move the fence (without replacing it):
   To modify a vertex of the fence:
   Fence manipulation tools
   To set the fence selection mode:


To place the fence as a rectangle
---------------------------------

1. In the Main palette (or the Main palette's Fence sub-palette), select 
the Place Fence Block tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one corner.
3. Enter a data point to define the diagonally opposite corner.
   OR
1. In the Main palette (or the Main palette's Fence sub-palette), select 
the Place Fence Block tool.
2. Drag the pointer from the first corner to the diagonally opposed corner.
   


To place the fence as a polygon
-------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Fence sub-palette, select the Place Fence Shape 
tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the beginning (and end) point.
3. Continue to enter data points to define the vertices.
4. To close the shape, enter the last data point at the location of the 
first data point.
   


To remove the fence if it is already displayed
----------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Fence sub-palette, select either the Place Fence 
Block or Place Fence Shape tool.
2. Continue with your work.
   
Hint:
Simply selecting a fence placement tool removes the fence if it is already 
displayed. You can remove the fence this way to prevent accidental fence 
manipulations.



To move the fence (without replacing it)
----------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Fence palette, select the Move Fence Block/Shape 
tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.
   The origin can be thought of as a "handle" for the fence.
3. Enter a data point to position the fence by its origin.
4. Reset to accept the move.
   or
   Repeat step 3.
   


To modify a vertex of the fence
-------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Fence sub-palette, select the Modify Fence Vertex 
tool.
2. Identify the vertex to move.
3. Enter a data point to define the new vertex position.
4. Reset to accept the modification.
   or
   Repeat step 3.
   


Fence manipulation tools
------------------------

MicroStation has two tools with which you can manipulate the elements 
within the fence. These "fence manipulation tools" are the Fence Stretch 
tool and the Delete Fence Contents tool.

The setting of the Fence Selection option menu in the Fence sub-palette 
determines the fence contents -- whether the elements (or parts of 
elements) inside, outside, or overlapping the fence are "contained" by the 
fence.



To set the fence selection mode
-------------------------------

1. Float the Main palette's Fence sub-palette.
2. From the Fence Selection option menu, choose the desired mode.
   Inside -- Only those elements completely inside the fence are considered 
fence contents.
   Overlap -- Only those elements inside or overlapping the fence are 
considered fence contents.
   Clip -- Only elements completely inside the fence and parts of elements 
overlapping the fence are considered fence contents.
   Void -- Only those elements completely outside the fence are considered 
fence contents.
   Void-Overlap -- Only those elements outside or overlapping the fence are 
considered fence contents.
   Void-Clip -- Only elements completely outside the fence and parts of 
elements overlapping the fence are considered fence contents.
   
Note:
It is not necessary to place the fence in order to set the fence selection 
mode. Conversely, once the fence is placed, you can adjust the fence 
selection mode to change the fence contents without moving or replacing the 
fence.



Using fence manipulation tools
------------------------------

1. Place the fence.
2. Check, and if necessary adjust, the fence selection mode.
3. Select the tool.
4. Enter additional data points to perform (and in some cases, repeat) the 
desired manipulation. 
   When you delete the fence contents, MicroStation prompts you "Accept / 
Reject Fence Contents." See *Xref_refguide.
   
Note:
You can Reset to halt a fence manipulation that is in progress, if *XRef, 
set in the Preferences dialog box, is turned on. Manipulations that were 
completed before Resetting remain in the design and can be undone up to the 
limits of the undo buffer. (Pressing <Ctrl-C> also halts a fence 
manipulation.)

Warning:
Some fence manipulations on many elements (large arrays for example) either 
take a long time to complete or cannot be entirely undone once completed 
because there is not enough room in the undo buffer to store all of the 
changes. 

To minimize potential problems, do the following before attempting such a 
manipulation:
*  Back up (*XRef.) the design file.
*  Increase the size of the undo buffer (*XRef), which is set in the 
Preferences dialog box. (It is necessary to exit and restart MicroStation 
for a change to the undo buffer size to take effect.)
   
   Special fence manipulations
   To stretch segments of elements that overlap the fence:
   To copy the fence contents to a new design file:
   To move the fence contents to a different design file:


Special fence manipulations
---------------------------

The Fence Stretch. tool is used to "stretch" (extend or shorten) segments 
of elements that overlap the fence. It does this simply by moving element 
vertices that fall within the fence. The Fence Stretch tool ignores the 
fence selection mode.



To stretch segments of elements that overlap the fence
------------------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Fence sub-palette, select the Fence Stretch tool.
   The Fence Selection setting has no effect.
2. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.
3. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.
   
For more information about Fence Stretch, see *Xref:RG.

The fence contents can also be moved or copied to a new design file.



To copy the fence contents to a new design file
-----------------------------------------------

1. Key in FENCE FILE or FF=.
   The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.
2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory in which to create 
it.
3. Click OK.
4. Accept the copy.
   OR
1. Key in FENCE FILE <filename> or FF=<filename>.
2. Accept the copy. 
   The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by the MS_DEF 
configuration variable. When using the second method, if a file already 
exists with the specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be 
overwritten.
   


To move the fence contents to a different design file
-----------------------------------------------------

1. Key in FENCE SEPARATE or SF=.
   The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.
2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory in which to create 
it.
3. Click OK.
4. Accept the move.
   OR
1. Key in FENCE SEPARATE <filename> or SF=<filename>.
2. Accept the move. 
   The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by the MS_DEF 
configuration variable. When using the second method, if a file already 
exists with the specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be 
overwritten.
   


Using Cells
-----------

A cell is a small drawing -- usually of a frequently-used or complex 
symbol, notation, or detail -- created in MicroStation. Cells are stored in 
a special kind of file called a cell library, which can contain many cells.

Cells are used for these reasons:
*  To save time drawing repeated details.
*  To make it easy to update details throughout a design(s).
*   To provide uniformity.
   
You can create your own cell libraries. Just as new design files are based 
on seed design files, each new cell library is based on a seed cell 
library. To place parts of a design in a cell library, you first associate 
the cell library with the design file by attaching the cell library to the 
design file.

Each cell has a cell origin that is defined when the cell is created. The 
origin can be thought of as the cell's "handle." When you enter a data 
point to place the cell, the cell origin lies at that point.

   To create a cell library:
   To attach a cell library:
   To browse cells:
   To designate a cell as the active cell:
   To create a cell:
   To edit the name or description of a cell:
   To delete a cell from the attached cell library:
   To define a cell as a shared cell in the design file:
   Placing cells
   Dimension-driven cells
   To place a dimension-driven cell:
   To modify a dimension-driven cell:


To create a cell library
------------------------

1. From the Cell Library sub-menu in the File menu, choose New.
   The Create Cell Library dialog box opens.
2. (Optional) To select a different seed file for the cell library, click 
the Seed button and select a seed file from the Select Seed File dialog 
box.
3. In the Name field, key in a name for the new cell library.
   By convention, cell library files end in the extension ".cel."
4. Click OK.


To attach a cell library
------------------------

1. From the Cell Library sub-menu in the File menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the cell library in the Files list box.
3. Click the OK button.
   


To browse cells
---------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens. If a cell library is attached, its 
name is in the title bar. 
   If no cell library is attached and there are no cells in the design 
file, there is nothing to browse. For information about attaching a cell 
library, see To attach a cell library:.
2. Select the name of a cell in the list box.
   An image of the cell is displayed in to the right of the list box.
3. Browse through the cells by selecting other cells with the mouse or by 
pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.
   As each cell is selected, its image is displayed to the right of the 
list box.
   
You can assign active cells to be used:
*  For placement.
*  As a terminator.
*  As a point.
*  For patterning.


To designate a cell as the active cell
--------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the name of the cell.
3. Click on one or more of the buttons in the Active Cells group.
   


To create a cell
----------------

1. If no cell library is attached, attach one before continuing. See To 
attach a cell library:.
2. Draw the graphical contents of the cell on the desired drawing levels.
3. With the Element Selection tool, select all the elements to be included 
in the cell.
   OR
   Place the fence so that it contains all elements to be included in the 
cell. See Using the fence to group elements for manipulation.
4. Select the Define Cell Origin tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Define origin." The cell origin is 
the point that will be used to position the cell in a design. When a cell 
is placed in a design, the cell origin will lie on the data point entered 
to position it.
5. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.
6. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
7. In the lower right corner of the settings box, click the Create button.
   The Create New Cell dialog box opens.
8. In the Name field, key in a name of six characters or fewer.
9. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description of 27 
characters or fewer.
10.Click Create.
   
One or more cells can be made part of another cell, or nested. Just select 
the cells to be nested when you create the new cell.



To edit the name or description of a cell
-----------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.
3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library settings box, click the 
Edit button.
   The Edit Cell Information dialog box opens.
4. Edit the name, description, or both.
5. Click the Modify button.


To delete a cell from the attached cell library
-----------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.
3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library settings box, click the 
Delete button.
   An alert box opens and asks you to confirm the deletion of the selected 
cell.
4. Click the OK button.
   


To define a cell as a shared cell in the design file
----------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the cell's name.
3. Above the list box, turn on Use Shared Cells.
   
Note:
Many discipline-specific cell libraries can be purchased from third-party 
vendors. These cell libraries can, if necessary, be customized to meet your 
exact needs. Commercially-available cell libraries are listed in the 
MicroStation Solutions catalog, which you will receive if you fill out and 
return your MicroStation registration card.

Note:
If you need a cell but cannot add one to a cell library (because, for 
example, a system administrator is in charge of the cell libraries in your 
company), consider using a group. A group is a complex element (actually, 
an unnamed cell) that is not defined in a cell library. You can use a group 
to place the same elements repeatedly in a drawing. For more information 
about groups, see *Xref(Ch3).



Placing cells
-------------

Several tools are available for placing cells in designsabsolute placement) 
or on a level(s) relative to the active level. For more information about 
cell placement, see *XrefRefGde.



Dimension-driven cells
----------------------

Ordinary cells have many uses

A dimension-driven cell is a cell with a special "intelligence." It is not 
static, but dynamically changes its shape based upon relationships defined 
when the cell is created. For information about creating dimension-driven 
cells, see *Xref.

A cell in the design that is based on a dimension-driven cell is called a 
derived cell.



To place a dimension-driven cell
--------------------------------

1. Make the dimension-driven cell the active cell.
2. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.
3. Key in PLACE CELL DIMENSION.
   The Place Dimension-driven Cell dialog box opens. A list box with each 
dimension or constant's initial value (the value stored in the library 
cell) is displayed.
4. Move the pointer into a view.
   The cell displays dynamically.
5. If desired, change a dimension or constant by selecting it in the list 
box, pressing <Tab>, and keying in a new value the Edit field.
   If the cell is visible in a view, the changes display dynamically.
6. Enter a data point to position the cell's origin.
   The dimension-driven cell is solved and placed. If the cell cannot be 
derived from the supplied dimension and constant values, the cell is not 
placed, and you are prompted to enter new values.
   
Note:
Dimensions can be tagged by a constant or, if not, appear in the list 
labelled as "DIMENSION."



To modify a dimension-driven cell
---------------------------------

1. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.
2. Key in MODIFY DIMENSION.
   The Modify Dimensions dialog box opens. A list box with each dimension 
or constant's value is displayed. 
3. If desired, change a dimension or constant by selecting it in the list 
box, pressing <Tab>, and keying in a new value the Edit field.
4. Click the Place button.
   


Using Points
------------

An active point is used as a reference or monument point in the design 
plane. It can consist of a cell from the attached cell library, a text 
character, a symbol, or a line with no (zero) length (a point element).

   To designate a cell as the active point:
   To designate a text character as the active point:
   To designate a symbol from a MicroStation symbol font as the active 
point:


To designate a cell as the active point
---------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. Select the name of the desired cell in the list box.
3. In the Active Cells section, click the Point button.
   OR
1. Float the Points sub-palette (from the Main palette).
   The Points popdown is displayed.
2. In the Cell field, key in the name of the desired cell.
3. From the Point Type option menu, choose Cell.
   


To designate a text character as the active point
-------------------------------------------------

1. Float the Points sub-palette (from the Main palette).
   The Points popdown is displayed.
2. In the Character field, key in the desired text character.
3. From the Point Type option menu, choose Character.
   


To designate a symbol from a MicroStation symbol font as the active point
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. TBD
   
There are several tools that allow you to place points "manually" or at 
calculated locations (along an element, between other points, and so on). 
For more information about placing points, see *XrefRefGde.



Using the Settings Groups Window
--------------------------------

When settings are grouped based on the real world objects that they are 
useful for drawing, you can use the Settings Groups window to adjust the 
active settings and select a drawing tool with a click or two. This is a 
way to bypass the settings boxes and palettes.

Some setup is required to use the Settings Groups window: Drawing settings 
groups must be defined and stored in settings files. This is typically done 
by the site or project manager. If you will be creating settings files, see 
*Xref: Ch. 15, Creating Custom Modules. Sample drawing settings groups are 
stored in the file "settings.stg," which is supplied with MicroStation.

Within a drawing settings group, settings are further grouped into 
components. Like the parent settings group, the components are typically 
named for real world objects. These are the types of components:

Component       Used to draw:
Type:

Linear          Lines, arcs, 
                ellipses, line 
                strings, shapes, 
                curves, complex 
                chains, complex 
                shapes

Text            Text, text nodes

Cell            Cells

Point           Points

Area Pattern    Pattern cells

Hatching        Hatch lines, 
                Crosshatch lines

Dimensiona      Dimensions

Multi-lineb     Multi-lines



   General Procedure for Working with Drawing Settings Groups


General Procedure for Working with Drawing Settings Groups
----------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Groups sub-menu, choose Select.
   The Settings Groups window opens. The drawing settings groups in the 
open settings file are listed in the Group list box.
2. In the Group list box, select a group.
3. In the Component list box, select a component.
   The active settings are set to those of the component. If the component 
definition specifies a key-in, the corresponding tool is selected.
4. Place an element.
5. Place another element using the same settings (return to step 4).
   or
   Select a different component (return to step 3).
   or
   Select a different group (return to step 2).
   
There are other categories of settings groups, which can be selected from 
dialog boxes that are opened from the Settings Groups window's Categories 
menu:
*  Scale -- plotting units relative to design master units (see *Xref).
*  Working units
   
   

















Advanced 2D Design and Drafting
-------------------------------

   Advanced 2D Design and Drafting
   Draw a bicycle wrench
   Draw a switching station in a telephone distribution map
   Tools
   Using Tool Modifiers
   Permanently Grouping Elements
   Putting "Holes" in Solid Elements
   Associating Elements
   Using Multi-lines
   Using Reference Files
   Isometric Drawing
   Using Curves
   Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
   Digitizing


Advanced 2D Design and Drafting
-------------------------------

In the lesson in *Xref(102_Bs2d.fra), you used some of MicroStation's basic 
drawing tools and settings. You placed simple elements with precision input 
and snapping and cells.

   Preview


Preview
-------

In this lesson, you will use some of MicroStation's more advanced features 
for drawing 2D designs. Working with a mechanical engineering design, you 
will learn how to

*Use a construction element (*XRef).

*Use indexing (*XRef).

*Fillet a corner (*XRef).

*Place a group hole (*XRef).

*Place a B-spline curve (*XRef).

*Hatch an area by flooding (*XRef).

Working with a mapping design, you will learn how to:

*Attach and display a reference file (*XRef).

*Copy elements from a reference file to the active design file.(*XRef).

*Draw a group (*XRef).





Draw a bicycle wrench
---------------------

In this exercise, you will draw a simple wrench for use on a bicycle. You 
will use a line as a construction element, an element that is used as a 
drawing aid that is not plotted.

>> Prepare to draw:

1. Open the file "wrench.dgn" in MicroStation's "learning" directory.
2. From the Settings menu, choose Locks.
   The Locks sub-menu opens.
3. From the Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
4. Set the Snap Lock Divisor to 2.
   With this setting, lines will have three snap points: one at each end 
and one at the midpoint.
5. Close the Locks settings box or move it out of the way.
   
Hint:
You may find it convenient to drag settings boxes such as the Locks 
settings box to a second screen, if your system has one, or downwards until 
only the title bar is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The settings 
boxes will be out of the way, yet quickly accessible there. (No more 
instructions to close or move settings boxes and floating palettes will be 
included in this lesson.)

>> Place a line as a construction element:

1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
   The Element Attributes settings box opens.
2. In the Element Attribute settings box, set the Active Color to blue.
3. From Element Attribute settings box's Active Class option menu, choose 
Construction.
4. Drag the Lines sub-palette from the Main palette and let it float.
5. In the Lines sub-palette, select the Place Line tool.
6. In the Lines sub-palette, turn on Length and set the length to 5 working 
units (inches).
7. In the same sub-palette, turn on Indexing.
8. Enter a data point near the middle of View 1 (vertically) and about 1/3 
across the view (from the left).
   As you move the pointer about the data point, a line 5 inches long is 
dynamically displayed. Since indexing is on, when the line is at 0d, 90d, 
180d, and 270d (with respect to the [view?] axes), it "snaps" precisely to 
that angle and is highlighted.
9. When the line snaps to 0d (horizontal) and is highlighted, enter a data 
point to finish placing the line.
10.In the Element Attributes settings box, return the Active Color to white 
and the Active Class to Primary.
   
The wrench has an open end and a closed end, each of which is designed for 
1 inch nuts or bolts. Since the wrench is symmetrical about its midline, 
you need only draw half the wrench, then mirror that half about the 
midline.

>> Draw the open end of the wrench:

1. In the Lines sub-palette, change the Length to 0.5.
2. Select the Place Line tool.
3. Snap a tentative point to the left end of the construction line.
4. Enter a data point to place one end of the line at the end of the 
construction element.
   As you move the pointer, a white line 1/2 inch long is dynamically 
displayed extending towards (or away from) the pointer from the end of the 
construction element.
5. When the line is at 90d (pointing "straight up"), enter a second data 
point to place the line.
   Do not Reset.
   A white line 1/2 inch long is dynamically displayed extending from the 
end of the line just placed.
6. Move the pointer around the screen until the dynamically displayed line 
snaps to the angle of 180d (pointing to the left), then enter a data point 
to place it.
   Another line 1/2 inch long is dynamically displayed.
7. Move the pointer around the screen until the dynamically displayed line 
snaps to the angle of 180d (pointing to the left), then enter a data point 
to place it.
   The two lines, end to end, form a horizontal line one inch long. This is 
the top half of the "jaw" of the wrench.
   
To see the primary elements better, you will magnify the area of the open 
end. Then you will fillet the corners of the open end and restore the view 
area to its original extents.

>> Magnify the open end of the wrench:

1. In the Main palette, open the View Control sub-palette and select the 
Window Area view control.
2. Drag the dynamically displayed box around the white elements and release 
the Data button.
3. Enter a data point in View 1 to select it.
   
>> Fillet the corner of the open end of the wrench:

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Fillets sub-palette.
2. In the Fillets sub-palette, select the Circular Fillet tool.
3. In the Radius field, key in 0.1 working units (inches).
4. From the Truncate option menu, choose Both.
5. Select the vertical line above the blue construction line.
   The line is highlighted.
6. Select the horizontal white line that intersects the vertical line.
   The line is highlighted, a fillet is drawn at the intersection of the 
two lines, and both lines are truncated.
7. Enter a data point to accept the fillet.
8. Close the Fillets sub-palette.
   
>> Restore View 1 to its previous area

1. From the View menu, choose Previous.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select View."
2. Enter a data point in View 1 to select it.
   
On to more of the wrench: Next, the shank and a B-spline curve to finish 
the open end.

>> Draw the shank of the wrench:

1. In the Lines palette, select the Place Line tool.
2. Set the Length to 3.5 working units (inches).
3. Turn on Angle and set the Active Angle to zero.
4. Turn off Indexing.
   As you move the pointer about the screen, a 3.5 inch line is dynamically 
displayed.
5. Snap a tentative point to the left end of the blue construction line.
   The construction line is highlighted and cross hairs are displayed at 
the left end.
6. Click in the Command Window to give it the keyboard focus, then key in 
DL=.75,.5.
   The 3.5 inch line is placed parallel to and 1/2 inch above the 
construction line. Its left end is 3/4 inch to the right of the left end of 
the construction line.
   
>> Place a B-spline curve from the top jaw to the top of the shank.

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Curves sub-palette.
2. In the Curves sub-palette, select the Create Curve tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter start point."
3. From the Curves sub-palette's Type menu, choose B-spline (points).
4. In the Curves sub-palette's Order field, key in 4.
5. Snap a tentative point to the left end of the upper jaw of the open end 
of the wrench and enter a data point to accept that point as the start of 
the B-spline curve.
6. Enter three more data points as illustrated below to define points 
through which the B-spline curve passes. [I don't think this can be 
described very well in text; needs a "connect the dots" illustration.]
7. Snap a tentative point to the left end of the upper shank line and enter 
a data point to accept the point as a point on the B-spline curve.
8. Reset to make the last point defined the end of the B-spline curve.
   
Next, fence the primary elements that make up the upper part of the wrench 
and mirror them about the construction line to make the bottom part.

>> Fence the upper part of the wrench:

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Fence sub-palette.
2. In the Fence sub-palette, select the Place Fence Block tool.
3. From the Fence sub-palette's Fence Selection option menu, choose 
Overlap.
4. Place the fence so that it encloses or overlaps all of the primary 
(white) elements in the design but not the (blue) construction element.
   
>> Mirror the fenced elements about the construction element:

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Manipulate Element 
sub-palette.
2. In the Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Mirror Element tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Identify element."
3. In the Manipulate Element sub-palette's Mirror About option menu, choose 
Horizontal.
4. In the Manipulate Element sub-palette, turn on Make Copy.
   The tool name in the Command Window is now "Mirror Element About 
Horizontal (Copy)."
5. In the Manipulate Element sub-palette, turn on Use Fence.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Accept/Reject Fence Contents."
   As you move the pointer about the screen, a box the size of the fence 
dynamically displays where the fence contents will be mirrored.
6. Snap a tentative point on the construction element.
   The construction element is highlighted and cross hairs are displayed at 
the tentative point.
7. Enter a data point to accept the mirrored copy of the elements.
8. Select the Place Fence Block tool to delete the fence (which is now 
around the copied elements).
   
>> Draw the closed end of the wrench.

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Arcs sub-palette.
2. In the Arcs sub-palette, select the Place Arc by Center tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window [is missing: should be Enter center 
point of arc].
3. Snap a tentative point to the right end of the blue construction line.
   The construction line is highlighted and cross hairs are displayed at 
its right end.
4. Enter a data point to accept the tentative point as the center of the 
arc.
   A dotted line representing the radius of the arc is dynamically 
displayed between the center of the arc and the location of the pointer. 
The prompt in the Command Window [is missing: should read Enter first arc 
endpoint].
5. Snap a tentative point to the right end of the lower 3.5 inch line.
   The line is highlighted and cross hairs are displayed at its right end.
6. Enter a data point to accept the tentative point as the first end of the 
arc.
   A second radius line and the arc are dynamically displayed. The prompt 
in the Command Window [is missing: should read Enter second arc endpoint].
7. Snap a tentative point to the right end of the upper 3.5 inch line.
   The line is highlighted and cross hairs are displayed at its right end. 
The arc extends from right end of the bottom line to the right end of the 
top line, forming the closed end of the wrench.
8. Enter a data point to accept the tentative point as the second end of 
the arc.
   
>> Link the elements in the wrench together into a complex chain:

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Chain sub-palette.
2. In the Chain sub-palette, select the Create Complex Chain tool.
3. In the Chain sub-palette's Type option menu, choose Automatic.
   The tool name in the Command Window is "Automatic Create Complex Chain." 
The prompt in the Command Window is "Identify element."
4. Enter a data point on any element in the wrench design.
   The element is highlighted. The prompt in the Command Window is 
"Accept/Reject (select next input)." 
5. Enter a data point (but not on any element in the design) to accept the 
highlighted element and to have MicroStation automatically identify the 
next element in the chain.
   An element adjacent to the first element selected is highlighted.
6. Continue entering data points until each element that makes up the 
wrench is highlighted, then Reset.
>> Place a hexagonal hole in the closed end of the wrench:

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Polygons sub-palette.
2. In the Polygons sub-palette, select the Place Polygon tool.
3. In the Polygons sub-palette, adjust the controls as follows:
   
Set this        To
control

Type[a]         Circumscribed

# of Edges      6

Radius          0.5 (inches)

Area            Hole

Fill Type       Outline

[a]
   
   A hexagon is dynamically displayed at the location of the pointer.
4. Snap a tentative point to the right end of the construction line.
   The construction line is highlighted and the polygon is displayed with 
its center on the right end of the construction line.
5. Enter a data point to accept the placement of the polygon.
   The hole at the closed end of the wrench is complete.
   
>> Associate the hexagonal hole to the wrench as a group hole:

1. In the Chain sub-palette, select the Group Holes tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Identify Solid Element."
2. Enter a data point on the complex chain (the wrench).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Accept/Identify hole element."
3. Enter a data point on the hexagon.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Accept/Identify hole element."
4. Reset.
   
To show that the polygon in the closed end of the wrench is a hole, you 
will pattern the wrench.

>> Pattern the wrench:

1. From the Palettes menu, choose Patterning.
   The Patterning palette opens.
2. In the Patterning palette, select the Hatch Area tool.
   If there is no value in the Spacing field, you must key in a value 
before the Hatch Area tool can be selected.
3. In the Patterning palette's Spacing field, key in 0.2.
4. From the Patterning palette's Method option menu, choose Element.
   The tool name in the Command Window is Hatch Area. The prompt is 
"Identify element."
5. Enter a data point on the complex chain (wrench).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Accept @ pattern intersection 
point."
6. Enter a data point inside the lines and curves representing the wrench, 
but not within the hexagon in the closed end.
   The "solid" part of the wrench design is hatched. One of the hatch lines 
passes through the data point you just placed.
   


Draw a switching station in a telephone distribution map
--------------------------------------------------------

In this exercise, you will begin with a design file that shows a telephone 
distribution map in a residential neighborhood. You will attach a reference 
file that shows the streets, and you will draw a building along a street.

>> Open "network.dgn" and attach "land.dgn" for reference:

1. Press <Ctrl-O>.
   The Open Design File dialog box opens.
2. In the Open Design File dialog box, select "network.dgn" and click OK.
   The design file "network.dgn" opens.
3. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference Files settings box opens.
4. From the Reference Files settings box's Tools menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
5. In the Attach Reference Files dialog box, select the file "land.dgn" and 
click OK.
   A dialog box with "land.dgn" in the title bar is displayed.
6. In the dialog box's Logical Name field, key in "plot," a short name for 
the reference file.
7. In the dialog box's Description field, key in "plot boundaries" to 
describe the file, which shows the boundaries of the residential plots in 
the subdivision.
8. In the same dialog box, click OK.
   The reference file is attached and displayed in the open view.
   
   



Tools
-----

The following tools let you perform advanced 2D drafting and designing 
operations. For information about the basic 2D tools, see *XRef(Ch2p30).

To:                      Use the tools in 
                         the:

Place curves.            Curves sub-palette

Create joints at multi-liMulti-line Joints 
intersections.           palette

Construct fillets, paraboFillets sub-palette
and chamfers.

Permanently group elementChain sub-palette

Put a hole in a solid eleChain sub-palette

Discontinue some kinds ofDrop Element sub-palette
element groupings.

Attach reference files toReference Files palette
detach them from the active 
design file.

Control the position, scaReference Files palette
and orientation of attached 
reference files.

Define an auxiliary coordAuxiliary Coordinates 
system.                  palette

Select, rotate, or move aAuxiliary Coordinates 
auxiliary coordinate systpalette





Using Tool Modifiers
--------------------

Tool modifiers are used to apply location and geometric constraints to 
tools "on the fly."

For example, TBD: EXAMPLE OF LOCATION CONSTRAINT; EXAMPLE OF GEOMETRIC 
CONSTRAINT.

For each element type, the following types of geometric constraints can be 
applied:
   Line -- tangent, parallel, perpendicular.
   Multi-line (per segment) -- tangent, parallel, perpendicular.
   Line string (per segment) -- tangent, parallel, perpendicular.
   Shape (per segment) -- tangent, parallel, perpendicular.
   Arc -- tangent.
   Circle -- tangent.
   Ellipse -- tangent, parallel, perpendicular.
   
In 3D, location and geometric constraints can involve only sets of elements 
residing on the same plane.

   Using Tools That Support Modifiers:
   Using a Modifier:


Using Tools That Support Modifiers
----------------------------------

1. (Optional) If you are modifying an existing element, select the element.
2. Select the desired tool.
3. (Optional) To constrain geometrical characteristics of the element, use 
pop-down fields (or the Tool Settings window).
4. Enter a data point to start placing or modifying the element.
5. (Optional) Use a modifier(s) to apply location or geometric constraints. 
See Using a Modifier:. 
6. If necessary, enter additional data points to place or modify the 
element.
   


Using a Modifier
----------------

1. From the pop-up menu or the Modifiers menu (see *Xref: Reference Guide), 
choose the item to activate the desired modifier.
   The modifier name and a prompt are displayed in the Command Window.
2. Identify an element (with most modifiers).
   or
   Reset to continue placing or modifying the element without applying a 
constraint.
   
Note:
If you attempt to apply a redundant constraint (one that conflicts with 
another previously applied), MicroStation disregards the new constraint.



Permanently Grouping Elements
-----------------------------

Some groupings in MicroStation, such as selection sets and fenced elements, 
are temporary. Others, such as cells, are stored in libraries outside the 
design file. Neither of these limitations applies to complex chains, 
complex shapes, groups, and graphic groups.

   Using complex chains and complex shapes
   Using groups
   Using graphic groups


Using complex chains and complex shapes
---------------------------------------

A complex chain (sometimes called a "complex string") is a series of 
connected open elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves) grouped for 
manipulation as a single entity. 

Take, for example, the bicycle wrench drawn in the lesson in this chapter. 
The top half of the wrench, which was drawn first, contains several line 
segments, an arc (in the filleted corner) and a B-spline curve. In the 
lesson, these elements were fenced and mirrored to form the other half. 
They could have been linked into a complex chain, and the chain could then 
have been mirrored to form the bottom half of the wrench.

A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connected open 
elements grouped for manipulation as a single entity. The difference is 
that the first element and the last element in a complex shape are 
connected, thereby closing a shape.

The completed wrench in the lesson is an example of a complex shape. All 
the line segments, arcs, and B-splines, which form a closed shape, were 
linked.

The tools used to create complex chains and complex shapes are in the Chain 
sub-palette (*XRef:RefGde).

Note:
Like cells and groups, which you learned about in *Xref: Ch. 2, complex 
chains and complex shapes are complex elements. A complex element is a 
grouping of two or more elements that is manipulated as a single entity. 
(If you develop application software for MicroStation, you should know that 
a "complex header" element is stored in the design file for each grouping.) 
With the exception of B-spline curves, you can drop the status of a complex 
element; that is, convert the complex element to its component elements. 
Dropping complex status is necessary to manipulate component elements 
individually.



Using groups
------------

A group is a complex element (actually, an unnamed cell) that is not 
defined in a cell library. You can use a group to manipulate its member 
elements together. For example, you can move or copy the group repeatedly 
in a drawing.

   To create a group:
   To break up a group:


To create a group
-----------------

1. Select the elements that will compose the group.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Group (or press <Ctrl-G>).
   The handles change from indicating each selected element to indicating 
the group.
   


To break up a group
-------------------

1. Select the group.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Ungroup (or press <Ctrl-U>.
   The handles change from indicating the group to indicating each selected 
element.
   
You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements. For 
information about manipulation and modification of simple elements, see 
*Xref: "Manipulating and Modifying Elements" on page 2-#.



Using graphic groups
--------------------

Graphic groups are the most flexible grouping technique in MicroStation. 
Without "breaking up" the grouping you can add, remove, or manipulate 
individual member elements. Whether your actions will change the whole 
graphic group or only part of it depends upon whether you turn the Graphic 
Group Lock (in the Locks or Lock Toggles settings box) on or off.

The Chain sub-palette has tools for creating a graphic group and adding and 
removing elements to or from a graphic group. For information, see *Xref: 
"Chain sub-palette" on page #-# in the Reference Guide.

   To manipulate or modify a graphic group:
   To manipulate or modify one or more member elements of a graphic group:


To manipulate or modify a graphic group
---------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose either item.
   The Locks settings box or Lock Toggles setting box opens.
2. Turn Graphic Group Lock on.
3. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or 
modification. See *Xref.
4. Identify the graphic group.
5. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool. See 
*Xref.
   


To manipulate or modify one or more member elements of a graphic group
----------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Select the element(s).
2. Use the Element Selection tool to perform the desired manipulation or 
modification. See *Xref.
   or
   Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or 
modification. See *Xref.
3. If using a specialized tool, continue as called for in the instructions 
for using the tool. See *Xref.
   OR
1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose either item.
   The Locks settings box or Lock Toggles setting box opens.
2. Turn Graphic Group Lock off.
3. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation or 
modification. See *Xref.
4. Identify an element in the graphic group.
5. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool. See 
*Xref.
   


Putting "Holes" in Solid Elements
---------------------------------

When you draw a shape that represents a hole in a solid element, the 
interior of that shape cannot be hatched or patterned, and the background 
will show "through" the hole.

The Chain sub-palette has a special tool, *Xref to Ref Guide: Group Holes, 
for putting holes in solid elements.



Associating Elements
--------------------

Under most circumstances, elements are static

One exception to this rule is association, in which an element's position 
in the design plane is defined in relation to another element. When that 
other element is moved, the associated element moves with it. For example, 
dimension elements can be associated with the elements whose dimensions 
they display. The dimensions they display are updated when the dimensions 
of the elements with which they are associated change.

The three types of elements that can be associated with other elements are 
dimensions, multi-lines, and shared cells. The association is made when the 
dimension, multi-line, or shared cell is placed. The procedures for 
associating shared cells and multi-lines are set out below; for more 
information about associative dimensions, see *XRef.

When a shared cell is associated with another element, the origin of the 
cell is associated with a point on the other element.

   To associate a shared cell with another element:
   To associate a multi-line with another element:


To associate a shared cell with another element
-----------------------------------------------

1. (Optional -- if no cell library is attached to the active design file) 
From the File menu's Cell Library, sub-menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.
2. In the Attach Cell Library dialog box, select the desired cell library 
and click OK.
3. (Optional -- if the desired cell is not designated as the active 
placement cell) From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
4. Select the desired cell and click on the Placement button in the Active 
Cells area
5. From the Settings Menu, choose Locks or Lock Toggles.
   The Locks or Lock Toggles settings box opens.
6. In the Locks or Lock Toggles settings box, turn on Association.
7. In the Main palette's Cells sub-palette, select the Place Active Cell 
tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Place Active Cell."
8. Snap a tentative point to the element to which the cell is to be 
associated.
9. Enter a data point to accept placement and association of the active 
cell.
   
When a multi-line is associated with another element, one or more vertices 
of the multi-line are associated with points on another element (or 
elements).



To associate a multi-line with another element
----------------------------------------------

1. (Optional) From the Settings Menu, choose Locks or Lock Toggles.
   The Locks or Lock Toggles settings box opens.
2. In the Locks or Lock Toggles settings box, or in the tool settings for 
the Place Multi-line tool, turn on Association.
3. In the Main palette's Lines sub-palette, select the Place Multi-line 
tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Place Active Cell."
   Vertices of the multi-line that are not associated with other elements 
are placed in the normal manner. See *XRef. When you are ready to place a 
vertex associated with another element, continue with step 4.
4. Snap a tentative point to the element to which the multi-line's vertex 
is to be associated.
5. Enter a data point to accept placement of the vertex of the multi-line 
and its association with the other element.
   


Using Multi-lines
-----------------

The multi-line is a primitive element that consists of up to 16 
independently-defined lines. The active multi-line definition specifies the 
form of the multi-lines placed with the Place Multi-line tool. The 
component lines can be varying distances apart. Each component line can 
have its own level, color, line style, and line weight.

MicroStation lets you define and save multi-line styles in style libraries. 
You can load any of the defined styles, when needed, as the active 
multi-line definition.

   To open a style library as the active style library:
   To load an existing multi-line style as the active multi-line 
definition:
   defining a multi-line:


To open a style library as the active style library
---------------------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.
   The Multi-lines settings box opens. The controls show the settings that 
constitute the active multi-line definition. The defined multi-line is 
graphically depicted near the lower left corner of the settings box.
2. From the Style menu in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Edit.
   The Styles settings box opens. The active style library is identified in 
the title bar of the Styles settings box.
3. From the File menu in the Styles settings box, choose Open.
   The Open Style Library dialog box opens.
4. Select the desired multi-line style and click the OK button.
   


To load an existing multi-line style as the active multi-line definition
------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.
   The Multi-lines settings box opens.
2. From the Style menu in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Select.
   The Select Multi-line Style dialog box opens.
3. In the Select Multi-line Style dialog box, select the desired multi-line 
style and click the OK button.
   


defining a multi-line
---------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.
   The Multi-lines settings box opens. The controls show the settings that 
constitute the active multi-line definition. The defined multi-line (if 
there is one) is graphically depicted near the lower left corner of the 
settings box.
   The component option menu (just below the File and Style pull-down 
menus) controls which controls are displayed in the settings box.
2. Add any desired component lines to the multi-line definition. See To add 
a line to a multi-line definition:.
3. (Optional) Adjust the new line's offset. See To adjust a component 
line's offset:.
4. (Optional) Give the new line any desired attributes (class, level, 
color, line weight, and line style) to override the active element 
attributes when the multi-line is placed. See To give a component line 
attributes that override the active element attributes:.
5. (Optional) Delete any desired lines from the multi-line definition. See 
To delete a component line from a multi-line definition:.
6. (Optional) Define a start cap for the multi-line. See To define a start 
cap for a multi-line:.
7. (Optional) Define an end cap for the multi-line. See To define an end 
cap for a multi-line:.
8. (Optional) Adjust the settings for joints (a line optionally displayed 
at vertices in the multi-line). See To define multi-line joints:.
9. (Optional) Save the new multi-line definition as a style. See "To create 
a multi-line style based on the active multi-line definition:" on page 
3-24.
   
   To add a line to a multi-line definition:
   To adjust a component line's offset:
   To give a component line attributes that override the active element 
attributes:
   To delete a component line from a multi-line definition:
   To define a start cap for a multi-line:
   To define an end cap for a multi-line:
   To define multi-line joints:


To add a line to a multi-line definition
----------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.
   The Multi-lines settings box opens.
2. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) choose Lines.
3. From the Edit menu, choose Insert.
   A new line is displayed in the lines list box. It has no offset value 
and no attribute override settings.
   


To adjust a component line's offset
-----------------------------------

1. From the component option menu in the Multi-lines settings box, choose 
Lines.
2. Select the desired line in the list box.
3. Key in a positive or negative offset value (in working units) in the 
Offset field.
   


To give a component line attributes that override the active element 
attributes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Lines.
2. Select the desired line in the list box.
3. To give the selected line attributes of class, level, color, line 
weight, and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on 
the desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.
   The controls work the same way as the controls in the Element Attributes 
settings box.
   


To delete a component line from a multi-line definition
-------------------------------------------------------

1. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Lines.
2. Select the desired line in the list box.
3. From the Multi-lines setting box's Edit menu, choose Delete.
   


To define a start cap for a multi-line
--------------------------------------

1. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Start Cap.
   The controls for defining a start cap are displayed. A graphic 
representation of the smart cap definition is displayed in the lower left 
corner of the settings box.
2. Turn on one, two, or all of the start cap types:
   Line -- a straight line across the end of the multi-line.
   Outer Arc -- a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.
   Inner Arcs -- arcs between each component line and the component line 
nearest it on each side.
3. To give the smart cap element or elements attributes of class, level, 
color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element 
attributes), turn on the desired controls to the right and adjust the 
settings.
   The controls work the same way as the controls in the Element Attributes 
settings box.
   


To define an end cap for a multi-line
-------------------------------------

1. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) in the Multi-lines settings box, choose End Cap.
   The controls for defining an end cap are displayed. A graphic 
representation of the end cap definition is displayed in the lower left 
corner of the settings box.
2. Turn on one, two, or all of the end cap types:
   Line -- a straight line across the end of the multi-line.
   Outer Arc -- a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.
   Inner Arcs -- arcs between each component line and the component line 
nearest it on each side.
3. To give the end cap element or elements attributes of class, level, 
color, line weight, and line style (to override the active element 
attributes), turn on the desired controls to the right and adjust the 
settings.
   The controls work the same way as the controls in the Element Attributes 
settings box.
   


To define multi-line joints
---------------------------

1. From the component option menu (just below the Edit and Style pull-down 
menus) in the Multi-lines settings box, choose Joints.
   The controls for defining multi-line joints are displayed. A graphic 
representation of the joint is displayed in the lower left corner of the 
settings box (if Display joints is on).
2. To have joints display, turn on Display joints.
3. To give the joints attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and 
line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on the desired 
controls to the right and adjust the settings.
   The controls work the same way as the controls in the Element Attributes 
settings box.
   
>> To create a multi-line style based on the active multi-line definition:

1. From the Multi-lines settings box's Style menu, choose Edit.
   The Styles settings box opens.
2. (Optional) To create the style and save it in a style library other than 
the active multi-line style library, from the File menu in the Styles 
settings box, choose Open or New, then create or select another style 
library.
3. Click the New bottom.
   A style with the current multi-line definition is created and named 
"Style (n+1)" where n is the highest number of any style named this way.
4. (Optional) Key in a name for the style in the Name field.
5. (Optional) Key in a description of the style in the Description field.
6. Click the Save button.
   An alert box appears asking you whether you wish to over-write the 
selected style.
7. In the alert box, click the OK button.
   
>> To change the name or description of a multi-line style:

1. From the Multi-lines setting box's Style menu, choose Edit.
   The Styles settings box opens.
2. In the Styles settings box's list box, select the desired style.
3. In the Name and Description fields, key in the new name or description.
4. Click the Save button.
   An alert box appears asking you whether you wish to over-write the 
selected style.
5. In the alert box, click the OK button.
   
>> To overwrite a style with the active multi-line definition:

1. From the Multi-lines setting box's Style menu, choose Edit.
   The Styles settings box opens.
2. In the Styles settings box's list box, select the desired style.
3. In the Styles settings box, click the Save button.
   An alert box appears asking you whether you wish to over-write the 
selected style.
4. In the alert box, click the OK button.
   
>> To delete a style from the active style library:

1. TBD when Setting Manager is done.
2. .
>> To create a style library and open it as the active style library:

1. TBD when Setting Manager is done.
2. .
>> To change the attributes of a multi-line to the active multi-line 
definition:

1. Key in CHANGE MLINE.
2. Identify the multi-line.
   The multi-line is highlighted.
3. Accept the change.
   The attributes of the selected multi-line are changed. Depending upon 
the setting of the Place By tool, the multi-line's component line offsets 
may be adjusted and, as a result, the multi-line's position may change.
   
>> To match the active multi-line definition to a multi-line whose 
definition is saved as a style:

1. From the Palettes menu, choose Match.
   The Match palette opens.
2. Select the multi-line and select the Match Multi-line tool.
   or
   Select the Match Multi-line tool and select the multi-line.
>> To associate a vertex of a multi-line with another element:

1. In the Locks or Toggles settings box, turn Snap Lock on.
2. In the Locks or Lock Toggles settings box, or in the tool settings box 
for the Place Multi-line tool, turn on Association.
3. From the Main palette's Line sub-palette, select the Place Multi-line 
tool.
4. Use a tentative point to snap a vertex of the multi-line to the element 
to which it is to be associated.
5. Accept the placement of the multi-line's vertex.
6. Continue placing vertices of the multi-line or Reset to complete the 
multi-line.
   
>> To "drop" a multi-line (convert it to elements that can be displayed and 
modified with MicroStation 3.x or earlier):

1. From the Main palette's Drop sub-palette, select the Drop Multi-line 
tool.
2. Identify the multi-line.
   OR
1. Identify the multi-line.
2. From the Main palette's Drop sub-palette, select the Drop Multi-line 
tool.
>> To "freeze" a multi-line (temporarily convert it into a form that can be 
displayed by MicroStation 3.x or earlier):

1. Key in FREEZE.
2. Identify the multi-line.
3. Accept the freeze.
   


Using Reference Files
---------------------

A reference file is a design file that is attached or associated with the 
active design file. You can display the elements in a reference file as 
though they were in the active design and use them for reference and as 
construction aids. (Although you cannot manipulate the elements in a 
reference file, you can snap to them and even copy them into the active 
design file.)

The most common way to attach a reference file is to attach it 
coincidentally, which means that the coordinates of the reference file 
design plane are aligned with the those of the active reference file, 
without any rotation, scaling, or offset.

   To attach a reference file coincidentally:
   To attach a reference file using a saved view:
   To attach the active design file as a reference file:
   To identify a reference file:
   To update reference file elements in a view:
   To copy elements from a reference file to the active design file:
   To turn the display of a reference file off or on:


To attach a reference file coincidentally
-----------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference Files settings box opens.
2. From the Reference Files setting box's Tools menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
3. In the Attach Reference File dialog box's Files list box, select the 
desired design file.
4. Click the OK button.
   A dialog box with the name of the reference file in its title bar opens.
5. (Optional) In the dialog box's Logical Name field, key in a brief name 
(up to 22 characters) for the file.
6. (Optional) In the dialog box's Description field, key in a description 
(up to 40 characters) of the file.
7. From the Attachment Mode option menu, choose Coincident.
8. Click the OK button.
   
Hint:
Since the same design file can be attached many times, give the attachments 
logical names and descriptions that help you remember which attachment is 
which.

Attaching reference files can be a useful way to set up a plot. In 
composing the plot, you can attach only the portion of a design in a saved 
view. For information about saved views, see *XRef. (To set up a ???, see 
*XRefDrawComp.)



To attach a reference file using a saved view
---------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference Files settings box opens.
2. From the Reference Files setting box's Tools menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
3. In the Attach Reference File dialog box's Files list box, select the 
desired design file.
4. Click the OK button.
   A dialog box with the name of the reference file in its title bar opens. 
Saved views are displayed in the Saved Views list box.
5. (Optional) In the dialog box's Logical Name field, key in a brief name 
(up to 22 characters) for the file.
6. (Optional) In the dialog box's Description field, key in a description 
(up to 40 characters) of the file.
7. In the Saved View list box, select a saved view.
   In the Attachment Mode option menu, Saved View is automatically chosen.
8. Click the OK button.
   The area of the reference file's saved view is dynamically displayed as 
a rectangle centered about the pointer. 
9. Enter a data point to locate the center of the reference file 
attachment.
   
Hint:
Since the same design file can be attached many times, give the attachments 
logical names and descriptions that help you remember which attachment is 
which.

It is sometimes convenient to refer to one part of a design while drawing 
in another area by attaching the active design file to itself.



To attach the active design file as a reference file
----------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference Files settings box opens.
2. From the Reference Files setting box's Tools menu, choose Attach.
   The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
3. In the Attach Reference File dialog box's Files list box, select the 
active design file.
4. Click the OK button.
   A dialog box with the name of the file in its title bar opens. Saved 
views are displayed in the Saved Views list box.
5. (Optional) In the dialog box's Logical Name field, key in a brief name 
(up to 22 characters) for the file.
6. (Optional) In the dialog box's Description field, key in a description 
(up to 40 characters) of the file.
7. Proceed normally to attach the file or a saved view.
   
Most of the reference file tools operate on the reference file that is 
selected in the Reference File settings box. If no reference file is 
selected there, you are prompted to identify a file.



To identify a reference file
----------------------------

1. In the Reference File settings box, select the reference file.
   or
   In a view, identify an element in the reference file.
   or
   In the Command Window, key in the reference file's filename or logical 
name.
   


To update reference file elements in a view
-------------------------------------------

1. Key in REFERENCE UPDATE.
2. Identify the reference file by identifying one of its elements.
   or
   Identify the reference file by keying in its logical name or filename in 
the Command Window.


To copy elements from a reference file to the active design file
----------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file in which the 
elements are located.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Attachment.
   The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. In the title bar is the name 
of the identified reference file.
4. In the Attachment Settings dialog box, turn on Display, Snap, and 
Locate.
5. Identify the elements to be copied.
6. In the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Copy 
Element tool.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter First Point (Selection Set)."
7. Enter a data point to define the origin of the elements to be copied.
   The elements are dynamically displayed as the pointer is moved about the 
screen.
8. Enter a data point to define the origin of the copies of the elements in 
the active design file.
   
Hint:
To copy elements from a reference file to the active design file without 
moving them, enter the data points in steps 7 and 8, above, without moving 
the pointer.



To turn the display of a reference file off or on
-------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Attachment.
   The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. In the title bar is the name 
of the identified reference file.
4. In the Attachment Settings dialog box, turn Display on or off.
   
>> To turn the display of levels in a reference file off or on (in a 
particular view or views):

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Levels.
   The Reference Levels settings box opens.
4. In the Reference Levels settings box's View Number option menu, choose 
the desired view.
5. Click the number of any level or levels to toggle its display in the 
chosen view.
6. Click Apply to apply the level map to the chosen view.
   or
   Click All to apply the level map to all views.
>> To control level symbology for a reference file:

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Level 
Symbology.
   The Level Symbology dialog box opens. The number and filename of the 
reference file are displayed in the lower left corner of the dialog box.
4. Adjust the desired controls.
   The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those in the 
Element Attributes settings box. For information about using those 
controls, see *XRefs.
5. In the list box on the left side of the dialog box, select a level or a 
range of levels and press Apply.
   (To select a range of levels, select a level at one end of the range and 
then select the level at the other end while pressing the <Shift> key.)
   OR
   Double-click a level.
   
>> To turn the display of level symbology in a reference file on or off (in 
all views):

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Level 
Symbology.
   The Level Symbology dialog box opens.
4. For each level attribute (color, line weight, or line style) to be 
displayed in place of the elements' own attributes, turn on the 
corresponding check box under Overrides.
5. Click OK.
   
>> To turn snapping to elements in a reference file on or off:

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Attachment.
   The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. In the title bar is the name 
of the identified reference file.
4. In the Attachment Settings dialog box, turn Snap on or off.
   
>> To control whether elements in a reference file can be identified (for 
construction purposes):

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. In the Reference File setting box, identify the design file.
3. From the Reference Files setting box's Settings menu, choose Attachment.
   The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. In the title bar is the name 
of the identified reference file.
4. In the Attachment Settings dialog box, turn Locate on or off.
   
>> To detach a reference file:

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
   The Reference File setting box opens.
2. Select the desired reference file.
3. From the Reference File setting box's Tools menu, choose Detach.
   An alert box will ask you to confirm that the selected reference file is 
to be detached.
4. Click the OK button.
   OR
1. From the Palette menu, choose Reference Files.
2. Select the Detach Reference File tool.
3. Identify the reference file, unless it is selected in the Reference File 
settings box.
   OR
1. Key in REFERENCE DETACH [filename|logical_name].
   
>> To detach all reference files:

1. Key in REFERENCE DETACH ALL.
   


Isometric Drawing
-----------------

Isometric drawing allows the representation of 3D relationships in a 2D 
design. There are special tools for quickly and accurately placing 
isometric representations of blocks and circles.

   To set up the isometric drawing plane:
   To force each data point to lie on the isometric plane:
   To place a shape that represents a rectangular block projected from the 
isometric drawing plane:
   To place an ellipse that represents a circle projected from the 
isometric drawing plane:
   To configure the pointer for isometric drawing:


To set up the isometric drawing plane
-------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
2. In the Locks settings box, from the Isometric Plane option menu, choose 
Top, Left, Right, or All.
   
Hint:
You can also set the orientation of the isometric plane in the controls for 
the Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools.



To force each data point to lie on the isometric plane
------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full or Toggles.
   The Locks or Lock Toggles settings box opens.
2. In the Locks or Lock Toggles settings box, turn on Isometric Lock.
   When a linear element is placed, it "snaps" to the active isometric 
drawing plane.
   


To place a shape that represents a rectangular block projected from the 
isometric drawing plane
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Polygons sub-palette.
2. In the Polygons sub-palette, select the Place Isometric Block tool.
   The pop-down controls for the Place Isometric Block tool are displayed.
3. From the Plane option menu, choose the plane from which you want the 
block to appear to be projected.
4. Enter a data point to define one corner of the block.
   A block is dynamically displayed as you move the pointer.
5. Enter a data point (or drag the pointer and release the data button) to 
define the opposite corner of the block.
   


To place an ellipse that represents a circle projected from the isometric 
drawing plane
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Circles & Ellipses 
sub-palette.
2. In the Circles & Ellipses sub-palette, select the Place Isometric Circle 
tool.
   The pop-down controls for the Place Isometric Circle tool are displayed.
3. From the Plane option menu, choose the plane from which you want the 
circle to appear to be projected.
4. Enter a data point to define the center of the circle.
   An ellipse representing a projected circle is dynamically displayed as 
you move the pointer.
5. Enter a data point (or drag the pointer and release the data button) to 
define a point on the edge of the ellipse.
   


To configure the pointer for isometric drawing
----------------------------------------------

1. From the User menu, choose Preferences.
   The Preferences dialog box opens.
2. In the Preferences dialog box's category list box, select Operation.
3. (Optional) From the Pointer Type option menu, choose Isometric.
   The cross hairs of the cursor indicate graphically the plane in which an 
element is to be placed.
4. (Optional) From the Pointer Size option menu, choose Full View.
   The cross hairs of the cursor extend to the edges of the screen, 
facilitating alignment of new elements with elements in the same isometric 
plane.
5. Click the OK button.
   
Note:
To make these changes with key-ins, key in SET CURSOR ISOMETRIC and SET 
CURSOR FULL. To restore the cursor to its default configuration, key in SET 
CURSOR ORTHOGONAL and SET CURSOR SMALL.



Using Curves
------------

With manual drafting tools, you can draw a curve through a series of points 
with a French curve. MicroStation has, in effect, a variety of mathematical 
French curves for placing curves on the basis of data points in the design 
plane. These include point curves, NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines), 
Catmull-Rom curves, and composite curves. 

You can use these curves without any understanding of the mathematics 
behind them. The easiest way to become familiar with them is to enter a 
series of data points or a line string, then construct different curves 
based on those elements. (If you are intrigued by the mathematics, see 
*XRef). With B-splines, you can adjust the settings as you watch the curve 
update, then accept the curve when it has the correct shape.

   Placing a Curve
   Point curves
   B-splines
   Catmull-Rom curves
   Composite curves
   Creating any conceivable curve
   Placing a Pre-defined Curve
   Defining a Curve's Formula


Placing a Curve
---------------

1. From the Main palette, tear off and float the Curves sub-palette.
2. In the Curves sub-palette, select the Place Curve tool.
3. From the sub-palette's Type option menu, choose one of the types of 
curves.
   For information about the different curves that you can place, see 
*XRef(below).
4. From the By option menu, choose one of the methods of placement:
   -- Choose Points to place the curve dynamically by entering data points.
   -- Choose Line String to construct the curve using the vertices of a 
line string or shape.
   -- Choose Stream to place the curve dynamically by dragging the pointer 
along the path of the curve.
5. (For B-splines only) From the sub-palette's Periodicity option menu, 
choose Open or Closed.
6. (For B-splines only) In the sub-palette's Order field, key in the order. 

   For information about the effect of the order, see *XRef(below).
7. (For some B-splines only) In the sub-palette's Poles field, key in the 
number of the poles in the B-spline's control polygon.
   For information about the effect of the number of poles, see 
*XRef(below).
8. Enter data points along the curve, identify the line string, or drag the 
pointer along the curve (depending upon your choice in the By option menu).
   


Point curves
------------

Point curves are curves based on a relatively simple mathematical formula 
that places the curve (most commonly) through data points or the vertices 
of a line string. There are no settings to vary the shape of the curve: A 
point curve's shape is based strictly upon the data points or line string 
on which it is based.

If you place a point curve by points (choose Points from the By option menu 
in the Curves sub-palette), the point curve is dynamically displayed as you 
enter data points on the design plane. Of course, you can place active 
points or other elements to snap to as you place the point curve, and you 
can enter the data points by precision input.

Alternatively, you can place a line string in the design file to base the 
point curve on. If you choose Line String from the By option menu in the 
Curves sub-palette, you are prompted to identify the line string. When you 
do, MicroStation places the point curve through the vertices of the line 
string, just as though you had entered a data point at each vertex.*



B-splines
---------

A B-spline is more complex, mathematically, than a point curve. Just as the 
shape of a point curve can determined by the vertices of a line string, the 
shape of a B-spline curve is determined by the number and location of its 
poles, which are represented as vertices of the curve's control polygon. 
You can turn the display of a B-spline curve's control polygon off and on.

>> To toggle display of the a B-spline's control polygon:

1. Waiting on interface.
   or
   Key in CHANGE BSPLINE POLYGON.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Identify element."
2. Identify the B-spline whose control polygon is to be turned on or off.
   
Make sure to have note about ACTIVE BSPLINE PERIODIC key-in.

The shape of a B-spline curve is also determined by its order, which, in 
practical terms, defines the curve's distance from the poles. The greater 
the order, the further the curve lies from the vertices of its control 
polygon. The limit to the order of a curve is the number of its poles: You 
cannot place a B-spline curve with a greater order than the number of its 
poles.

Generally, the more poles in the control polygon, the better the curve will 
fit a regular shape. In the following illustration, the line string on 
which the B-splines were based is shown as a solid line. The control 
polygons are displayed, as they are in MicroStation, as dashed lines.

The higher the order of a B-spline curve, the farther from the vertices of 
the control polygon the curve can pass. A higher-order curve is "freer" 
than a low-order curve.

There are several different ways that you can place a B-spline in a design. 
As with point curves, you can have MicroStation define the curve based on 
data points or the vertices of a line string. Unlike point curves, the data 
points or vertices can be treated in several ways.

When you choose B-spline (poles) from the Type option menu in the Curves 
sub-palette, the poles of the B-spline's control polygon are placed on the 
data points or line string vertices. When you choose B-spline (points), 
poles of the B-spline's control polygon are placed so that the curve passes 
through the data points or vertices. The third type, B-spline (fit), is the 
same as B-spline (points) is the same, except that you can adjust the 
number of poles in the control polygon. If you set the number of poles 
lower than the number of points or vertices, MicroStation fits the curve to 
the points or vertices using the least squares method.

Type option menuData points or vertices 
setting:        treated as:

B-spline (poles)Poles of control polygon.

B-spline (pointsPoints on the curve.

B-spline (fit)  Number of poles in control 
                polygon is variable.



These illustrations show the different types of B-spline curves placed on 
the same line string.




Catmull-Rom curves
------------------

Point curves, B-splines (points), and Catmull-Rom curves pass directly 
through the data points or line string vertices on which they are based. 
The point curve tends to be flat between the first and second data points 
as well as between the next-to-last and last data points. With very 
irregular shapes, the B-spline (points) curve can develop unwanted loops 
between data points or vertices.

The Catmull-Rom avoids both these problems, which usually yields a more 
desirable result. The Catmull-Rom curve is popular with aircraft and ship 
hull designers.


Composite curves
----------------

The Place Composite CurveBezier curve. 

A Bezier curve is simply a B-spline curve that has the same number of poles 
as its order. Thus, a fourth order B-spline with four poles is a fourth 
order Bezier curve. These are very popular as they allow control of a 
curve's starting and ending position as well as the tangents at those 
positions.

The handles that appear when placing a Bezier curve with the Place 
Composite Curve tool control the tangents at the ends of the Bezier curve 
segment. The line defined by the first and second poles is the initial 
tangent direction, and the line defined by the third and fourth poles is 
the final tangent direction. The length of the handles controls the size of 
the tangent at each end. (A tangent is a vector so it has direction and 
magnitude.)

   Tolerance


Tolerance
---------

TBD



Creating any conceivable curve
------------------------------

The Calculate Curve tool lets you create any conceivable planar curve, 
based on a mathematical formula.
*  A pre-defined curve can be selected from a library and placed in the 
design.
*  New curves can be defined and added to the supplied libraries. This is 
similar to programming a programmable calculator.
   


Placing a Pre-defined Curve
---------------------------

1. In the Curves sub-palette, select the Calculate Curve tool.
   The Curve Calculator settings box opens.
2. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator settings box, choose Open.
   The ??? dialog box opens.
3. Select a curve library file and click the OK button.
4. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator settings box, choose Open 
Curve.
   The Open Curve dialog box opens.
5. Select a curve in the list box and click the OK button.
   The defining equations are listed in the Curve Calculator settings box.
6. (Optional) Edit values in the equation that defines the curve. See *Xref 
for detailed information.
7. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator settings box, choose Place 
Parametric Curve (*Xref).
8. Enter a data point to define the curve's origin.
   The curve is defined relative to the coordinate system of the view in 
which this data point is entered.
   
   To edit values in the equation that defines a curve:


To edit values in the equation that defines a curve
---------------------------------------------------

1. In the Curve Calculator settings box, select a row in the list box.
   or
   Key in the variable's name in its text item.
   The variable and value appear in the text items below the list box.
2. Key in a new value.
   
Note:
Equations that are dimmed in the list box are locked. Modifying them can 
corrupt the curve's formula and should only be done if you understand how 
the curve is defined and wish to modify its underlying definition. See 
Defining a Curve's Formula.



Defining a Curve's Formula
--------------------------

1. In the Curves sub-palette, select the Calculate Curve tool.
   The Curve Calculator settings box opens.
2. In the Curve field, key in the curve's name.
3. Define the equations. See To define an equation: for details.
4. Lock the equations that, if modified, would corrupt the definition. See 
To lock an equation: for details.
5. (Optional) Place a curve to test the equation.
6. Save the equation.
   
Note:
Some mathematical knowledge is needed to define a new curve. A curve is 
defined by the parametric equations for the x, y, and z coordinates of the 
curve. These formulas give the value of the particular coordinate as a 
parameter "t" that is between zero and one (0.0  t  1.0). This is the 
standard parametric form of a curve described in mathematical text books.

Note:
Variable names are limited to 8 characters and the right side of the 
equation is limited to 40 characters. There is also a limit of 25 formulas 
to define a curve.

   To define an equation:
   To lock an equation:
   Examples
   Dimensionality
   Function format
   Deriving a curve from an existing curve


To define an equation
---------------------

1. TBD
Note:
If an equation cannot be evaluated, its value is set to zero. Be careful 
about typographical errors in the formulas.



To lock an equation
-------------------

1. In the Curve Calculator settings box, select the equation in the list 
box and key-in FORMULA LOCK.
   or
   Key in FORMULA LOCK [number].
   number is the equation's number (the count starts at zero).
   The locked equation is greyed-out in the list box and cannot be 
modified. 
   
Note:
To unlock an equation, key in FORMULA UNLOCK [number].



Examples
--------

A sinusoid with an amplitude of 5 and wave length of 10 can be defined with 
the following equations

Formula:        Syntax:

x(t) = 10u(t)   x = 10*u 

y(t) = 5sin(u(t)y(t) = 5*sin(u) 

u(t) = 2pit     u(t) = 2*pi*t 


The third equation is necessary since "t" must be between zero and one and 
we want an entire period of the sine wave, from 0-2pi. 

Auxiliary functions such as this can be defined. By using two auxiliary 
variable-value equations for the amplitude and wave length a more flexible 
definition results.
x = wl*u y = amp*sin(u) u = 2*pi*t amp = 5 wl = 10

This definition could be used to place sine waves of any amplitude and wave 
length by modifying the last two equations. It is clear, however, that the 
first three equations should not be modified, since doing that would 
corrupt the sine wave's definition. To prevent this you can lock the first 
three formulas. These equations would then be dimmed in the list box and 
the end-user would not be able to harm them. The status of an equation, 
locked or unlocked, is saved with the equation in the library file; it is 
set using the Formula Lock/Unlock tool described below.



Dimensionality
--------------

Curves can be defined in 2 or 3 dimensions; if no z formula is present the 
z value defaults to 0, thereby creating a planar curve ("curve3d.rsc" 
examples of 3D curves).



Function format
---------------

The formulas defining the x, y, and z coordinates of the curve can use 
trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithmic, exponential, or power functions. 

The format for such functions is as follows:

Function:  Returns:

sin (value)sine of value[a]

cos (value cosine of valuea
\) 

tan (value)tangent of valuea

asin (valuearc sine of valuea

acos (valuearc cosine of valuea

atan (valuearc tangent of valuea

atan2 (y, xarctan(y)/xa

sinh (valuehyperbolic sine of value

cosh (valuehyperbolic cosine of value

tanh (valuehyperbolic tangent of value

asinh      inverse hyperbolic sine of value
(value) 

exp (value)evalue 

ldexp (x,p)2xp 

log (value)natural log of value

log10      natural log of value
(value) 

ldexp (x, yxy 

sqrt (valuesquare root of value

[a]Depends on global angle units setting 
   
Note:
Calculate Curve also understands standard C operators.



Deriving a curve from an existing curve
---------------------------------------

A curve can be defined from a set of formulas alone or can be derived from 
formulas and an existing curve (the root curve). If a curve is derived (see 
Active Mode (*Xref)) then these values can be referenced in the equations. 

These values are derived from the Frenet frame of the root curve and are 
updated depending on the value of "t," the curve parameter. All these 
values begin with an underscore.

Value:  Description

_rx     x coordinate of root curve's position

_ry     y coordinate of root curve's position

_rz     z coordinate of root curve's position

_tx     x coordinate of root curve's tangent

_ty     y coordinate of root curve's tangent

_tz     z coordinate of root curve's tangent

_mx     x coordinate of root curve's normal

_my     y coordinate of root curve's normal

_mz     z coordinate of root curve 's normal

_bx     x coordinate of root curve's binormal

_by     y coordinate of root curve's binormal

_bz     z coordinate of root curve's binormal

_kappa  curvature of root curve

_tau    torsion of root curve



The following constants can be referenced in equations:

Value   Description

pi      pi

e       e





Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
----------------------------------

You can define new x and y axes in your design plane and save them as an 
auxiliary coordinate system. You can save several auxiliary coordinate 
systems and quickly choose any of them and the original coordinate system. 

Hint:
Auxiliary coordinate systems are particularly helpful in 3D files, where 
they facilitate placing elements on planes at different depths and 
orientations. See *XRef 3D.)

   To define and save an auxiliary coordinate system by data points:


To define and save an auxiliary coordinate system by data points
----------------------------------------------------------------

1. (Optional) From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. (Optional) In the View Attributes settings box, turn on ACS Triad and 
click the All button.
   When an auxiliary coordinate system is defined, two arrows indicating 
the positive x and y axes and their origin is displayed. (This symbol is 
called a "triad" because it consists of three arrows in 3D designs.)
3. From the Settings menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.
   The Auxiliary Coordinates settings box opens.
4. From the Auxiliary Coordinates settings box's Tools menu, choose Define 
By Points.
   The Define By Points sub-menu opens.
5. From the Define By Points sub-menu, choose Rectangular.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter first point @ x axis origin."
6. Enter a data point to define the origin of the auxiliary coordinate 
system.
   The coordinates of the point identified will be 0,0 in the auxiliary 
coordinate system. The prompt in the Command Window is "Enter second point 
on x axis."
7. Enter a data point to define a point on the positive x axis.
   The "ACS triad" is displayed.
8. In the Auxiliary Coordinates settings box's Name field, key in a name of 
up to 7 characters to identify the auxiliary coordinate system.
9. (Optional) In the Auxiliary Coordinates settings box's Description 
field, key in a description of up to 28 characters to help identify the 
auxiliary coordinate system.
10.Click the Save button.
   The new auxiliary coordinate system is displayed in the Auxiliary 
Coordinates settings box's list box.
   
Hint:
Once an auxiliary coordinate system is in place, special key-ins let (such 
as AX= and AD=) you perform precision input with respect to the auxiliary 
coordinate systems. See *XRef. You can still perform precision input with 
respect to the original coordinate system by using the "normal" key-ins, 
such as XY=, DL=, and so on. See *XRef.



Digitizing
----------

MicroStation requires that you use a digitizing tablet or table to perform 
digitizing. Digitizing is the process of electronically reproducing the 
features of an existing hard copy drawing or map into a MicroStation 
design. A large tablet or table is recommended. 

Accurate digitizing requires careful planning and setup of the relationship 
between the hard copy, mounted on the tablet or table, and the design 
plane, represented on the screen. 
For more details about setting up to use a digitizing tablet, see 
Digitizing Tablets.

   General Procedure For setting Up to Digitize


General Procedure For setting Up to Digitize
--------------------------------------------

1. Create a design file.
2. Set up appropriate working units.
3. Set up appropriate views. It is recommended that you set up one of the 
views to encompass the entire drawing.
4. Partition the digitizing tablet surface. For details on how to do this, 
see "To partition the tablet:" on page 3-50. Partitioning divides the 
surface of the digitizing tablet into two areas or partitions. One area, 
the screen partition, continues to provide standard tablet-to-screen 
mapping. Within the screen partition, moving the tablet cursor results in a 
corresponding movement of the screen pointer, regardless of what is 
displayed on the screen. The other area is the digitizing partition. Within 
the digitizing partition, movement of the tablet cursor results in a 
corresponding movement of the screen pointer only within the part of the 
design plane to which you are mapping features of the hard copy.
   
The area selected in the following steps is the screen partition. If the 
tablet surface is not partitioned, MicroStation defaults the screen 
partition to an 18 x 12 inch area (or smaller on a smaller tablet) in the 
lower left corner of the tablet surface. 

>> To partition the tablet:

1. From the Settings menu, choose Digitizing to open the Digitizing 
settings box.
2. From the Tablet menu in the Digitizing settings box, choose Partition.
3. Identify the lower left corner of the screen partition by placing the 
tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.
4. Identify the upper right corner of the screen partition by placing the 
tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.
5. Mount the hard copy to be digitized on the tablet surface. (Tape works 
well for mounting.) Locate the features you will be mapping to the design 
file over the digitizing partition, not over the screen partition.
6. Place monument points that associate known points (of your choosing) on 
the hard copy with points in the design plane. Two monument points must be 
placed. Placing more than two will let MicroStation compensate for 
less-than-perfect alignment of the hard copy on the tablet surface. To 
place monument points:
   - (Optional) Place point elements (zero length lines) for reference with 
line weights of at least 3 using the Place Active Point tool.
   - From the Settings menu, choose Digitizing to open the Digitizing 
settings box.
   - From the Tablet menu in the Digitizing settings box, choose Setup.
   - Choose a monument point on the hard copy, position the tablet cursor 
over it, and enter a data point. Ignore the location of the screen pointer, 
which only lets you know that the tablet cursor is over an active area of 
the tablet.
   - Move the tablet cursor into the screen partition and enter a data 
point in the design that corresponds to the monument point you selected in 
the previous step. Snapping to a point element, if one was placed for 
reference, or precision input is recommended.
   - Repeat the two previous steps for each additional monument point. 
   - After placing all monument points, Reset.
   - To confirm accurate placement of the monument points, move the cursor 
around the hard copy. If the monument points are correctly defined, the 
pointer displays in the design at points corresponding to the monument 
points.
7. From the File menu, choose Save Settings to save the working units, view 
configuration, and the relationships specified by monument points, 
digitizer partitioning and setup.
8. Use any MicroStation drawing tool(s) to trace the hard copy image. 
   The Place Stream Line String tool in the Lines sub-palette and Place 
Stream Curve (*Xref) in the Curves sub-palette are particularly useful. 
With these tools, it is not necessary to press the Data button to enter 
individual data points since MicroStation samples the movement of the 
tablet cursor and automatically records data points based on Stream 
Settings.
   
The following sections discuss some of these steps in more detail.

   Setting working units
   Digitizer partitioning and the screen pointer
   Placing monument points
   Panning while digitizing


Setting working units
---------------------

Set working units that are appropriate for the image being digitized while 
ensuring that the design plane working area is greater than the actual size 
of the image.

For example, suppose you are digitizing a map of Alabama for use in the 
United States. English units (miles, feet, etc.) are commonly used in the 
United States, so you might set master units to miles (MI), sub-units to 
feet (FT), with 1,200 positional units per foot. This yields a working 
resolution of 1/100 of an inch and a working area of 677 miles square. 
Alabama is 330 miles long and 200 miles wide, so the working area is 
greater than the image to be digitized. If increased resolution is 
desirable, there is working area to spare.



Digitizer partitioning and the screen pointer
---------------------------------------------

After you partition the tablet surface, you will notice a change in the 
behavior of the screen pointer, depending on whether it is in the screen or 
digitizing partition. When in the screen partition, the pointer moves on 
the screen in direct proportion to the movement of the tablet cursor. If 
you have two screens, the screen partition corresponds to the rectangular 
area encompassing both screens.

When the tablet cursor is in the digitizing partition, the tablet cursor 
position determines the position of the pointer in the design plane. 
MicroStation places the pointer in the first open view where the design 
plane position is visible. The open views are checked in sequence starting 
with the lowest numbered view. If the design plane position is not visible 
in any views, the pointer is not displayed. Nevertheless, even when you 
cannot see the pointer, you can continue to enter data points and place 
graphic elements into the design.

The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition. If data 
points are entered in the screen partition, their position in the design 
plane reflects their position on the screen. Therefore, make sure not to 
stray into the screen partition while digitizing.



Placing monument points
-----------------------

Monument points are used to define the mapping of coordinates on the 
digitizing tablet to coordinates in the design plane. Thus, monument points 
are defined on both the digitizing tablet surface and in the design plane. 
A minimum of two monument points must be defined; more are recommended for 
increased accuracy. When only two monument points are defined, MicroStation 
assumes that the hard copy is perfectly aligned on the tablet surface. If 
more than two points are defined, MicroStation can compensate for 
misalignment.

A monument point can be any point at which the coordinates on the hard copy 
being digitized are known. It is advisable to define several widely spaced 
monument points. Monument points can be placed in the design plane as point 
elements using precision input, for subsequent reference.

Referring back to the Alabama map example, suppose there is an intersection 
between two major highways 2.5 miles east and 7 miles plus 300 feet north 
of the global origin. 
>> To place a monument point at that intersection:

1. Select the Place Active Point tool.
2. Enter a data point as precision input in absolute coordinates 
(XY=2.5,7:300).
   To make monument points visible, place them with a line weight of at 
least 3. 
   
Placing monument points as point elements is really a matter of 
convenience, since monument points are specified as part of digitizer 
setup. However, it is usually easier to place monument points in the design 
plane first, and then snap tentative points to them during setup and actual 
digitizing.



Panning while digitizing
------------------------

As hard copy is digitized, the design in the view normally remains static 
and the screen pointer moves as the tablet cursor is moved. You may find it 
more convenient to let the screen pointer remain stationary in the center 
of a view and have the view pan as the tablet cursor is moved.

To automatically pan this way while digitizing, key in SET AUTOPAN [ON]. 
The view in which the screen pointer is located when this key-in is entered 
becomes the anchor view, the view that is panned as digitizing progresses. 
The center of the view becomes the anchor point, the location in which the 
screen pointer is locked or anchored.

When automatic panning is on and the tablet cursor is in the screen 
partition of the digitizing tablet, the design will pan unless the pointer 
is in the center of the view. The effect is exactly as if you began panning 
at the center of the view, and is much less useful than the panning that 
occurs in the digitizing partition. Therefore, you may want to turn 
automatic panning off (SET AUTOPAN OFF) when the tablet cursor is in the 
screen partition. To facilitate toggling of automatic panning (SET AUTOPAN 
TOGGLE), create and attach a cursor button menu with a button assigned to 
toggle automatic panning. See "Menus" in the Customization Guide for more 
information.

For information on dynamic panning see Introducing MicroStation.



3D Design and Modeling
----------------------

MicroStation's 3D tools let you work on a single 3D model, rather than 
separate 2D drawings, of a design. 
*  When the 3D model is complete, drawings such as plans, elevations, 
sections, and details are generated from the single model. Any required 
modifications are made to the 3D model just once, and the drawings 
regenerated. For more information, see "Generating Drawings from 3D Models" 
on page 8-1.
*  As an added benefit, you can use MicroStation's tools for Rendering and 
Visualizing 3D Models to produce realistic color images of your design. 
This is often more cost-effective than traditional mock-ups and artist's 
drawings, especially when there are frequent revisions or tight deadlines. 
Animated sequences provide a way to present a design that was not available 
before CAD.
   
Note:
Before working in 3D, you should understand the following:

*  Fundamentals
*  Basic 2D Design and Drafting
   
   Basic 3D Concepts
   Introduction to 3D Design
   Getting started in 3D
   Setting the Active Depth and the Display Depth
   Viewing a 3D design
   Basic element placement and manipulation in 3D:
   Referencing a 2D file from a 3D design:
   Using 3D views
   Fences and cells in 3D
   Basic Manipulations in 3D
   Creating a simple B-spline surface
   Surfaces of revolution and spheres
   Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
   (or exercises) more of creating a 3D model
   Drawing composition
   Viewing a 3D Design
   Positioning Points Away From the Active Depth
   3D Elements
   Manipulating and Modifying Elements in 3D
   Using Cells, Groups, and Graphic Groups in 3D
   Labeling Designs in 3D


Basic 3D Concepts
-----------------

This section introduces the basic concepts of 3D design you should 
understand before beginning the lesson Introduction to 3D Design.

   Design cube
   View volume
   Active Depth
   Standard views
   View coordinates
   Precision input in 3D
   Element placement
   3D element manipulation, fences, and cells


Design cube
-----------

The design cube represents a 3D design file's total volume. Points in 3D 
design files are defined with x, y, and z values, or coordinates. 3D design 
files consist of a design cube in which you work. Points can be placed 
anywhere within the design cube, and are not restricted to a single plane. 

Design cube coordinates are expressed in the form (x,y,z).

A 3D design file contains 4,294,967,296 positional units (UORs) in the x, 
y, and z directions, analogous to the 2D Design plane.

The global origin in the 3D seed files provided with MicroStation is 
located at the exact center of the design cube and assigned the coordinates 
(0,0,0). Any point in front of the global origin has a positive z-value and 
any point behind it has a negative z-value.



View volume
-----------

The view volume (sometimes called the display volume) is the volume 
displayed in a 3D view. In most cases, only a part of the Design cube is 
displayed in a view.

Any elements, or parts of elements, not contained in the view volume are 
not displayed in the view.

The view volume is bounded by the window area, and its Display Depth

   Display Depth
   Changing the view volume


Display Depth
-------------

The distance from the front to the back of a 3D view is its Display Depth, 
which is bounded by clipping planes.
*  The front clipping plane is the one nearest the viewer.
*  The back clipping plane is furthest from the viewer. 
   
Elements that are in front of the front clipping plane, or behind the back 
clipping plane, are not displayed in the view, even if they are within its 
viewing area.

These view controls are used to show and set Display Depth.

To:                      Use:

Show a view's Display DepShow Display Depth 

Set the Display Depth    Set Display Depth 
graphically.

Key in the Display Depth Key in SET DDEPTH 
view.                    ABSOLUTE or DP= (see 
                         To key in a view's Display Depth:)

Move a view's front and bKey in SET DDEPTH 
clipping planes.         RELATIVE or DD= (see 
                         To key in the distance to move the Display Depth:)





Changing the view volume
------------------------

You can use the View menu or view controls to adjust the view volume.

To change:               Use:

Viewing area of a 3D viewZoom In Zoom 
                         Out[a]Window Area 

Display depth            Set Display Depth

[a]Elements that are not within the view's Display Depth do not display, no 
matter how far you zoom out.
   
Note:
Using the Fit View control (*Xref) to fit a 3D view changes both the window 
area and Display Depth to display all elements.

Note:
Display of the view volume in the other views is apparent only when they 
display the same volume of the design cube as the selected view. You can 
use the ALIGN VIEW (*Xref) key-in to ensure that views are displaying 
similar volumes of the design cube.



Active Depth
------------

The Active Depth is the plane, parallel to the screen in a view, on which 
data points are entered by default. 

The Active Depth is perpendicular to, and is measured along, the view's 
z-axis. This is why it is sometimes referred to as the "active z-depth." It 
is parallel to the screen, no matter what view you are working in.

The grid is on this plane as well. 

For example, suppose you are designing the interior of a multi-story 
building. You can complete the details in one floor at a time in the top 
view by changing the Display Depth and active depth for the view after 
drawing the elements on each successive floor.

Note:
A view's Active Depth is always within its Display Depth.

Hint:
Even though Active Depth is very powerful concept, MicroStation also lets 
you position points away from the Active Depth. For more infornation, see 
Positioning Points Away From the Active Depth.



Standard views
--------------




   2D
   Standard views
   3D orthogonal views
   Isometric view


2D
--

In 2D, the design plane is parallel to the screen, so you view the design 
from above. The default (unrotated view) in 2D is a Top view with its 
orientation such that
*  The x-axis is positive from left to right (horizontally).
*  The y-axis is vertical, and positive from bottom to top (vertically). 
   
In a 2D design, you rotate view about an imaginary z axis, which is 
perpendicular to the screen. No matter how you rotate a view in 2D, you 
still view it from above. 



Standard views
--------------

If a view is rotated to a standard orientation, the orientation is 
displayed with the view number in the view's title bar.



3D orthogonal views
-------------------

In 3D, since you can rotate views about three axes, rather than just one, 
there are six orthogonal orientations, each of which corresponds to a 
standard view: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back.

   Top view
   Front view
   Right view


Top view
--------

A Top view displays the design from the top
*  the xy plane is parallel to your screen (as in a 2D file).
*  x is positive from left to right (horizontally).
*  y is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
*  z is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
   


Front view
----------

A Front view displays the design from the front
*  the xz plane is parallel to your screen.
*  x is positive from left to right (horizontally).
*  z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
*  y is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.
   


Right view
----------

In a Right view, you view the design cube from the right, such that
   the yz plane is parallel to your screen.
   y is positive from left to right (horizontally).
   z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
   x is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
   


Isometric view
--------------

There is one other standard view -- isometric (abbreviated "iso"), which is 
rotated so that the top, left, and front faces of a cube drawn orthogonal 
to the design cube axes are equally inclined from the screen surface.



View coordinates
----------------

When a view is rotated, the design file's axes are rotated with it. While 
you can work with the design file axes, this is not always convenient. To 
simplify elements placement, you can use the view axes. 

A view's axes are relative to the view (or, if you like, your screen) and 
the following always applies:
*  The x-axis is horizontal and positive from left to right.
*  The y-axis is vertical and positive from bottom to top.
*  The z-axis is perpendicular to the view (screen), and positive toward 
you.
   
Note:
Only in a Top view are the axes systems for the design cube and the view 
aligned exactly.



Precision input in 3D
---------------------

While all elements are located at design file coordinates, you can use 
either design file or view coordinates to place elements
*  The key-ins XY=x coordinate,y coordinate,z coordinate, and DL=x 
distance,y distance,z distance always refer to the design file axes.
*  The key-ins DX= x distance,y distance,z distance, and DI=distance, angle 
always refer to the view axes.
   


Element placement
-----------------

Placing elements in a 2D design is like manual drafting -- all elements 
appear on the same plane, the sheet of paper. 

In 3D, you place elements in space -- horizontally (like floors), 
vertically (like walls), or at any other angle or direction. 

Many elements are planar, and rely on the orientation of the view for exact 
placement. To place elements such as blocks, circles (by center), polygons, 
and text, you first rotate a view so that the plane of the view (your 
screen) is parallel to the required orientation. 



3D element manipulation, fences, and cells
------------------------------------------

Element manipulations such as scaling and rotation always are executed 
relative to the views axes. This includes operations on multiple elements 
(selection set or fence contents). 

In 3D design, fences enclose a volume that is bounded by the area of the 
fence, and the Display Depth of the view. 

This is important to remember, in particular, when creating cells in 3D. 
While the fence may be placed to just enclose the object, the Display Depth 
may be very large. It too should be reduced to just enclose the object 
being made into a cell.

When placing cells in 3D, the cell retains the orientation in which it was 
created. If a cell is created in a Top view, no matter in which view it is 
placed, it will be placed as though the view is a Top view. Normally, cells 
should be created in an orthogonal view to simplify future placement.



Introduction to 3D Design
-------------------------

   Preview


Preview
-------

In this lesson, you will work in the 3D world of MicroStation. You will 
learn how to move around in the design cube, and how to begin creating 3D 
models. During the lesson you will learn the following
*  Getting started in 3D.
*  Setting the Active Depth and the Display Depth.
*  Viewing a 3D design.
*  Basic element placement and manipulation in 3D:.
*  Referencing a 2D file from a 3D design:.
*  Using 3D views.
*  Fences and cells in 3D
*  Basic Manipulations in 3D
*  Creating a simple B-spline surface
*  Surfaces of revolution and spheres
*  Drawing composition
   
Hint:
It is recommended that you keep the Tool Settings window open (choose Tool 
Settings from the Settings menu) so there is no need to "tear off" 
sub-palettes to change Tool settings.



Getting started in 3D
---------------------

In this exercise you will create a 3D design and place some elements in 
standard 3D views. You will discover why these elements look different in 
the various views.

>> Create a new 3D design file:

1. Start MicroStation.
   The MicroStation Manager dialog box opens.
2. From the Utilities menu's Create sub-menu, choose 3D Design File.
   The Create Design File dialog box opens.
3. Click the Seed button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box opens.
4. From the seed files list, select "sdmeng3d.dgn".
   The "3d" in the filename indicates that it is a 3D file.
5. Click the OK button.
6. Enter the filename "3dless1" in the filename field.
   The Create Design File dialog box closes, and the design file is opened, 
displaying a model of a cube. All 3D seed files, shipped with MicroStation, 
contain this model.
   
7. Fit view 1 (the Top view).
8. In view 1, place a fence around the elements.
9. Using the Delete Fence Contents tool, delete the cube.
   
>> Place an active point at the global origin:

1. From the Element menu's Weight sub-menu, choose Line Weight 10.
   This will make the Active Point easy to see.
2. From the Main palette, select the Place Active Point tool.
   In the Tool Settings window (or the pop-down field from the Points 
sub-palette), make sure that the Point Type is Element.
3. Key in XY=0,0,0.
   The Active Point is placed at the global origin of the file.
4. Fit each view (see Using view controls).
   
>> Place the word "Top" in the Top view.

1. From the Element menu, choose Text.
   The Text settings box opens.
2. Set the text Height and Width to 100.
3. Set the Text String Justification to Left Bottom.
4. Set the Active Color to yellow
5. Set the Active Line Weight to 0.
6. From the Main palette, select the Place Text tool.
   Make sure that the text Type is By Origin. If you tear off the Text 
sub-palette, or have the Tool Settings window open, you can check this in 
the pop-down menu.
7. In the Top view, place the word "Top" at the active point. Preview 
placement with a tentative point (in the Top view). 
8. From the View menu's Fit sub-menu, choose All.
   Each view is fitted to show the text. 
   
   Examining the word "Top" in the design


Examining the word "Top" in the design
--------------------------------------

The text that was placed in the previous procedure is aligned with the xy 
plane of the Design cube because it was placed in a Top view, which has its 
xy plane parallel to the view, or screen.
*  In the Top view (where it was placed), the text looks normal.
*  In the Front view, the text appears to be a "line." In a Top view you 
look along the xy plane, in the y-direction. 
   Imagine a sheet of transparent paper, with text on it. If you looked at 
this sheet of paper, along its plane from the bottom edge, text would 
appear as lines.
*  In the Right view, the three letters are one behind the other and again 
appear as a "line." You are again looking along the xy plane, but this time 
in the x-direction.
*  In the Isometric view, the text is skewed but is legible. In an 
Isometric view, none of the planes of the other Standard views is parallel 
to the screen.
   
>> Place the word "Front" in the Front view.

1. Change the Active Color to red.
2. In the Front view, place the word "Front" at the active point. Preview 
placement with a tentative point (in the Front view).
3. Fit each view.
   The word Front appears as five dashes in the Top view and a single 
vertical dash in the Right view. It appears normally in the Front view in 
which it was placed. 
   
>> Place the word "Right" in the Right view.

1. Change the Active Color to blue.
2. In the Right view, place the word "Right" at the active point. Preview 
placement with a tentative point (in the Right view).
3. Fit each view.
   Your screen should resemble the figure. All views display the same words 
but from different directions. 
   
Because text is two-dimensional, it appears as dashes when viewed edge-on. 
The four views are set up with different viewing directions, looking at the 
same elements in the design. You can simultaneously see the three words 
from different directions. Words that aren't seen clearly from one 
direction, are clearly visible when viewed from another location. In the 
Isometric view all three words are both visible, and legible.

Be sure that you understand the above. It is important to understand what 
is being displayed on your screen, and why.

>> Place another active point at 1000, 1000, 1000: 

1. Delete the text from the previous part of the exercise.
2. Make the Active Line Weight 10.
3. From the Main palette, select the Place Active Point tool.
   As before, make sure the Point Type is Element. 
4. Key in XY=1000,1000,1000.
   This point is the diagonally opposite vertex of an imaginary cube whose 
origin is at the global origin. When you fit a view, the View volume 
changes so that all displayable elements are visible. 
5. From the Main palette, select the Fit Active Design tool.
6. In each view, enter a data point.
7. From the File menu, choose Save Settings.
   
In this case, each orthogonal view, when Fitted, displays the same volume 
-- the volume between the two active points. This technique is useful when 
you first start a 3D model. As elements are placed, they appear in each of 
the orthogonal views, saving you having to fit views after placing 
elements. Simply place the active points so that a fit includes the entire 
volume in which you are working.

>> Place some other planar elements in 3D.

1. Set the Active Color to red.
2. Set the Active Line Weight to 0.
3. Select the Place Block tool.
4. In the Top view, enter two data points to place a rectanglar shape (in 
the area between the two active points).
5. Change the Active Color to a different color.
6. Select the Place Circle by Center tool.
7. In the Front view, place a circle.
8. In the Polygons sub-palette, select the Place Polygon tool.
9. In the Right view, place a polygon.
   Elements placed in one view appear as "lines" in the other orthogonal 
views. Planar elements are flat, two-dimensional surfaces, that when viewed 
edge-on, appears as "lines." Their orientation is parallel to the screen, 
in the view in which they were placed. 
10.Use the Delete Element tool to delete all elements except the two active 
points.
   
Note:
Occasionally, you may need to fit the Isometric view to see elements fully. 
The Isometric view is inclined to the screen so parts of the "imaginary" 
cube may not be in its view volume.



Setting the Active Depth and the Display Depth
----------------------------------------------

In this exercise you will place elements at different depths. You will then 
use the Display Depth to view the elements separately.

Use the same design file as for the previous exercise.

>> Set Active Depth graphically:

1. Fit each view.
   The two active points are displayed in each view.
2. From the View Control sub-palette, select the Zoom In tool.
3. In the center of the Top view, enter a data point.
4. From the Palettes menu's 3D sub-menu, choose 3D View Control.
   The 3D View Control palette opens.
5. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Active Depth tool.
6. Enter a data point in the Top view.
   Dynamics in each view display Top view's volume. As you move the 
pointer, a plane that represents the Top view's Active Depth moves with it.
7. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point at the center of the 
view.
   
>> Place elements in the Top view:

1. Set the Active Color to red.
2. Set the Active Line Weight to 0.
3. In the Top view, use the Place Block tool to draw a rectangle.
4. Set the Active Color to green.
5. Place a circle in the Top view (with data points only).
   Both shapes lie in the same plane. In the Front and Right views, they 
line up exactly because they are on the Active Depth plane you defined 
previously.
   
>> Change the Top view's Active Depth and place more elements:

1. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Active Depth tool.
2. Enter a data point in the Top view.
   Dynamics display the Top view's volume. The pointer controls the 
position of the Active Depth.
3. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point below the existing shapes 
to define its new Active Depth.
   The Top view updates and its new Active Depth is displayed in the 
Command Window.
4. Set the Active Color to yellow.
5. In the Top view, the Place Block tool to draw a rectangle and the Place 
Circle by Center tool to draw a circle.
   In the Top view, all of these elements appear to be together. In the 
Front and Right views, however, it is obvious that the yellow elements are 
on a different plane from the others. 
Hint:
When you know the required active depth, use the AZ= key-in to set it. For 
example, to set the active depth to 500, key in AZ=500 and select the view.

The Set Display Depth tool lets you view "slices" of the design in a view. 
You can set the front and back clipping planes to include only those 
elements that you wish to see.

>> Set Display Depth graphically:

1. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Display Depth tool.
2. In the Top view, enter a data point.
   Dynamics in each view display the Top view's volume. The pointer 
controls the location of the view's front clipping plane (the one nearest 
you).
3. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point between the two groups of 
elements to define the front clipping plane.
   The pointer now controls the back clipping plane for the selected view.
4. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point below the lower group of 
(yellow) elements to define the back clipping plane.
   The Top view updates with only the yellow elements (those on the lower 
plane) visible. The red and green elements are in front of the front 
clipping plane, outside the view's display. Therefore, they are not 
displayed.
5. Repeat steps 2-4, this time setting the front clipping plane above the 
red and green elements, and the back clipping plane between the two groups.
   The Top view updates with only the red and green elements visible. In 
this case, the yellow elements are behind the back clipping plane and are 
not displayed.
   
Using the same principles you can change the Active Depth and Display Depth 
in any view. 

Hint:
When you know the range required for Display Depth, you can use the 
alternate key-in DP=. For example, to set the Display Depth between 200 and 
300, key in DP=200,300 and select the view.

Hint:
While any view can be used to set the Active Depth and Display Depth, it is 
most convenient to use an orthogonal view.

Note:
Dynamics associated with the Set Active Depth and Set Display Depth tools 
are affected by the view volume. Whether or not they appear on screen, the 
tools still function normally. If necessary, you can increase a view's 
Display Depth to make the dynamics work better, .



Viewing a 3D design
-------------------

In this exercise, you will learn how to view your 3D design from any 
location, looking in any direction. You will learn how the View Rotation 
settings box, along with the Set Display Depth tool, lets you isolate items 
in your design.

In preparation, start MicroStation and open "vwlesson.dgn", which is 
shipped in MicroStation's "dgn\learning" directory. 

This design file has been saved with views 1 to 4 open, displaying the 
model from the Top, Front, Right, and Isometric View. You are not 
restricted to these, or other, standard views -- the View Rotation settings 
box lets you rotate view to any orientation.

By default, 3D views usually are set to display as wireframe views, in 
which you can "see through" elements, which is useful because it lets you 
see elements that are behind others. 

However, particularly in a complex design, it can be hard to see what you 
want to work on in a wireframe view that displays the entire model. To view 
a limited part of the model, you can use the Set Display Depth tool.

>> Set Display Depth in Top view to isolate the blue tanks:

1. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Display Depth tool.
2. Enter a data point in the Top view.
3. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point above the model.
4. In the Front or Right view, enter a data point just below the floor of 
the upper level, so that the blue tanks are included.
   The Top view updates with the new Display Depth. The blue tanks are 
clearly visible. Elements located below the tanks no longer confuse the 
view.
5. Use the Zoom In view control to zoom in on the tanks.
   
>> Isolate the tanks in the Front view:

1. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Display Depth tool.
2. Enter a data point in the Front view.
3. In the Top view, enter a data point below the blue tanks to sets the 
Front view's front clipping plane.
4. In the Top view, enter a data point above the blue tanks to set the 
Front view's back clipping plane.
   The Front view updates with the new Display Depth. Again, the blue tanks 
now are clearly visible.
5. Use the Zoom In view control to zoom in on the tanks.
   
Note:
The Zoom In, Zoom Out, and Window Area view controls do not change the 
Display Depth. The Set Display Depth, and Fit View view controls do change 
the Display Depth. As well as working with standard views, you can set the 
Display Depth in rotated (non-standard) views.

>> Rotate the front view 45o about the y-axis:

1. From the View menu, choose Rotation.
   The View Rotation settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose 3.
   The cube graphic in the settings box updates to reflect the current 
orientation of the selected view and Front appears in the Std. option menu.
3. In the Step field, enter 45.
4. From the Axis option menu, choose View.
5. Click on the plus (+) arrow for the y-axis.
   The cube graphic updates, showing the new orientation.
6. Click the Apply button.
   View 3 is rotated to the orientation just defined in the View Rotation 
settings box.
7. Fit the rotated view, to reduce its viewing volume to the minimum 
required to display the model.
   
When using the Set Display Depth tool, often the other views do not display 
its dynamics because their view volume does not encompass the volume of the 
view being manipulated. This may not matter when standard views are used. 
When a rotated view is used, however, it is convenient to have the dynamics 
display to simplify setting Display Depth.

>> Prepare the views to set Display Depth in a rotated view:

1. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit the Top and Right views (views 
1 and 4.)
2. Use the Zoom Out control to zoom out (once) in both views.
3. From the 3D View Control palette, select the Set Display Depth tool.
4. Select the Top view.
5. In the Right view, set the front clipping plane well above the model.
6. In the Right view, set the back clipping plane well below the model.
   View 1 updates with the new larger Display Depth. It should now 
completely contain the rotated view's volume.
   
>> Set the Display Depth in the rotated view:

1. From the 3D View Control palette, choose the Set Display Depth tool.
2. Select the rotated view (view 2.)
   The viewing volume of the selected view is indicated, where possible, in 
the other views. 
3. In the Top view, set the front and back clipping planes to include the 
blue tanks.
   On selecting the back clipping plane, view 2 updates to display the 
defined volume.
   
In adiition to the View Rotation settings box and Display Depth tool, you 
can adjust the view Camera (*Xref).



Basic element placement and manipulation in 3D
----------------------------------------------

In this exercise, you will begin to design a simple office building. 

Note:
As you proceed, you will keep in mind requirements for rendering the 
finished model. 

>> Prepare to draw the floor plan:

1. Create a new design called "3dmodela.dgn." Use the seed file 
"sdmapm3d.dgn." (See To create a design file and open it as the active 
design file:.)
   In each view, the default cube design is visible .
2. Set up the screen so that the Top, Iso, Front, and Right views are open. 
(the default seed files are set up with the right screen having this 
configuration).
3. Delete the cube design.
4. Set the Active Level to 3. (See *Xref)
   
>> Using precision input, draw the base floor plan:

1. Set the Active Color to yellow (color 4)
2. Enter a data point in the Top view to make it "active."
3. Select the Place Block tool.
4. To place the first corner, key in XY=0,0,0.
5. To place second corner, key in DX=31,21.
   In a Top view, you can use either DX= or DL= because the screen axes and 
the axes of the model are exactly aligned.
6. Fit each view.
   The block appears in each view. (In the Front and Right view, it appears 
as a single line, because it is being viewed edgewise.)
   
>> Place the interior floor:

1. Select the Copy Element tool.
2. In any view, snap to the yellow block.
   It is highlighted.
3. Key in DL=,,0.15.
   The block is copied 0.15 meters directly above the original. This occurs 
regardless of the view used, because DL= refers to the design file 
coordinates.
4. In the Isometric view, use the Window Area tool to zoom in on one 
corner, so that both blocks are clearly visible.
5. In the Main palette, select the Element Selection tool.
6.  Select the upper block.
7. In the Element menu, press on Color and choose blue.
   The upper block color is changed to blue. This block will be used later, 
in the rendering exercise, to create the carpeted floor.
   
>> Open the 3D palette:

1. From the Palettes menu, choose 3D.
   The 3D palette opens.
   
Brief discussion of 3D palette TBD

>> Create the floor slab:

1. Set the Active Color to yellow.
2. From the 3D palette's Freeform Surfaces sub-palette, select the 
Construct Surface or Solid of Projection tool.
3. From the Type option menu, choose Surface.
4. From the By option menu, choose Draft.
5. Check that Spin Angle, and scales (X and Y) are turned off.
6. In the zoomed in Isometric view, snap to the corner of the lower 
(yellow) block.
   The yellow block highlights.
7. Enter a data point to accept.
8. In the same view, snap to the corresponding corner on the upper block.
9. Enter a data point to accept.
   Surfaces are created between the two blocks.
   
>> Place a corner column:

1. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Place 
Cylinder tool.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Solid.
3. Turn on Orthogonal.
4. Turn on Radius and, in its field, key in 1.0.
5. Turn on Height and, in its field, key in 5.65.
6. From the Axis option menu, choose Drawing Z.
7. In the zoomed in Isometric view enter a data point at the corner of the 
lower (yellow) block (preview with a tentative point). 
8. Key in DL=,,5.65 for the second point (the cylinder's top).
   You may need to zoom out, in the Isometric view, to see the completed 
column.
   
Note:
You can place right cylinders in any view, because the orientation of their 
circular ends is perpendicular to the line joining their centers.

>> Copy this column to the other corners:

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Copy 
Element tool.
2. In the Isometric view, snap to the center of the cylinder's base.
3. Enter a data point to accept.
4. In the Top view, enter data points to copy the cylinder to the other 
three corners of the lower block. Each time, preview with a tentative 
point, and check in the Front or Right views to see that the lower block 
highlights.
5. Fit each view to fully display the model.
   
Note:
An alternate way to copy the column would be to use the Array tool. You 
will learn to use this tool later.

>> Place an intermediate column:

1. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Place Slab 
tool.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Solid.
3. In the Top view, snap tentative points at the bottom left corner of the 
floor until the upper block highlights. You can check this in the Front or 
Right views.
4. Key in DL=10.
5. For the second point, key in DL=1,1.
   These two points define the base of the slab (column).
6. To define the height of the column, key in DL=,,2.6.
   The column is placed.
   
>> Place other intermediate columns:

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the 
Construct Array tool.
2. From the Array option menu, choose Rectangular.
3. If necessary, set the Active Angle to 0.
4. Set the Rows field to 3.
5. Set the Columns to 2.
6. Set both the Row and Column Spacing to 10.
7. Snap to the square column in a Top view.
8. Accept the element with a data point.
   The columns are created in the model.
9. Use the Copy Element tool to copy the center left column 10 meters left 
(DL=-10), and the center right column 10 meters right (DL=10).
   


Referencing a 2D file from a 3D design
--------------------------------------

In this exercise you will reference a 2D file to the 3D model file, and use 
elements from it to create the upper level.

>> Reference the 2D file to the 3D model file:

1. From the Palettes menu, choose Reference Files.
   The Reference Files palette opens
2. From the Reference Files palette, select the Attach Reference File tool.
   The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
3. Select the sample design file "floorpla.dgn" (in MicroStation's 
"dgn\learning" directory).
4. Click the OK button.
   The reference file naming attachment dialog box opens.
5. From the Attachment Mode option menu, choose Coincident.
6. Click the OK button.
   The reference file is attached. By default, 2D reference files are 
attached in the xy plane, at a z-value of zero.
   
>> Move the reference file to the correct z-value:

1. From the Reference Files palette, select the Move Reference File tool.
2. Identify the reference file with a data point.
3. Enter a data point (in any view) to define the point to move from.
4. Key in DL=,,2.9 to specify the distance to move the reference file.
   The reference file moves 2.9 meters vertically, to a z-value of 2.9, 
which is the level of the upper level floor.
   
>> Project the upper level columns from elements in the reference file:

1. From the View menu, choose Levels.
2. Set the Active Level to 4.
3. Turn off all the other levels.
4. From the Main palette's Fence sub-palette, select the Place Fence Shape 
tool.
5. From the Fence Selection option menu, choose Inside.
6. In a Top view, enter data points to place a fence shape around all of 
the square columns. Make sure that the circular columns, and center lines, 
are excluded.
7. Key in FENCE SURFACE.
8. Enter a data point, in any view, to define the origin.
9. Key in DL=,,2.6 to specify the projection distance.
   The columns inside the fence, are projected simultaneously. This can be 
seen clearly in the Front, Right, and Isometric views.
   
>> Create the upper level floor:

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Copy 
tool.
2. Snap to the blue shape in the reference file.
3. Accept with a data point.
4. Key in LV=4.
5. Accept (with a data point) to complete the copy.
6. The element is copied to level 4 of the active file. 
   This will be the carpeted floor for the upper level. You will put the 
slab under this.
7. Similarly, in a Top view, copy the bottom right (red) partition to level 
10. 
   This shape will be used later, to create the partitions.
8. Turn off the display of the reference file.
   
>> Construct the upper level slab:

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Copy 
tool.
2. In the Isometric view, snap to the blue shape (the upper level floor), 
accepting with a data point when it highlights.
3. Key in DL=,,-0.15.
   The shape is copied 150mm below the original element.
4. Change the color of this lower shape to yellow.
   Yellow is the color of the "concrete" parts of the structure.
5. From the 3D palette's Primitives sub-palette, select the Construct 
Surface of Projection tool.
6. From the Type option menu, choose Surface.
7. From the By option menu, choose Draft.
8. Check that Spin Angle, and scales (X and Y) are turned off.
9. Snap to the lower (yellow) block, accepting with a data point when it 
highlights.
10.Key in DL=,,0.15.
   The floor slab is created.
   


Using 3D views
--------------

In this exercise you will use different views to assist in constructing the 
stairway, and handrail.

>> Use a Right view to create the steps for the stairway:

1. In the Levels settings box, set the Active Level to 20.
2. In a Right view, turn off all other levels.
3. From the Main palette's Lines sub-palette, select the Place Line String 
tool.
4. In the Right view, enter a data point.
5. Key in DX=,0.25 
6. Key in DX=0.3 to complete the first step.
7. Reset to complete the line string.
8. Copy the line string just created (9 times) to form the other steps.
   Ensure that each copy is joined to the preceding step by first snapping 
to it with a tentative point.
9. Add the 0.1 high x 0.3 wide step at the top, and the underside of the 
section, as shown. To ensure that the section is planar, snap to an 
existing part of the section when starting a new line string. From the 
start point, use precision input (DX=) to specify other points.
   
>> Make the stairway section a complex shape:

1. From the Main palette's Chain sub-palette, select the Create Complex 
Shape tool.
2. Set the Method to Automatic.
3. Snap to an element in the stairway section.
4. Accept, with a data point, each part of the stairway till the shape is 
closed.
   
>> Project the shape to create the stairway:

1. From the 3D palette's Primitives sub-palette, select the Construct 
Surface of Projection tool.
2. From the Type menu, choose Solid.
3. From the By option menu, choose Draft.
4. Check that the Spin Angle and scales (X and Y) are off.
5. In the Right view, snap to the stairway shape, accepting with a data 
point when it highlights.
6. Key in DX=,,2 to specify the distance to project the shape.
   Using the DX=,,value key-in instructs MicroStation to project the shape 
along the Z axis of the view (perpendicular to your screen).
   
Hint:
When you use DX= to specify distances, it is always relative to the view's 
axes. That is, relative to your screen, x is horizontal (positive left to 
right), y is vertical (positive bottom to top), and z is perpendicular 
(positive toward you).

>> Set up second Isometric view:

1. From the View menu, choose Rotation.
   The View Rotation settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose 1.
3. From the Std. option menu, choose Iso.
4. Click the Apply button.
   View 1 is rotated to an Isometric view.
5. Use the Fit Area view control to fit View 1
6. Use the Window Area view control to window in to the indented part of 
the upper level floor.
   
Hint:
Alternately, to rotate view 1 to Iso, key in VI=ISO and enter a data point 
in view 1.

>> Set Snap Divisor to 2:

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
   The Locks settings box opens.
2. In the Snap group box, set (Snap) Divisor to 2.
   
Hint:
An alternate method is to key in KY=2.

>> Move the stairs to the correct location:

1. With the Active Level set to 20, turn off all other levels in view 2 (an 
Isometric view).
2. Use the Fit Active Design view control to fit view 2.
3. Use the Fit Active Design view control to window in to the top of the 
stairs.
4. From the Main palette's Manipulate Elements sub-palette, select the Move 
Element tool.
5. In view 2, snap to the stairs at the midpoint of the top edge, as shown, 
accepting with a data point when it highlights.
   The stairs are highlighted.
6. In view 1, move the stairs to the center of the indented section, lower 
edge, as shown.
   Check in the Front or Right view to ensure that the lower edge is 
highlighted.
7. Move the stairs to level 4.
8. Delete the stairs shape, on level 20.
   
Note:
Once an object is placed in a 3D design, it retains its orientation unless 
it is rotated. The stairs were created in a Right view. They retained their 
initial orientation, even though another view was used to move them to the 
correct location.

>> Place the shape for the building's roof:

1. Set the Active Level to 6.
2. Click the Maximize button to maximize the Isometric view.
3. Turn off all other levels except level 3.
4. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit the Isometric view.
5. From the Main palette's Polygons sub-palette, select the Place Shape 
tool.
6. In the Isometric view, place a shape with a vertex at the center of the 
top of each of cylindrical corner column.
7. From the View menu, choose Tile to tile the views.
>> Project the shape to complete the roof:

1. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Construct 
Surface of Projection tool.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Solid.
3. Check that the Spin Angle and scales (X and Y) are off.
4. Snap to the rectangular roof shape, just created, accepting with a data 
point when it highlights.
5. Key in DL=,,-0.15.
   The shape is projected to complete the roof.
   
The basic building is complete. Now you will construct the safety rails, 
and stairway handrail. As before, you will manipulate your views to 
simplify the procedures.

>> Set up to construct the safety rails:

1. Set the Active Level to 5, and the Active Color 7.
2. Rotate view 3 to an Isometric view.
   Use the View Rotation settings box, or key in VI=ISO, followed by a data 
point in the view.
3. In view 3, window the indented section of the upper floor.
4. Window area from view 3, into the other views, to display magnified 
sections of view 3, as shown.
   
>> Placing the upper safety rail between the columns:

1. Set the keypoint snap value to 2.
   Do this via the Settings>Locks menu, or key in KY=2.
2. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Place 
Cylinder tool.
3. Turn on Radius and, in its field, key in 0.05.
   This sets the rail radius to 50mm. Use 50mm as the radius for all the 
safety rails, and hand rails.
4. In view 4, place a tentative point at the center of the column base, as 
shown.
5. Key in DL=,,1.0.
   The first point of the handrail, is placed at a height of 1 meter above 
the floor, at the center of the column.
6. In view 2, place a tentative point at the center of the column base, as 
indicated.
7. Key in DL=,,1.
   The handrail is drawn. This can be seen clearly in view 3.
   
>> Construct the lower rail:

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Elements sub-palette, select the Copy 
tool.
2. In any view, snap to the upper hand rail, accepting with a data point 
when it highlights.
3. Key in DL=,,-0.5.
   The handrail is copied 0.5 meters below the original.
   
To draw the 3 uprights for the handrail, you can specify their location 
with precision inputs. Alternately, you can use a simple construction 
technique to locate their bases.

>> Place a construction line:

1. From the Main palette's Lines sub-palette, select the Place Line tool.
2. Check Snap Divisor is still set to 2.
3. Place a line joining the centers of the column bases. Preview the line's 
endpoints with a tentative point.
4. Set the keypoint snap divisor to 4.
   This is in preparation for placing the four uprights.
   
>> Construct the handrail uprights:

1. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Place 
Cylinder tool.
2. Snap to the center of the construction line, accepting with a data 
point.
3. Key in DL=,,1.0.
4. Copy this cylinder to 2 other keypoints, on the construction line, one 
either side of the center. If necessary, zoom in close to the cylinder's 
base to simplify the identification of the base's center.
5. Delete the construction line.
   
>> Place the uprights for the stairway:

1. Still with the Place Cylinder tool, set as for the previous procedure.
2. Snap to the bottom of the lowest step at its front right edge and accept 
with a data point to define the upright's base.
3. Key in DL=,,1.25.
4. Using the Copy tool, copy the cylinder (upright) to the back of the last 
stair riser, on the right hand side.
>> Construct the handrail:

1. Place a 0.05 radius cylinder joining the tops of the two uprights.
2. Copy the handrail 0.5 meters vertically below the original.
   Use DL=,,-0.5 to specify the distance to copy the rail.
   
>> Place the stairway safety rail:

1. Again, using the Create Cylinder tool, snap to the center top of the 
upright, at the top of the stairway, and accept with a data point.
   Zoom in closer, in an Isometric view, if necessary.
2. Key in DL=3.5 to specify the other end of the rail.
3. Copy this rail 0.5 meters below to complete the exercise.
   
This completes the construction of half the safety rails for the upper 
level, and stairway. As part of the next exercise you will use a fence 
operation to complete their construction.



Fences and cells in 3D
----------------------

In the following exercises you will use a fence tool to place the rest of 
the handrail. You will then create partitions, and make cells of them 
before placing them in the design.

>> Create a 3D cell library.

1. Use "seed3d.cel" as the cell seed file
2. Name the cell library "3dmodela.cel."
>> Set up views 1 and 2:

1. Make views 1 and 2 Top views.
   Use the View Rotation settings box, or else key in VI=TOP followed by 
data points in the views.
2. Set the Active Level to 5.
3. Turn off all levels, except 4 and 5, in view 1.
4. Turn off all levels, except 5 in view 2.
   Level 5 contains the handrail already placed.
5. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit views 1 and 2.
   
>> Construct the remaining handrails:

1. Set keypoint snap Divisor to 2.
   Do this via the locks settings box, or else use the key in KY=2.
2. Select the Place Fence Shape tool.
3. In view 2, place a fence shape around the handrail.
4. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the 
Mirror tool.
5. Turn on Keep Original and Use Fence.
6. From the option menu to the right of Use Fence, choose Inside (this sets 
the Fence (Selection) Mode).
7. In view 1, snap to the midpoint of the indented part of the floor, 
accepting with a data point.
   The handrails are mirrored and copied to the left side of the stairway.
   
>> Create the partition module:

1. Set the Active Level to 10, and the Active Color to red.
2. In view 1, turn off all levels other than 10 so that only the shape that 
was copied previously, from the reference file, is displayed.
3. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit view 1
4. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Construct 
Surface of Projection tool.
5. From the Type option menu, choose Solid.
6. Check that Spin Angle, and the scales (X and Y) are off.
7. Snap to the shape in the Top view, accepting with a data point.
8. Key in DL=,,1.6 to construct the partition.
9. Delete the original shape.
   
>> Make a cell of the partition:

1. Attach the 3D cell library "3dmodela.cel," that you created for this 
exercise.
2. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit view 1, which should be a Top 
view with nothing but the partition displayed.
3. Copy view 1 to view 2.
4. Make view 2 an Isometric view, and fit it.
5. In the Top view, place a fence around the partition.
6. From the Main palette's Cells sub-palette, select the Define Cell Origin 
tool.
7. In the Isometric view, to define the cell origin, snap to the inner 
corner point at "floor" level.
8. Enter a data point to accept.
   An "O" appears, depicting the cell origin.
9. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
10.Click the Create button.
   The Create New Cell dialog box opens.
11.In the Name field, key in 90PART.
12.In the Description field, key in Partition.
13.Click the Create button.
   The Create Cell dialog box closes, and the cell "90PART" is added to the 
active cell library "3dmodela.cel."
14.In the list box in the Cells settings box, select 90PART.
   To make "90PART" the active cell, click Placement .
   
Hint:
As shortcut for steps 9-13, you could key in CC=90PART,Partition

>> Prepare views to place the partition cells:

1. Turn on levels 3 and 4 in views 1 and 2.
2. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit all views.
   You should have views 1-4 open. They should be Top, Isometric, Front, 
and Right, respectively.
3. From the 3D palette's 3D View Control sub-palette, select the Set Active 
Depth view control.
4. Select view 1.
5. In the Right, or Iso, view, snap to the upper floor element and accept 
with a data point to define the active depth level.
   
>> Place the upper level partition cells:

1. From the Main palette's Cells sub-palette, select the Place Active Cell 
tool.
2. In the Active Cell field, note that 90PART is the Active Cell.
3. Check that the Active Angle is set to 0.
4. Check that the X-, Y-, and Z-Scale are set to 1.
5. In view 1 (Top view), place the first partition with a data point.
   Data points, by default, fall at the view's active depth plane, which 
you set, in the previous procedure, to the required floor level.
6. Set the Active Angle to 90.
7. Place a second partition.
8. Repeat with Active Angles of 180 and 270.
9. As the partitions are place, check in the Right view that they are at 
the correct z-level in the design.
Note:
Because the partition cell was created in a Top view, it must be placed in 
a Top view to retain that orientation in the design.



Basic Manipulations in 3D
-------------------------

During this exercise you will manipulate elements in the 3D design. You 
will learn how Boresite Lock can be used.

You will work with your model file "3dmodela.dgn" from the previous 
exercises.

>> Set up the views in preparation:

1. Arrange your screen with views 1 to 4 containing respectively, Top, Iso, 
Front, and Right views.
2. Set the Active Level to 11.
3. In each view, have only levels 3,4, and 11, displayed.
4. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit each view.
   
>> Set Active Depth to lower floor level in the Top view:

1. From the 3D palette's 3D View Control sub-palette, select the Set Active 
Depth tool.
2. Select view 1, the Top view.
3. In the Right, or Isometric view, snap to the lower floor element and 
accept with a data point to define the active depth level.
   
Hint:
Alternately, use the key-in AZ=0.15, followed by a data point in view 1.

   Copy a partition to the lower floor level:
   Create rotated copies for remaining partitions:
   Arrange "by eye" the upper level partitioning:
   Effect of Boresite Lock:


Copy a partition to the lower floor level
-----------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Elements sub-palette, select the Copy 
Element tool.
2. In the Isometric view, tentative to the base of one of the upper floor 
level partitions.
   The selected partition highlights.
3. Accept the partition with a data point.
4. Move the pointer into the Top view. As you do this, look at the Front or 
Right views. Notice that the partition "moves" to the Active Depth of the 
Top view (the lower floor level), as the pointer enters the view.
5. Enter a data point in the Top view to place the partition on the lower 
level.
6. Change the color, of the copied partition, to blue (to distinguish it 
from the upper level partitions).
   


Create rotated copies for remaining partitions
----------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the 
Rotate tool.
2. Turn on By Active Angle and Make Copy.
3. Set the Active Angle to 90.
4. In the Top view, snap to the blue partition, and accept with a data 
point.
5. In the Command Window, key in DX=0.
   A rotated copy of the partition is created.
6. Key in DX=0 twice more to create the other required orientations of the 
partition.
   


Arrange "by eye" the upper level partitioning
---------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Locks sub-menu, choose Toggles.
   The Lock Toggles settings box opens. 
2. Check that Boresite is on.
3. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the Move 
tool.
4. In the Top view, identify a red partition with a data point only.
5. Move the partition to where you want it on the floor layout.
6. Repeat this for the other red partitions, remembering to identify them 
each time, with a data point only.
7. Place the other upper level partitioning, by copying the existing red 
partitions. Again, remember to identify the elements with data points, to 
keep them at the same depth in the view.
   


Effect of Boresite Lock
-----------------------

1. In the Lock Toggles settings box, turn off Boresite.
2. Select the Move Element tool.
3. Try to identify one of the red partitions with a data point.
   The element does not highlight, because it is not at or near the view's 
Active Depth (0.15) set earlier. With Boresite lock off, data points 
identify (locate) only those elements at or very near the Active Depth.
4. Now, try to identify one of the blue partitions on the lower level with 
a data point.
   The element highlights, because it is located at the view's Active 
Depth.
5. Move the partition to the desired location.
   Repeat for the other partitions, and then copy these to place any 
further partitioning that you would like.
   
Note:
If Boresite lock is on, elements can be identified at any depth in a view 
and remain at their current depth. When Boresite lock is off, you can 
identify elements at or near the Active Depth only. 

Note:
Tentative points override Boresite lock. If you snap to an element before 
performing a manipulation, it is moved to the the view's Active Depth.



Creating a simple B-spline surface
----------------------------------

In this exercise you will create a B-spline surface to represent the ground 
around the office building that you have been working with in the previous 
exercises.

>> Set up the Top view for the construction:

1. Set the Active Level to 2.
2. In the Top view, turn off all other levels except level 3, which 
contains the ground floor slab.
3. Zoom out of the Top view so that an area surrounding the building is 
visible.
   
>> Draw the "contours" of the surface:

1. Key in AZ=0.
2. Select the Top view.
   The Active Depth of the Top view is set to zero.
3. From the Main palette's Curves sub-palette, select the Place Curve tool.
4. From the Type option menu, choose Point curve.
5. From the By option menu, choose Points.
6. In the Top view, place an open curve (as shown) around the left, back, 
and right of the building.
7. Set the Active Depth in the Top view to 1.0.
8. In the Top view, place another curve outside the initial curve.
9. Repeat the above steps to place a third curve, at an Active Depth of 5, 
outside the first 2 curves.
10.Place a fourth curve, at an Active Depth of 2, outside the first 3 
curves.
   
>> Place the B-spline surface:

1. From the 3D Palettes 3D Freeform Surfaces sub-palette, select the 
Construct Surface by Section tool.
2. In the Top view, identify each curve, in turn, starting at the outer 
curve and finishing with the inner.
3. Enter a data point to view the surface.
4. Enter a data point to accept the surface.
   The surface is created.
   
>> Place the building ground pad:

1. Select the Place Line tool.
2. Place a line joining the ends of the innermost curve.
3. From the Main palette's Chain sub-palette, select the Create Complex 
Shape tool.
4. Set the Method to Automatic.
5. Set the Fill Type to Transparent.
6. Identify the innermost curve.
7. Accept with a data point.
8. Enter a further data point to accept the line and close the shape.
   
>> Turn off the B-spline Polygon display:

1. From the Main palette's ??? sub-palette, select the B-spline Polygon 
Display On/Off tool.
2. Identify the B-spline surface with a data point.
3. Enter a second data point to toggle the display of the polygon net.
   


Surfaces of revolution and spheres
----------------------------------

In this exercise you will use the Construct Surface of Revolution tool to 
create part of a bearing. You use this tool to create curved surfaces, by 
revolving a profile about an axis.

>> Construct the bearing surfaces:

1. Open the design file "sorless.dgn," which already has the profiles 
drawn, in MicroStation's "dgn\learning" directory.
2. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit each view
3. Set the Active Level to 2.
4. From the 3D palette's 3D Freeform Surface sub-palette, select the 
Construct Surface or Solid of Revolution tool.
5. Set Axis to Drawing Y.
   This specifies that the axis about which the profile will be revolved is 
in the drawing (design cube) y-direction.
6. Turn on Angle.
7. In the Angle field, key in 360.
8. In any view, snap to either of the complex shapes.
9. Accept with a data point.
10.In any view, snap to the center line
11.Accept with a data point.
   The surface of revolution is constructed.
12.Repeat steps 8-11 for the other complex shape.
   
>> Construct the bearings:

1. Set the Active Level to 3, and turn off level 2 in the Top view.
2. From the 3D palette's 3D Primitives sub-palette, select the Place Sphere 
tool.
3. In the Top view, snap to the center of the circle.
4. Snap to the circle.
5. Accept with a data point to place the sphere.
   
>> Copy the sphere to complete the bearings:

1. Use the Fit Active Design control to fit the Front view.
2. From the Main palette's Manipulate Element sub-palette, select the 
Rotate tool.
3. Turn on By Active Angle and Make Copy.
4. Set the Active Angle to 30.
5. In any view, snap to the sphere.
6. Accept with a data point.
7. In the Front view, snap to the center line, which appears as a dot in 
this view. Verify, in another view, that you have snapped to the center 
line.
8. To accept, key in DL=0|11.
   11 copies of the sphere are placed, each rotated 30o from the previous 
copy.
   


Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
----------------------------------

In this exercise you will use Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (ACS) to help 
with placement of elements in the design. You will place piping center 
lines, on the exterior of a simple pressure vessel.

In preparation, open the file "acsample.dgn", which is found in 
MicroStation's "dgn\learning" directory.

>> Create a Spherical ACS:

1. From the Palettes menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.
   The ACS tool palette opens.
2. From the ACS palette, select the Define ACS (By Points) tool.
3. From the Type option menu, choose Spherical.
4. In the Iso view, snap to the center of the dome's base, and accept, to 
define the "first point @x axis origin."
5. Key in DL=10, to define the "second point on x axis."
6. Key in DL=,10 to "define y axis."
   The message "New Coordinate System Defined" appears in the Command 
Window message area. If ACS triads are turned on in a view, they are 
displayed.
   
>> Turn on ACS triads:

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
2. Turn on ACS triads.
3. Click the All button.
   Triads appear, in all views, at the origin of the ACS.
   
>> Save the spherical ACS:

1. From the Settings menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.
   The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems settings box opens.
2. In the Name field, key in SPH1.
3. From the Type option menu, choose Spherical.
4. In the Description field, key in a description (for example, "center of 
dome.").
5. Click the Save button.
   The Name, Type, and Description of the Active ACS appears in the Saved 
ACS list.
   
>> Place a line, radially, from the "surface" of the sphere:

1. Select the Place Line tool.
2. For the first point, key in AX=10,135,60.
   This specifies that the data point is located 10 meters from the origin, 
at an angle of 135o anti-clockwise from the x direction (in the xy plane), 
and angled 60o down from the z direction.
3. For the second point, key in AD=10.
   A line (10 meters long) is placed, radially, from the surface of the 
dome.
   
>> Define an ACS for the cylindrical section of the vessel:

1. From the ACS tool palette, select the Define ACS (Aligned with View) 
tool.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Cylindrical.
3. In the Top view, snap to the cylinder base, at its center. Check in the 
Front or Right views to be sure you are snapping to the base, and not the 
Top.
4. Accept with a data point to define the ACS.
   The ACS' triad appears in each view.
   
>> Save the cylindrical ACS setup:

1. If it is not still open, reopen the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems 
settings box.
2. In the Name field, key in CYL1.
3. From the Type option menu, choose Cylindrical.
4. In the Description field, key in a description (for example, "Base of 
tank.").
5. Click the Save button.
   The Name, Type, and Description of the Active ACS appears, together with 
the previously saved ACS, in the Saved ACS list.
   
>> Use both ACS setups to place piping centerline:

1. From the ACS settings box's Saved ACS list, choose SPH1.
2. Click the Attach button.
   The ACS triad for SPH1 appears at the base of the domed top.
3. Select the Place Line tool.
4. For the first point, key in AX=10,0,60.
5. For the second point, key in AD=10.
   A 10 meter line is drawn radially from the starting point.
6. From the ACS settings box's Saved ACS list, choose CYL1.
7. Click the Attach button.
8. For the third point, key in AX=20,45,10.
9. For the final point, key in AD=-10.
   The final point is located on the surface of the cylindrical section of 
the vessel. That is, 10 meters back (-10) from the previous point, which 
was 10 meters from the surface (20 meters from the center.)
   


(or exercises) more of creating a 3D model
------------------------------------------

TBD -- Some simple 3D model; mainly rectangular -- place some planar 
elements in 3D to show how act. depth works, a slab, sphere, cone, do a 
surf of proj; surf of rev MUST INCLUDE SOME SPLINES, but of course nothing 
real complex; show some example of Boolean; holes, etc since these make 
basic drawing so much easier.

Place at least some elements with an ACS. Use ACS Plane Snap Lock.

Use Boresite Lock; also show using a very limited Display Depth to insure 
that you snap to the element at the right depth.

Show use of 3D data + 3D tentative points.

Possibly have a variant of the flange from 4.0 -- I think something like 
this is worth keeping -- although the boundary element should DEFINITELY be 
a B-spline curve. Possibly make part of the dgn created in "Creating a 
simple 3D model." Then this model will show, with each rendering ex, the 
effect with both curved + flat surfaces.

TBD if we have time -- Boolean stuff, fillet a surface, put a hole in. If 
this gets too long, as I think it will, save for "More advanced 3D 
modeling" Advanced spline modeling, etc. More advanced ACS usage; *Place 
Helix Place B-spline Surface -- examples of Poles, Points, Least Squares, 
and Catmull-Rom. B-spline surface direction; Boolean -- intersections, 
unions, and differences; 3D fillets and blends; , Tube, Skin, etc. 



Drawing composition
-------------------

Set up a drawing sheet; add dimensions and annotations; caution about not 
being able to associate in ref files.

Special plotting considerations in 3D, if any???



Viewing a 3D Design
-------------------

A 3D view displays part of the Design cube any point, looking in any 
direction.
*  As in 2D, elements to the left, right, above, or below can be excluded 
from a view by zooming in or windowing so that the elements are outside the 
view's area. 
*  3D views also have depth. You can exclude the display of elements 
located in front of, or behind, a required object by changing the view's 
Display Depth. 
   3D viewing procedures that are similar to their 2D counterparts
   3D-specific viewing procedures
   Perspective views -- the view camera
   Using saved views in 3D


3D viewing procedures that are similar to their 2D counterparts
---------------------------------------------------------------

Many 3D viewing procedures are similar to their 2D counterparts. See 
Working with Views for information about basic viewing procedures. 

   To change a view's area:
   To display the entire active design in a 3D view:
   To display the entire design, including reference files, in a 3D view:


To change a view's area
-----------------------

1. The way to change a view's area without changing the Display Depth is 
the same as for 2D. See *Xref.
2. From the Main palette, tear off the View Control sub-palette.
3. The four tools Window Area, Window Center, Zoom In, and Zoom Out, alter 
the viewing area of a view. They work as for 2D in that they change the 
viewing area of a view, but not its Display Depth.


To display the entire active design in a 3D view
------------------------------------------------

1. From the View Control palette choose the Fit Active Design tool.
2. Select the view.
   Both the area and the Display Depth are set so that all displayable 
elements in the active design are displayed.


To display the entire design, including reference files, in a 3D view
---------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu's Fit sub-menu, choose All.
2. Select the view.
   Both the area and the Display Depth of the view are set so that all 
elements in the active design file, and its reference files are displayed.


3D-specific viewing procedures
------------------------------

   To display part of the design in a 3D standard view:
   To rotate a view to standard view:
   To tile the open views:


To display part of the design in a 3D standard view
---------------------------------------------------

1. TBD
2. 


To rotate a view to standard view
---------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Rotation.
   The View Rotation settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose the number of the view to be rotated.
   The graphic updates to show the current rotation of the selected view.
3. From the Std option menu, choose the Standard view.
   The graphic updates to show the rotation of the selected standard view.
4. Click the Apply button.
   The selected view is rotated to the selected standard view orientation.


To tile the open views
----------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Tile
2. The views are tiled to occupy equal areas on the screen(s).
Note:
To change the order in which the views are tiled on the screen to that of 
IGDS, turn on the Tile Like IGDS preference (choose Preferences from the 
User menu and select the Window preference Category). 



Perspective views -- the view camera
------------------------------------

Elements in 3D models must be drawn on the screen, which is, of course, 
planar.
*  In a view with parallel projection, each element is projected to the 
screen along a line parallel to the view's z-axis. Although parallel 
projected views make drawing easier, they lack realism because elements 
have the same relative size regardless of their depth in the view.
*  In a view with perspective projection, elements at greater depths appear 
relatively smaller, enhancing realism. Because it mimics the way a camera 
works, a view with perspective projection is called a camera view. The part 
of the design that is visible is adjusted by graphically "positioning" and 
"aiming" the camera. 
   
When a view's camera is off, parallel projection is used in that view. 

   Important camera concepts and settings
   Camera lens
   Working with the camera


Important camera concepts and settings
--------------------------------------

The following terms should be understood to use the view camera effectively
*  Camera settings -- Settings you adjust to control projection.
*  Viewing pyramid -- A dynamic that updates as you position the camera, 
and set the front and back clipping planes. The viewing pyramid shows you 
what will be included in the camera view.
*  Target -- The focal point (center) of a camera view. Objects beyond the 
camera target appear smaller; objects in front of the camera target appear 
larger and may be outside of the viewing pyramid.
*  Camera position -- As its name suggests, the position from which the 
model is viewed with the camera.
   
Note:
The virtual camera has advantages over conventional cameras. All elements 
in the field of view are in focus, no matter how close to or far from the 
camera. You need not worry about depth of field, aberrations, astigmatism, 
or curvature of field -- in a sense, the virtual camera takes a "perfect" 
picture.



Camera lens
-----------

The controls in the Camera Settings box (to open, choose Camera > Lens  
from the View menu) let you define the characteristics of the camera's 
"lens" -- its Angle and Focal Length:

Setting:   To widen field of 
           vision:

Angle      Increase

Focal LengtDecrease



Note:
Increasing the Angle decreases the Focal Length, and vice-versa, just as in 
a real camera. 

You can also choose a lens type from a list of those commonly used by 
photographers.

Standard     Angle:   Focal Length 
Lens:                 (mm):

Fisheye      93.3d    *20

Extra-wide   74.3d    *28

Wide         62.4d    *35

Normal       46.0d    *50

Portrait     28.0d    *85

Telephoto    12.1d    *200

Telescopic   2.4d     *1000



Note:
Choosing any Standard Lens causes both the Angle and Focal Length to 
change.



Working with the camera
-----------------------

These items in the View menu's Camera sub-menu are used to turn on the 
camera and define the camera position and target.

To:                      Choose from the View 
                         menu:[a]

Turn the camera on.      Camera > On[b].

Turn the camera off.     Camera > Off[c]

Turn the camera on and seCamera > Set Up 
target, position, and clipping 
planes.

Move the camera (like focCamera > Move Camera
the camera at an object and 
moving around to obtain 
different views of it)

Display the camera's     Key in SHOW CAMERA 
coordinates in the CommanPOSITION and select the 
Window.                  view.

Move the target (like staCamera > Move Target 
in one position and pointing 
the camera at different 
objects).

Display the target's     Key in SHOW CAMERA 
coordinates in the CommanTARGET and select the 
Window.                  view.

[a]Page references are to the Reference Guide.
   
[b]Or, in the View Attributes settings box (View menu/Attributes), turn 
Camera on.
   
[c]Or, in the View Attributes settings box, turn Camera off.
   
   

Using saved views in 3D
-----------------------

TBD
   
   

Positioning Points Away From the Active Depth
---------------------------------------------

By default, data points in a 3D design are placed at the Active Depth.
   
   However, 3D data points and 3D tentative points along with Auxiliary 
coordinate systems let you place elements away from the Active Depth, which 
for many types of models improves productivity, since you need not 
constantly change the Active Depth.
   
   Boresite Lock makes Identifying existing elements easier.
   
   3D data points and 3D tentative points
   Auxiliary coordinate systems
   Identifying existing elements


3D data points and 3D tentative points
--------------------------------------

3D data points and 3D tentative points, can be used to position points at a 
depth within the view volume other than at the active depth. An Auxiliary 
coordinate systems can also be used.

>> To enter a 3D data point or 3D tentative point:

1. Position the pointer at the desired x and y coordinates in a view.
2. To enter a 3D data point, press the 3D Data button.
   or
   To enter a 3D tentative point, press the 3D Tentative button.
   A boreline, along the z direction of the view, is displayed in each view 
that is not parallel to that view. (If no borelines are displayed, adjust 
the view configuration so that at least one other view, displaying the same 
region of the design, has a different orientation.)
3. Position the pointer on a boreline at the desired depth and again press 
the 3D Data button or Tentative Button.
   
Note:
For information about the assignment of the 3DData button and the 3D 
Tentative button on your system, see "Introducing MicroStation."



Auxiliary coordinate systems
----------------------------

An auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is a coordinate system with an 
orientation and, usually, an origin, different from those of the design 
file coordinates. Although not exclusively a 3D concept, an ACS is most 
useful in 3D design.

MicroStation lets you define and attach an ACS as a drawing aid. By using 
an ACS that corresponds to the location and orientation of a particular 
element, you can enter data points relative to parts of the design rather 
than the global origin.

   ACS Type
   Defining an ACS
   Making an ACS active
   To make a saved ACS the active ACS:
   To identify an ACS to make it the active ACS:
   ACS Plane Snap Lock
   Precision input with an ACS
   Manipulating an ACS


ACS Type
--------

You can choose from these ACS types
   Rectangular
   Cylindrical
   Spherical


Rectangular
-----------

Like the design cube coordinate system, with coordinates expressed in the 
form (X,Y,Z).



Cylindrical
-----------

Points are specified as two magnitudes (R and Z) and an angle (q), with 
coordinates expressed in the form (R, q, Z). 

The process of locating a point in a cylindrical ACS can be thought of as 
follows:
1. Moving from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R.
2. Rotating about the z-axis an angle of q.
3. Finally, moving parallel to the z-axis a distance of Z.
   
Note:
In 2D, there is no Z, and cylindrical coordinates are commonly known as 
polar coordinates.



Spherical
---------

(3D only) Points are specified by a magnitude (R) and two angles (q and f), 
with coordinates expressed in the form (R, q, f). 

The process of locating a point in a spherical ACS can be thought of as 
follows:
1. Move from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R to establish a 
radius vector.
2. Rotate this vector about the z-axis an angle of q. 
3. The angle f is the angle between the radius vector and the positive 
z-axis.
   


Defining an ACS
---------------

You can define an ACS in any of the following ways

To define an ACS:        Use this tool in the 
                         ACS palette:

That is aligned with a plDefine ACS (Aligned with 
element.                 Element)

By entering data points. Define ACS (By Points)

That is aligned with a viDefine ACS (Aligned with 
                         View)





Making an ACS active
--------------------

MicroStation allows you to define and save multiple ACS setups. At any time 
you can make a single ACS active. This allows you to work, simultaneously, 
with 3 coordinate systems. As well as an active ACS, the default design 
file and view coordinate systems are always available.



To make a saved ACS the active ACS
----------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.
   The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems settings box opens.
2. Select an ACS from the list of saved ACS setups.
3. Click the Attach button.
   The selected ACS becomes the active ACS.


To identify an ACS to make it the active ACS
--------------------------------------------

1. From the ACS palette, select the Select Auxiliary System (@origin) tool.
   Triads appear, indicating the available ACS setups.
2. Identify the required ACS at its origin.


ACS Plane Snap Lock
-------------------

When active, ACS Plane Lock forces all data points to fall on the XY plane 
of the active ACS. This lock can be turned on in the lock settings box.



Precision input with an ACS
---------------------------

While an ACS is active, precision input can be specified as one of the 
following

To specify precision inpuKey in:
as:

ACS coordinates          AX= x value, y value, z 
                         value.

Distances, along the ACS AD= x value, y value, z 
from the most recently envalue along the x, y, 
tentative point or data pand z, axes of the ACS.

Distances in the design fDL= x value, y value, z 
view coordinates         value for design file 
                         coordinates, andDX= x 
                         value, y value, z value 
                         for view coordinates.





Manipulating an ACS
-------------------




To:                      Use this tool in the 
                         ACS palette:

Rotate the active ACS by Rotate Active ACS(Click 
angle(s) from the unrotatAbsolute to rotate the 
(top) orientation.       ACS)

Rotate the active ACS by Rotate Active ACS(Click 
angle(s) from its currentRelative to rotate the 
orientation.             ACS)

Move the origin of the acMove ACS
ACS.

You can manipulate an ACS as follows:



Identifying existing elements
-----------------------------

When Boresite (Lock), is on, elements at any depth can be selected or 
identified with a data point. Elements identified with a data point remain 
at their depth in the design, regardless of the Active Depth.

When Boresite Lock is off, only elements at or very near the Active Depth 
can be selected or identified with a data point. 

Note:
Boresite Lock is set in the Locks settings box, which is opened by choosing 
Locks from the Settings menu.

Note:
If you have difficulty selecting an element, check Boresite Lock, as well 
as Grid Lock and Level Lock .

   Tentative points and Boresite Lock


Tentative points and Boresite Lock
----------------------------------

Tentative points override Boresite Lock. You can snap to elements at any 
depth in a view, whether or not Boresite Lock is on. 

However, if you snap to an element, it is moved to the view's Active Depth.

Hint:
Set Display Depth to a small range to be sure you snap to the element at 
the desired depth.



3D Elements
-----------

Many of the elements used in 3D design, including shapes, circles, 
polygons, and arcs, are 2D and are thefore restricted to a single plane, 
even in a 3D design. 3D elements do not have this restriction, and can be 
drawn freely in the design cube. For information about planar element 
types, see *Xref.

   Open 3D elements
   Primary surfaces
   Surfaces of projection and revolution
   Free-form (NURBS) surfaces
   Specifying whether an element encloses volume


Open 3D elements
----------------

Open elements do not enclose an area or volume.

   Space line strings and curves
   Helixes


Space line strings and curves
-----------------------------

To draw a line string or curve that is not constrained to one plane, use 
these tools with the Non-planar tool setting on

Tool:                         Sub-palette:

Place Line String             Lines
tool

Place Curve                   Curves
tool





Helixes
-------

A helix is placed with the Place Helix tool.



Primary surfaces
----------------

Primary surfaces (often referred to by 3D modelers as "primitive" or 
"simple" surfaces) include the 3D surfaces that are relatively simple to 
describe.

They are placed in the design with the tools in the 3D Primitives 
sub-palette, which is in the top-left position in the 3D palette..

   Slab
   Sphere
   Cone and cylinder
   Torus
   Wedge


Slab
----

A slab (also referred to as a "3D block" or "parallelipiped") is placed 
with the Place Slab tool.

Note:
A slab is defined in the design file as a surface of projection. For 
information about generating more complex surfaces of projection, see 
Surfaces of projection and revolution.



Sphere
------

A sphere's geometry is defined by its center and its radius. It is placed 
in the design with the Place Sphere tool.

Note:
A sphere is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution in which 
the boundary element is an arc. For information about generating more 
complex surfaces of revolution, see Surfaces of projection and revolution.



Cone and cylinder
-----------------

The cone is the only 3D-specific MicroStation primitive (*XRef) element 
type. The ends of a cone are two circles lying in parallel planes. 

A cylinder is a cone in which both ends have the same diameter.

To place a:              Select in the 3D 
                         Primary Surfaces 
                         sub-palette:

Cone                     Place Cone 
                         tool

Cylinder                 Place Cylinder 
                         tool





Torus
-----

A torus (also referred to as a "donut") is defined by its radii and 
Projection Angle.  It is placed in the design with the Place Torus tool.

Note:
A torus is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution in which 
the boundary element is circle.



Wedge
-----

A wedge is placed in the design with the Place Wedge tool.

Note:
A wedge is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution in which 
the boundary element is rectangle.



Surfaces of projection and revolution
-------------------------------------

Many objects can be drawn by first drawing a planar boundary element (or 
cross-section) and then projecting or rotating the cross-section.
*  A surface or volume of projection is formed by projecting, or extruding, 
a planar element -- line string, curve, shape, ellipse, B-spline curve, 
complex chain, or complex shape.
*  A surface or volume of revolution is formed by rotating a planar 
element.
   
Complex chains and shapes can be projected or rotated to create elaborate 
surfaces. 

To generate a:           Use this tool in the 
                         3D Free-form Surfaces 
                         sub-palette:

Surface or volume of     Construct Surface or Solid of Projection 
projection.              tool

Surface or volume of     Construct Surface or Solid of Revolution 
revolution.              tool





Free-form (NURBS) surfaces
--------------------------

A non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) surface is the most mathematically 
flexible way to represent a surface in a design. A B-spline surface is easy 
to modify because each pole of its control net affects the shape of the 
surface only over a limited part. The control net is analogous to a 
B-spline curve's control polygon.

Hint:
Before working with 3D NURBS surfaces, it is a good idea to become familiar 
with 2D B-spline concepts and placement. For more information, see Using 
Curves.

NURBS placement tools can be roughly divided into several categories.

   Placing and constructing NURBS surfaces
   Deriving NURBS surfaces


Placing and constructing NURBS surfaces
---------------------------------------

TBD



Deriving NURBS surfaces
-----------------------

TBD



Specifying whether an element encloses volume
---------------------------------------------

A closed 3D element can be either of the following
*  Solid -- capped on its ends; encloses a volume. 
*  Surface -- not capped on its ends; does not enclose volume.
   
Whether a 3D element is placed as a surface or solid is set in the pop-down 
Type option menu from the 3D element placement palettes.

>> To change an element from a surface to a solid, or vice versa:

1. From the Modify sub-palette of the 3D Tools palette, select the Change 
to Active Surface Settings tool.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Solid or Surface as required.
3. Identify the element to modify.
4. Enter a data point to accept the modification.
   


Manipulating and Modifying Elements in 3D
-----------------------------------------

For the most part, this is similar to 2D. 3D-specific aspects are discussed 
her. Before manipulating 3D elements, it helps to understand Manipulating 
and Modifying Elements in 2D.

Note:
All scaling, and rotating of elements is performed relative to the view's 
axes. 

   Selecting elements in 3D
   Using the fence in 3D


Selecting elements in 3D
------------------------

Most basic 3D element manipulations, including moving, scaling, rotating, 
deleting, and copying, can be done with the Element Selection tool, and are 
similar to 2D. 
*  As in 2D, you can select one or more elements and manipulate them as a 
single entity (see Selecting elements). 
*  By dragging one of the handles of a selected element, you can modify it 
individually. The type of modification allowed depends on the element (see 
To scale or modify a selected element:).


Using the fence in 3D
---------------------

Keep in mind that fences are planar entities that are specific to a single 
view. In 3D, the volume enclosed by a fence is defined as the volume swept 
out by moving the fence from the front of the view volume to the rear of 
the view volume along the view z-axis.

If an element is completely within the fence but intersects the view's 
front or back clipping plane (see View volume), the element is considered 
to cross the fence and is clipped if the Fence (Selection) Mode is set to 
Clip or Void-Clip. 

Note:
Cones, text, and B-splines cannot be clipped.

Note:
Certain viewing operations, such as rotating and zooming, can cause the 
fence in a 3D view to disappear. 

Note:
The fence cannot be used in camera views.

Note:
For basic information about the fence, see Using the fence to group 
elements for manipulation.



Using Cells, Groups, and Graphic Groups in 3D
---------------------------------------------

Both cells and graphic groups can be used in 3D design. Graphic groups work 
as they do with 2D. Any 3D cells that you create must be saved in a 3D cell 
library. You can attach a 2D cell library to a 3D design, but not 
vice-versa. 

With 3D cells, also, you have to consider the view in which the cell is 
created. For example, a cell created in a Top view, will always be placed 
in a view as though it is a Top view. This applies, no matter what the 
orientation of the view in which it is later placed. 

3D cells are created in a volume determined by the fence area, and the 
Display Depth of the view.

Hint:
A good idea is to create the cell on a level(s) of its own. Before adding 
the cell to the library, the view should be fitted to minimize the Display 
Depth.



Labeling Designs in 3D
----------------------

For the most part, text, patterning, and dimensioning work the same in 3D 
as in 2D (see Labeling Designs).

   Text in 3D
   Dimensioning in 3D
   Patterning in 3D


Text in 3D
----------

Normally, it is best to not place text in a 3D model file, but instead it 
usually is best to place it in the sheet file. There are times, however, 
when some text is required in a 3D model. 

Like other 2D elements, text is placed planar to the view in which it is 
placed. When viewed edge on, individual characters appear as dashes. 

If you want text to be visible, no matter what the orientation of the view 
is, then you should use view independent text, which is clearly visible in 
all views, regardless of the orientation of the view in which it is placed. 
This is useful for placing base information such as survey markers, for 
example.



Dimensioning in 3D
------------------

Dimensioning, like standard text, is mainly a 2D process (see *Xref). 

More TBD

   3D-specific dimensioning tools


3D-specific dimensioning tools
------------------------------

Dimension Diameter Perpendicular -- TBD



Patterning in 3D
----------------

In a 3D, any element that is closed, planar, and solid can be patterned. 
Hole elements on the same level are not patterned if they are on the same 
plane as the solid element.

The Active Pattern Angle sets the angle of the pattern in the view in which 
the element is identified. If the element is parallel to the view, the 
actual pattern angle and the apparent angle are the same. Therefore, it is 
usually preferable, although not necessary, to identify the element to 
pattern in a view that is parallel to the element.



















Rendering and Visualizing 3D Models
-----------------------------------

Rendering is the process of depicting a 3D model through the display of 
surfaces. Rendered views are most effective with a system capable of 
displaying 256 or more colors.

   New Features in MicroStation Version 5
   Visualizing a 3D Design
   Working with the view camera
   Rendering views
   Adding light sources and simulating materials
   Rendering Methods
   Rendering View Attributes
   Controlling Image Quality and Processing Time
   Solving Common Rendering Problems


New Features in MicroStation Version 5
--------------------------------------

The overall quality of rendered images is substantially improved. These new 
features greatly enhance image realism
*  Shadows can provide a dramatic effect in Phong shading for spot, 
distance, or solar lights. Used with solar light, shadows can help 
architects create more effective client presentations and solar studies.
*  A pattern map is a raster image that can be projected onto a surface. 
Pattern maps can greatly enhance a rendered image's realism in the 
following ways.
   
Pattern Map       Examples:
Usage:

Surface finish    Wood grain, bricks, or fabric.
simulation.

Features that are A picture on a wall or carpet 
hard to model but on a floor. Leaves on a tree, 
make an image morepeople, or cars can be added 
realistic.        by making the image's 
                  background transparent. 


*  A bump map is a bitmapped (black and white) image file that is used to 
simulate texture. Black areas represent the high points (bumps). When used 
with pattern maps, very realistic materials can be simulated. For example, 
realistic bricks can be rendered by combining a pattern map of a brick's 
colors with a bump map that simulates a brick's texture. 
*  Transparency -- Elements can allow objects behind them to "shine 
through" to varying degrees.
*  Anti-aliasing -- Reduces the jagged edges (jaggies) that are 
particularly noticeable on low-resolution displays.
   
You can now render 2D design files. 

Note:
Rendering is now much easier.

   Sample rendered image showing use of new features


Sample rendered image showing use of new features
-------------------------------------------------



Visualizing a 3D Design
-----------------------

   Preview


Preview
-------

In this lesson, you will learn the following 3D visualization techniques
*  Working with the view camera.
*  Rendering views.
*  Adding light sources and simulating materials.


Working with the view camera
----------------------------

In this exercise, you will learn how to set up and adjust the view camera 
to create both exterior and interior views. You will save these views for 
later rendering. 

Normally, MicroStation displays models in parallel projection. The view 
camera, which can be can be turned on in the View Attributes settings box, 
is used to display the model with perspective projection. 

You can use the camera to quickly set up a scene. You can rotate a view, 
set its display depth, and turn the camera on.

>> Set up an exterior camera view in View 3:

1. Open the sample design file "newbldg.dgn".
   This is the model created in the 3D modelling lesson. It was saved with 
Views 1 to 4 as Top, Iso, Front, and Right, respectively.
2. Set the active depth (*Xref) in the Top view (View 1) to the level of 
the upper floor (that is, Z value 2.90).
3. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Setup.
4. Select View 3.
5. In the Top view, enter a data point, near the center of the building, to 
define the camera target. 
   A dynamic viewing pyramid displays to help you visualize the "picture" 
as seen by the camera. Elements that are not inside the pyramid will not 
display in the camera view.
6. Enter a data point opposite the entrance of the building to define the 
camera position.
   The pointer now controls the placement of the front clipping plane of 
the viewing pyramid. 
7. Enter a data point at the camera position to define the front clipping 
planet.
8. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane. Position it so 
that all of the building is included in the viewing pyramid.
   The camera is turned on in the selected view and the camera view is 
displayed. 
   
Note:
The front and back clipping planes in a camera view are the same as a 
standard (parallel projection) view. Any elements that are closer than the 
front clipping plane or beyond the back clipping plane do not display.

By default, the view camera uses a normal (50 mm) lens. Like a real camera, 
you can change lenses. In the Camera Lens settings box, you can choose a 
standard lens from Telescopic through Fisheye. You can also key in the 
lens' angle or focal length to define a "custom" lens.

>> Change the camera lens

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Lens.
   The Camera Lens settings box opens.
2. In the View Number option menu, choose 3.
3. From the Standard option menu, choose Wide.
4. Click Apply.
   The camera view updates. The wider angle displays more of the model.
   
You can also adjust a camera view by moving the target or the camera.

>> Move the camera target:

1. From the Camera sub-menu of the View menu choose Move Target.
2. Select View 3.
   A viewing pyramid displays to help you define the new camera target, 
while the camera location remains fixed.
3. In the Top view, enter a data point, at the top left corner of the 
building, to define the new target position.
4. Enter a data point at the camera position to define the front clipping 
plane.
5. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane. Make sure the 
entire building is included in the viewing pyramid.
   The selected view updates with the new settings.
   
>> Move the camera:

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Position.
2. Select View 3.
   A viewing pyramid displays to help you re-position the camera while the 
target remains fixed.
3. In the Top view, enter a data point, below and to the right of the 
building, to define the new camera position.
4. Enter a data point at the camera position to define the front clipping 
plane.
5. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane. Make sure the 
entire building is included in the viewing pyramid.
   View 3 updates with the new settings.
   
There are no restrictions as to where you can position the camera and the 
target. For example, you can easily move inside your model to create 
interior camera views. 

>> Set up an interior camera view in View 4:

1. From the View menu's Camera sub-menu, choose Setup.
2. Select View 4.
3. Enter a data point on the lower end of the right hand side stairway 
handrail (preview with a tentative point).
   If necessary, zoom in closer to the handrail, in the Top or Front view, 
to make this task easier.
4. In the Top view, enter a 3D data point (*Xref) adjacent to the upper 
level handrail, to the left of the main entrance.
   Bore lines appear in the other view, indicating the location of the data 
point in the X,Y plane.
5. In the Front view, complete the placement of the 3D data point at a 
level just below the ceiling of the upper level.
6. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane. 
7. Finally, enter a data point to define the back clipping plane. 
   View 4 updates as an interior camera view.
   
You will render these exterior and interior views. 

>> Save the exterior camera view:

1. From the View menu, choose Saved.
   The Saved View settings box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose 3 (the exterior camera view).
3. In the Name field, key in SEELEV.
4. In the Description field, key in South East Elevation.
5. Click the Save button.
   
>> Save the interior camera view:

1. From the View option menu, choose 4 (the interior camera view).
2. In the Name field, key in INT1.
3. In the Description field, key in Interior stairway.
4. Click the Save button.
   
>> Save the active settings:

1. From the File menu, choose Save Settings.
   The active settings, including the number of open views and their 
orientation, are saved. 
   


Rendering views
---------------

In this exercise, you will render the camera views set up in the previous 
exercise. You will be using some of the available rendering methods -- 
Constant, Smooth, and Phong shading. Each successive image will be of 
higher quality, but will take longer to render.

Open the design file "newbldg.dgn" if it is not already open.

>> Render a Constant-shaded view:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Constant Shading.
2. Select View 3.
   View 3 blanks, and elements are displayed as they are rendered. Surfaces 
are first simplified into a polygon mesh. Each of the polygons, 
representing elements, is given a single (constant) color. Curved elements 
appear tiled.
3. Repeat for the interior view (view 4).
   
Note:
If the view stays blank, it is likely that Flashbulb is off. To remedy 
this, see Screen remains blank.

>> Render a smooth-shaded view:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Smooth Shading.
2. Select View 3.
   The color is calculated at each polygon boundary and then graded, or 
"smoothed," across each polygon, so that curved surfaces do not appear 
tiled.
   
>> Render a Phong-shaded view.

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Phong Shading.
2. Select View 3.
   Phong Shading produces the most realistic results, because the color for 
each pixel is calculated. This causes rendering to take longer. 
   


Adding light sources and simulating materials
---------------------------------------------

In this exercise, you will learn how to add light sources, material 
definitions for the structure and windows, a background sky, and human 
figures. 

Finally, you will render a more complex model as a further demonstration of 
MicroStation's rendering features.

>> Add a solar light source and render again:

1. From the Settings menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Global Lighting.
   The Global Lighting settings box opens.
2. Turn Solar lighting on.
3. Ensure that Solar Shadows is off (grey).
4. In the Location section, click on the By City button.
   The Location By City dialog box opens.
5. From the Location By City list box, choose "Philadelphia."
6. Click the OK button.
   Philadelphia's latitude, longitude, and GMT Offset appear in the Global 
Lighting settings box.
7. In the Time section, key in -- 10:15 AM, Standard, for time; July 20, 
for Date; 1993, for Year.
8. From the View menu's Render sub-menu choose Phong Shading.
9. Select View 3
   The view is rendered, with the building illuminated by the "Sun."
   
Next, you will use spotlights to create a night-time scene. Two spotlights 
will illuminate the building's exterior.

>> Prepare your file prior to placing the light sources.

1. Attach the saved exterior view "SEELEV" to view 3.
2. In View 3, turn on level 6 to display the windows.
3. Set the active depth, in the Top view, to the level of the upper floor 
(Z value 2.90). See (*Xref)
4. In the Global Lighting settings box, turn off both Solar Lighting and 
Flashbulb.
   This ensures that lighting is provided solely by the light sources.
   
>> Place a spotlight:

1. From the Settings menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Source Lighting.
   The Source Lighting settings box opens.
2. From the Light Type option menu, choose Spot.
3. Check that the light "switch" at the top right of the settings box is on 
(i.e., darkened).
4. From the Tools menu, choose Place New Light.
   When the pointer is moved into a view, it now has a spotlight attached 
to it.
5. In the Top view, enter a data point at the front of, and to the left of 
the building.
   The spotlight is placed, and the pointer now controls the direction of 
the spotlight's "beam." A cone shows the direction and width of this beam.
6. In the Top view, enter a data point to position the beam so that it 
shines on the front and (left) side of the building.
7. Place a second spotlight to shine on the front and right side (repeat 
steps 4 through 6).
8. Render View 3 using Smooth Shading.
   Notice the effect of the light source cells on the model.
9. Now render the view using Phong Shading.
   Notice how the reflection of the light source is much better defined 
with Phong Shading.
   
   Return to "daytime" lighting


Return to "daytime" lighting
----------------------------

Instead of Solar lighting, this time you will use a point light source for 
general lighting, along with the Flashbulb. A point light source radiates 
light in all directions, and is useful for providing general lighting. 
Point lights do not cast shadows, and illuminate all surfaces that face 
them. Flashbulb lighting ensures that all surfaces facing the camera are 
illuminated.

>> First, turn off the Spotlights:

1. From the Rendering sub-menu of the View menu, choose Source Lighting.
   The Source Lighting settings box opens.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Edit Light.
3. Identify one of the Spotlights.
   The Source Lighting settings box updates with the current settings for 
the selected spot light.
4. Click the On check button to turn the light off (grey is off).
5. Repeat for the second Spotlight.
   
>> Now, add the point light:

1. From the Light Type option menu in the Source Lighting settings box, 
choose Point.
   Point light becomes the active light source. The pointer now has a point 
light attached to it.
2. Enter data point to place a point light directly above the building's 
center.
3. Now, open the Global Lighting settings box and turn Flashbulb on (with 
an intensity of 1). 
4. Again render the exterior view with Phong shading, to check that the 
Spotlights are no longer on.
   
For added realism, you can assign surface finishes, or characteristics, to 
elements. Material definitions are assigned to elements by level and color, 
and they specify that elements appear to be rough, smooth, shiny, dull, 
transparent, or any combination of these when rendered. Additionally, you 
can specify that pattern maps, bump maps, or a combination of both be 
applied to elements to make rendered images look quite lifelike.

Material definitions are stored in material palette ".pal" files. 
Assignment of surface definitions to elements in the design file are stored 
in material assignment table ".mat" files.

Supplied with MicroStation are a number of material palette files, 
containing a range of surface finishes and textures. In the following 
exercise you will use some of these definitions to enhance the rendered 
images.

>> Assign a material definition to an element in the model:

1. From the Settings menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Assign Materials.
   The Assign Materials settings box opens.
2. From the File menu in the Assign Materials settings box, choose Open 
Palette. 
   The Open Palette dialog box opens.
3. Select the file "fabwood.pal" from the list.
4. Click the OK button.
   The Open Palette dialog box closes.
5. In the Assign Materials settings box, a list of available material 
definitions from "fabwood.pal" appears in the Palette list box.
6. Select "fabric_beige_fine" from the list of materials.
   The display on the right of the settings box updates to show how the 
material will look. In the Display option menu, you can specify that this 
display be Spherical, Conical, Rectangular, or None at all.
7. From the Tools menu, choose Assign By Selection.
8. Identify one of the partitions on the lower level of the building. 
9. When it highlights, enter a data point to accept.
   The assignment information appears in the assignments list on the left 
of the settings box.
10.Repeat point 6 for a partition on the upper level of the model.
   The assignments list updates, adding the new elements to the current 
definition (fabric_beige_fine).
   
If you know the element levels and colors, you can also enter this 
information manually. 

>> Assign a material definition manually:

1. From the list of definitions, choose "carpet_blue".
   The material display updates to show the new material.
2. Choose Assign from the Tools menu of the Assign Materials settings box.
   The Assign Material dialog box opens.
3. In the Levels field, key in 3-4.
4. In the Colors field, key in 1.
5. Click the OK button.
   The material list updates, displaying the assignment.of elements of 
color 1 (blue) on levels 3 and 4 to the material "carpet_blue."
>> Complete the definition of materials in the model:

1. Using these supplied material palette files, do the following:
   
From         Assign         Level: Color:
Palette:     Material:

building.pal stucco_gray_fin3-4    4

metal.pal    polished_chrome7      5

finish.pal   glass_dark     7      6

texture.pal  grass          2      2



Having applied material definitions to elements, you are now ready to 
render the design. Material definitions are apparent only in the shading 
options (Constant, Smooth, and Phong). Before continuing, you should check 
that the appropriate settings in the View Attributes box are correct.

>> Check the View Attributes and render the view:

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. Be sure Transparency and Pattern Maps are on.
   Some of the selected materials include raster images (pattern or bump 
maps), while the glass materials are transparent. For these materials to 
display correctly, the respective settings must be on.
3. Render the exterior view (saved view "SEELEV") using, in turn, Constant, 
Smooth, and then Phong shading.
   Notice that the elements in the model now appear as you defined them in 
the previous exercise.
   
Note:
If a pattern map is used in a definition, such as "carpet_blue," Phong 
rendering must be used to accurately display the reflection of any 
lighting. Both Constant and Smooth shading display the pattern map, but not 
the reflection of lighting.

Note:
If a bump map is used, for example in "stucco_gray_fine," only Phong 
rendering displays the textured effect.

You have seen how to make the elements look more realistic. To further add 
realism, you can add: 
*  A background image of the sky, for example, will enhance a daytime 
scene. Background images can be in any of a number of raster formats 
(*Xref).
*  Pattern maps can have a transparent background (*Xref to defining 
materials). This lets you add items such as trees and people to images. 
   
>> Add a sky background:

1. Key-in ACTIVE BACKGROUND.
   The Display Image File dialog box opens.
2. Select "cloud.rgb" in MicroStation's "image" directory.
3. Click the OK button.
4. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
5. In the View Number option menu, choose 3.
6. Turn on Background.
7. Click the Apply button.
8. Update View 3.
   The background image updates first, followed by elements in the design 
file.
   
Background images take time to update, particularly when you resize a view, 
and normally are turned on only for rendering.

>> Add a tree and a human figure:

1. In View 3, turn on level 8 to display two blocks at the front of the 
building.
2. Open the Assign Materials settings box.
3. Open the material palette "other.pal."
4. Assign the material "tree" to the larger block on level 8.
5. Assign the material "man" to the smaller block on level 8.
6. Set up a camera view looking at the building's entrance. Make sure that 
the small block (man) and at least part of the large block (tree) are 
included.
7. Render the view
   The man and tree are displayed. There is no sign of the underlying 
blocks.
   
Whenever high quality images are required for presentations, documentation, 
and so on, use Phong Antialias rendering, which removes the "jaggies" on 
edges that are at an angle across your screen. This is particularly 
noticeable on lower resolution screens.

>> Render an anti-aliased Phong-shaded view:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Phong Antialias.
2. Render the exterior view.
   
Note:
The view will take a while to render since anti-aliasing requires it to be 
rendered several times. This might be a good time for a break.

>> Render a more complex design:

1. Open the sample design file "kitchen.dgn," which is supplied with 
MicroStation.
2. Maximize View 1.
3. Attach the Saved View "IMAGE1" to View 1
4. Render the view using the Phong Shading option.
   
Note:
Due to the size of this file, and the number of light sources, it will take 
some time to render. Actual time taken will depend on the speed of your 
system.



Rendering Methods
-----------------

A view can be rendered in the following ways (listed in increasing order of 
realism).

   Wiremesh display
   Cross-section display
   Hidden line display
   Filled hidden line display
   Constant shading
   Smooth (Gouraud) shading
   Phong shading
   Phong Anti-aliased shading
   Phong stereo shading
   Rendering a View(s)


Wiremesh display
----------------

Similar to wireframe display -- all elements are transparent and do not 
obscure other elements. Hidden lines are not removed. Curved surfaces are 
represented by a polygonal mesh -- this can increase the realism of curved 
surfaces, although it may also increase the amount of clutter since more 
lines are displayed for surfaces that would normally be hidden.

You can render wiremesh displays as follows:

To render:   Do the following:

A view(s)    Choose View menu/
             Render > Wiremesh  
             and select the view(s) to be rendered 
             (or use the Render View control).

The fenced arKey in RENDER FENCE WIREMESH.

All open viewKey in RENDER ALL WIREMESH.





Cross-section display
---------------------

Shows a planar section of the model as defined by a plane.
*   If an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is active, the cross-section is 
cut at the x-y plane of the ACS. For more information about auxiliary 
coordinate systems, see *Xref.
*  If no ACS is active, the cross-section is cut at the view's active depth 
(parallel to the view).
   
Note:
More sophisticated sections can be generated using the Section Generation 
settings box, which is opened by choosing *Xref from the User menu.

>> To render a cross-section:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Cross-section.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   
Hint:
To render part of the contents of a view as a cross-section, fence the area 
to be rendered with the Place Fence Block (*XRef.) or Place Fence Shape 
(*XRef.) tool and then key in RENDER FENCE SECTION.

Note:
To render the contents of all views as cross-sections, key in RENDER ALL 
SECTION.



Hidden line display
-------------------

Only parts of elements that would actually be visible are displayed -- 
lines hidden behind objects are removed. Also called "polygon" display.

Each element is decomposed into polygons. Hidden line removal takes much 
longer than than wireframe or wiremesh display, in fact, the processing 
time is about the same as other, more realistic types of rendering that are 
available.

Note:
See Visible Edges Design Files for information about creating a a 2D or 3D 
design file that contains only the visible edges in a 3D view.

>> To remove hidden lines:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Hidden Line.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   
To render part of the contents of a view as a polygon display, fence the 
area to be rendered with the Place Fence Block (*XRef.) or Place Fence 
Shape (*XRef.) tool and then key in RENDER FENCE HIDDEN.

To render the contents of all views as polygon displays, key in RENDER ALL 
HIDDEN.



Filled hidden line display
--------------------------

Identical to a Hidden line display, except that the polygons are filled 
with the element color, creating a cartoon-like effect that may be useful 
in some circumstances, with hardware that can display only a limited number 
of colors. Also called "filled polygon" display.



Constant shading
----------------

Surfaces are displayed as one or more polygons, each filled with a single 
(constant) color.

Each element is displayed as one or more polygons filled with a single 
(constant) color. The color for each polygon is calculated from the surface 
color, material definitions, and lighting. Curved surfaces are decomposed 
into a mesh of polygons, and appear tiled.

>> To render a constant-shaded model:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Constant Shading.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   
Hint:
To render part of the contents of a view as a constant shaded model, fence 
the area to be rendered with the Place Fence Block (*XRef.) or Place Fence 
Shape (*XRef.) tool and then key in RENDER FENCE CONSTANT.

Note:
To render the contents of all views as constant shaded models, key in 
RENDER ALL CONSTANT.



Smooth (Gouraud) shading
------------------------

Smooth shading, like Constant shading, displays surfaces as one or more 
polygons. In smooth shaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is 
more realistic than in constant shaded models because colors are calculated 
at the boundaries of the polygons, and then blended across the polygon 
interiors. This gives curved surfaces a smooth appearance, without a tiled 
effect.. 

>> To render a smooth shaded model:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Smooth Shading.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   
Hint:
To render part of the contents of a view as a smooth shaded model, fence 
the area to be rendered with the Place Fence Block (*XRef.) or Place Fence 
Shape (*XRef.) tool and then key in RENDER FENCE SMOOTH.

Note:
To render the contents of all views as smooth shaded models, key in RENDER 
ALL SMOOTH.



Phong shading
-------------

Phong shading is the most realistic of MicroStation's rendering methods -- 
it differs from Constant shading and Smooth (Gouraud) shading in that the 
color of each pixel is individually computed -- useful when high-quality is 
more important than speed.
*  Phong shading is required for Shadows , Bump maps , and Atmospheric 
distance cueing.
*  Phong shading is necessary for exact placement of Pattern maps or or to 
exactly see the effect of Lighting, particularly if the light source is 
close to the object (for example, to see the effect of a spotlight on a 
stone wall)
   
Note:
The large number of computations slows display time considerably. Often, 
Phong shaded models are very similar to Smooth shaded models and may not be 
worth the extra time it takes to render them.

>> To render a Phong shaded model:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Phong Shading.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   
Hint:
To render part of the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model, fence the 
area to be rendered with the Place Fence Block (*XRef.) or Place Fence 
Shape (*XRef.) tool and then key in RENDER FENCE PHONG.

Note:
To render the contents of all views as Phong shaded models, key in RENDER 
ALL PHONG.



Phong Anti-aliased shading
--------------------------

Reduces the jagged edges (jaggies) that are particularly noticeable on 
low-resolution displays. The additional time required for anti-aliasing is 
especially worthwhile when saving images for presentation, publication, or 
animated sequences.

Anti-aliasing is done by rendering the model several times and combining 
the images into one image. Anti-aliasing quality is determined by the 
Anti-Aliasing Grid Size, set in the Rendering settings box. However, in 
most cases, changing the default is neither necessary nor useful.

>> To render an anti-aliased Phong image:

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose Phong Antialias.
2. Select the view(s) to be rendered.
   


Phong stereo shading
--------------------

Renders a view with a stereo effect that is visible when viewed with the 
supplied 3D glasses. Stereo Phong shading takes twice as long as Phong 
because two images, one each from the perspective of the right and left 
eyes, are rendered and combined into one "color coded" image.

Note:
To render all open views in stereo, key in RENDER ALL STEREO. To render 
part of the contents of a view in stereo, fence the area to be rendered and 
then key in RENDER FENCE STEREO.



Rendering a View(s)
-------------------

1. From the View menu's Render sub-menu, choose the method (see Rendering 
Methods.
2. Select the view(s).
   OR
1. From the 3D palette's View Control sub-palette, select the Render View 
control.
2. From the Method option menu, choose the method.
3. Select the view(s).
   
>> To render all open views:

1. Key in RENDER ALL <WIREMESH | SECTION | HIDDEN | CONSTANT | SMOOTH | 
PHONG | ANTIALIAS | STEREO>.
   
>> To render part of a view

1. Fence the area with the Place Fence Block tool or Place Fence Shape 
tool.
2. Key in RENDER FENCE <WIREMESH | SECTION | HIDDEN | CONSTANT | SMOOTH | 
PHONG | ANTIALIAS | STEREO>.
   


Rendering View Attributes
-------------------------

These view attributes affect rendering
*  If Delayed Display is on, the view is not updated until rendering is 
complete. This reduces rendering time and, for low-resolution displays, 
improves image quality. 
*  Pattern/Bump Maps, Shadows, or Transparency can be turned on or off in a 
view. Turning any of these off makes rendering faster, especially if you 
are producing "test" renderings.
*  Display determines whether the view remains rendered when it is updated 
or the model is modified. Wireframe display is recommended for drawing 
because view updating is fastest.
*  The controls in the Distance Cueing group box determine how atmospheric 
fading is set in the view.
   
Note:
View attributes that affect rendering are set in the Rendering View 
Attributes settings box, which is opened by choosing Rendering > View 
Attributes from the Settings menu.



Controlling Image Quality and Processing Time
---------------------------------------------

In most cases, higher image quality is achieved at the expense of longer 
processing time -- with a little effort you can learn how to get adequate 
quality in a reasonable amount of time.
*  Stroke Tolerance, which is set in the General Rendering Settings box, 
affects rendering quality. 
*  Lighting and Surface material definitions can be simulated with a high 
degree of realism. 
   
Hint:
You can save a lot of time by first rendering "test" images using higher 
Stroke Tolerance settings that produce coarse, but quickly rendered, 
images. You can make any adjustments, to lighting or material definitions 
or assignments. When the image is correct, you can set the Stroke Tolerance 
to a smaller value for the final rendering. 

Hint:
*Xref to operations on multiple files.

   Stroke Tolerance
   Atmospheric distance cueing
   Lighting
   Surface material definitions
   Assigning Materials to Elements
   Defining material characteristics
   Saving rendered images
   Displaying Rendered Images


Stroke Tolerance
----------------

When a 3D model is rendered, the model is first simplified into smaller 
polygons, with curved surfaces being represented by a polygon mesh. Stroke 
Tolerance determines the size of these smaller polygons, which directly 
affects the accuracy of curved surfaces displayed in the shaded image.

Settings range from 0.001 to 1000, with smaller settings providing more 
accurate representation of curved surfaces, at the cost of longer 
processing time. For general rendering, the default of 0.5 provides 
satisfactory results. For final images you may need to use a smaller 
setting.



Atmospheric distance cueing
---------------------------

In nature, when you view a landscape, distant objects fade into the 
atmospheric haze. Distance cueing simulaties atmospheric fading in 
computer-generated images. You can choose from
*  None -- No atmospheric fading is produced.
*  Depth Cueing -- Surfaces in the shaded image are faded to black as their 
distance from the eye increases.
*  Fog -- Surfaces in the shaded image are faded to the fog color as their 
distance from the eye increases.
   
Note:
Distance Cueing for a View is set in the Rendering View Attributes settings 
box, whcih is opened by choosing Rendering > View Attributes from the 
Settings menu.

You can also specify where the atmospheric fading starts to take effect, 
and the color of the "fog." This allows you to produce images with a 
realistic atmospheric haze. 

Note:
Distance Cueing, Near Distance, and Fog Color... are set in the General 
Rendering settings box, which is opened by choosing Rendering > General 
from the Settings menu.

TBD - illustrate examples



Lighting
--------

Lighting is essential for producing realistic renderings, since light 
determines what you see.

   Summary of lighting types
   Ambient
   Flashbulb
   Solar
   Point
   Distant
   Spot
   Shadows 


Summary of lighting types
-------------------------

Surfaces are visible in Constant, Smooth, and Phong shaded views because of 
the two default lighting types

Type     Description      In the Settings menu, 
                          choose:

Ambient  Equally illuminatRendering > Global Lighting
         all points of all 
         surfaces 

FlashbulbRadiates from theRendering > Global Lighting
         camera, similar to 
         a real camera's 
         flash



You can add these types of lighting:

Type     Description      In the Settings 
                          menu, choose:

Solar    Simulates light  Rendering > Global Lighting
         from the sun for a 
         specified date, 
         time, and place.

Point    Radiates light inRendering > Source Lighting
         all directions from 
         one location

Distant  Radiates light inRendering > Source Lighting
         one direction

Spot     Radiates a conicaRendering > Source Lighting
         light beam



Note:
If lights are close to surfaces being shaded, such as a spot light shining 
on a house, the exact location of the light beam may be visible only in 
Phong shading. 

Note:
Point, distant, and spot lights are actually the light cells PNTLT, DISTLT, 
and SPOTLT, respectively, from the supplied lighting cell library 
"lighting.cel." You can adjust the intensity, color, and concentration by 
editing enter data fields in light cells, but usually it is easier to use 
the Source Lighting settings box. Editing enter data fields was the only 
way to adjust source light attributes in MicroStation 4.x. If modifications 
are made to lighting cells, other than in the Source Lighting settings box, 
you must key in DEFINE LIGHTS for the new conditions to take effect. This 
applies where rendering has been run previously on the file during the 
session.



Ambient
-------

Ambient light is all-pervasive. That is, it illuminates all surfaces 
equally. It is controlled in the Global Lighting settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Rendering > Global Lighting from the Settings menu. 

The intensity of ambient light can vary from None (0) to Full (1.0), and 
its color can be adjusted. 

Because ambient light illuminates all surfaces equally, increasing its 
intensity reduces the depth, or contrast, of the shaded view. Ambient light 
is extremely useful, however, in simulating office lighting or bringing out 
detail in surfaces that would not otherwise receive light. No shadows are 
cast by ambient light.



Flashbulb
---------

Flashbulb light provides a point light source from the eye-point of the 
view (or the camera location). It is controlled in the Global Lighting 
settings box, which is opened by choosing Rendering > Global Lighting from 
the Settings menu. 

The intensity of flashbulb light can vary from None (0) to Full (1.0), and 
its color can be adjusted. Flashbulb lighting does not cast shadows.

Hint:
Because it always originates from the camera, or eye-point, of the view, 
flashbulb lighting is convenient to use for a "first try" rendering, before 
any other light sources are introduced.



Solar
-----

Solar light simulates light from the Sun. It is controlled in the Global 
Lighting settings box, which is opened by choosing Rendering > Global 
Lighting from the Settings menu. You can specify whether or not shadows are 
cast by the solar light (in Phong rendering), though this requires that the 
Shadows in the Rendering View Attributes settings box (opened by choosing 
Rendering > View Attributes) also be on. 



Point
-----

Light radiates in all directions from a point light source, similar to a 
light bulb. For example, any surface directly facing a point light is very 
bright, in a shaded view, relative to surfaces facing away from any point 
lights. 

Point lights are controlled in the Light Sources settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Rendering > Source Lighting from the Settings menu.

Point light sources do not cast shadows. They are useful for general 
lighting. For example, a point light placed above a model of a multi-level 
office block will illuminate every level, in a rendered view. This applies 
to Phong rendering as well, whether or not the Shadows attribute for the 
view is on.



Distant
-------

A distant light source provides a directional "ambient" light in one 
direction. All surfaces facing the direction of a distant light source are 
illuminated equally by it, no matter where in the design the light is 
placed. For example, a surface located behind a distant light source still 
is illuminated by it.

Distant lights are controlled in the Light Sources settings box, which is 
opened by choosing Rendering > Source Lighting from the Settings menu. You 
can specify whether or not shadows are cast by distant light sources (in 
Phong rendering), though this requires that Shadows, which is set in the 
Rendering View Attributes settings box (opened by choosing Rendering > View 
Attributes from the Settings menu), also be on. 



Spot
----

A spot light source works like a real spotlight -- a conical beam radiates 
from it. These settings let you "focus" the beam's width and edge fading
*  Cone Angle defines the beam's angle.
*  Delta Angle is the angle, outside of the beam, through which the 
intensity falls from full to zero.
   
Spot light settings are controlled in the Light Sources settings box, which 
is opened by choosing Rendering > Source Lighting from the Settings menu. 
You can specify whether or not shadows are cast by spot lights (in Phong 
rendering), though this requires that Shadows, which is set in the 
Rendering View Attributes settings box (opened by choosing Rendering > View 
Attributes from the Settings menu) also be on. 



Shadows 
--------

(Phong shading only)In Phong shading, shadows can be generated for Solar, 
Distant, and Spot light sources, if shadows are on for the view, light 
source, and material, as follows

Shadows      Setting:       Settings       Choose from Settings menu:
for:                        box:

View         Shadows        Rendering View Rendering > View Attributes
                            Attributes 

Light source Cast Shadows   Source LightingRendering > Source Lighting

Material     Shadows        Define MaterialRendering > Define Materials


Note:
Shadow maps are calculated the first time a view is shaded. Since they are 
valid for any view, they are not recalculated unless there is a change to 
the lighting. 

TBD -- effect of Shadow Filter Size and Shadow Tolerance; perhaps brief 
with Xrefs to ref guide.



Surface material definitions
----------------------------

You can assign material definitions -- attributes related to color, 
texture, transparency, and finish -- to surfaces. 
*  In MicroStation Version 5, materials are defined in a material palette. 
Material definitions can include a pattern map, a bump map, or a 
combination of both. 
*  A material assignment table assigns a material to elements on a level(s) 
with a color(s) in the design. All elements on the same level with the same 
color have the same material characteristics.
   
Type of     Suffix:Stores:        To modify, choose fromUsually 
File:                             the Settings menu:    referred to 
                                                        by:

Material    .pal   Material       Rendering > Define MatMany design 
palette            definitions                          files

Material    .mat   Assignment to  Rendering > Assign MatOne design file
assignment         levels and colors 
table              in design


Hint:
Many sample material definitions are supplied. If you do not plan to create 
your own material definitions, but want to apply material definitions to 
elements, see Assigning Materials to Elements.

   Comparison of MicroStation Version 4 and 5
   Pattern maps
   Bump maps 
   Material lighting effects
   Sample materials supplied with MicroStation


Comparison of MicroStation Version 4 and 5
------------------------------------------

In Version 4, material definitions and the assignment of materials to 
elements were both stored in material table ".m" files. Although macro 
files could be included and used to store common material characteristics, 
the combination of material definitions and assignments in one file was 
quite confusing. 

Version 4 material table ".m" files are still supported, although when you 
use the Assign Material and Define Material settings boxes, they are 
converted to the new formats.

Note:
Material tables can also be used with ModelView.



Pattern maps
------------

For increased realism, a pattern map can be included in a material 
definition. Pattern maps are raster images (patterns) that are "mapped" to 
selected surfaces in the design file, as determined by the material 
assignment table. 

You can map an image of a carpet, for example, to a shape in the design 
file that denotes the floor. When rendered, the shape takes on the 
appearance of the carpet.



Bump maps 
----------

(Phong shading only) Material definitions can include a bump map, which is 
a bitmapped black and white image. Phong shading renders the darker areas 
as high points, or "bumps," to give a textured effect to surfaces.

Bump maps can be used with pattern maps to simulate realistic surfaces. For 
example, a material definition can use a bricks and mortar pattern map, 
along with the equivalent bump map, to produce realistic bricks and mortar.



Material lighting effects
-------------------------

Rendering relies on the reflection of light off surfaces in the design 
file. Material definitions include settings for various properties that 
affect the way that lighting is treated.

   Ambient
   Diffuse
   Specular
   Finish
   Transmit
   Base Color
   Specular Color


Ambient
-------

The material's ambient light; that is the degree to which the overall 
ambient lighting is reflected by the surface, can range from no reflection 
to full reflection.
A combination of the overall Ambient light setting, together with the  
material's ambient light, determines the surface's appearance in the 
rendered image.



Diffuse
-------

The intensity of the diffuse color of the material. Can range from black 
(no diffuse color) to 100% diffuse color. 
Diffuse color is taken from the color of the design file element unless 
Base Color is on in the material definition. When Base Color is on, diffuse 
color is determined by the Base Color setting.

Hint:
By mixing the diffuse color with a pattern map, the need for many different 
pattern maps is reduced. For example, both blue and pink materials could be 
created by mixing different base colors with a single marble pattern map. 
(*Xref) to pattern map weight.



Specular
--------

The intensity of specular highlights for a material, from dull to shiny 
(for example, chrome).
A combination of the values for Specular, along with those for Finish, 
determine the way that specular highlights for a material appear in a 
rendered image.



Finish
------

The smoothness, or polish, of a surface. This affects the concentration of 
specular highlights. Ranges from rough, or low polish (for example, felt) 
to smooth, or highly polished (for example, chrome or glass).
Finish and Specular settings interact to produce specular highlights, or 
lighting "hot spots". 

A highly polished material, such as chrome, having high Specular and Finish 
values will produce concentrated, and intense (bright), specular 
highlights. 

A rough material, such as felt, having low values for Specular and Finish 
will have dull, and more spread out, specular highlights.



Transmit
--------

Sets the transmittance value of a material. That is, how transparent the 
material is. Values range from 0 to 1, where
   0 -- Opaque; material completely obscures objects behind it.
   0.5 -- Translucent; objects located behind can be partially seen through 
the material.
   1 -- Fully transparent (invisible); objects located behind the material 
are clearly visible.
   


Base Color
----------

If on, allows you to choose a diffuse color for the material. Default is 
off, in which case the color of the element in the design file is used.



Specular Color
--------------

If on, lets you choose a specular color for the material.



Sample materials supplied with MicroStation
-------------------------------------------

Sample materials are supplied in the following palette (.pal) files
*  colors, texture, artbeats, building, fabwood, finish, metal, modelvis, 
other, scanshop, stone.
   
TBD -- List and illustrate the sample materials we ship.



Assigning Materials to Elements
-------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Assign Materials.
   The Assign Materials settings box opens. By default, MicroStation uses 
assignments from the design file's material assignments table (has same 
name as the design file with the extension ".mat"). If this file is not 
found in MicroStation's "???" directory, a new material assignments table 
is created. 
   If an existing material assignments table is located, the material 
definitions from this file are displayed in the Materials list.
2. From the Assign Materials settings box's File menu, choose Open Palette.
   The Open Palette File dialog box opens.
3. Select a material palette file from the list.
4. Click the OK button.
   The Open Palette dialog box closes. The Palette list box updates with 
materials from the selected palette.
   
   To assign a material by keying in a level(s) and color(s):
   To assign a material by identifying an element:
   To use an existing material assignments table:


To assign a material by keying in a level(s) and color(s)
---------------------------------------------------------

1. In the Assign Materials settings box's Palette list box, select the 
material. 
2. From the Tools menu, choose Assign.
   The Assign Material dialog box opens.
3. In the Levels field, key in the level(s).
4. In the Colors field, key in the color(s).
5. Click the OK button.
   


To assign a material by identifying an element
----------------------------------------------

1. In the Assign Materials settings box's Palette list box, select the 
material. 
2. From the Tools menu, choose Assign By Selection.
3. Identify the element. 
4. Accept the element.
   The selected material is assigned to the level that the element is on 
and the element's color.
   


To use an existing material assignments table
---------------------------------------------

1. From the Assign Materials settings box's File menu, choose Open Material 
Table
   The Open Table File dialog box opens.
2. Select a material table file from the list.
3. Click the OK button.
   The Open Table File dialog box closes. The Materials list updates with 
materials from the selected material table.
   If desired, you can modify the material assignments.
   
4. From the Assign Materials settings box's File menu, choose Save Material 
Table As.
   The Save Table As dialog box opens. By default the material assignment 
file is given the same name as the design file, but with a ".mat" suffix.
5. Click the OK button.
   The material assignment file is saved to disk, and becomes the material 
assignment table for the design file. 
   If an existing assignment table is present, an Alert message appears 
giving you the option to replace the existing file, or Cancel.
   


Defining material characteristics
---------------------------------

Material characteristics are stored in material palette ".pal" files. 
Sample palette files with a wide selection of materials are supplied with 
MicroStation (see Sample materials supplied with MicroStation). You can use 
these materials, create your own, or modify an existing material.

Note:
It is good practice to place any materials that you create in separate 
palette files. This avoids the chance of them being overwritten with any 
software updates.

Note:
To avoid conflicts, each material's name should be unique in the material 
palette and any other material palette that might be used at the same time.

   To open a material palette:
   To modify a material definition:
   To define a new material:
   To preview changes to a material's definition:


To open a material palette
--------------------------

1. From the Settings menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Define Materials.
   The Define Materials settings box opens.
2. From the Define Materials settings box's File menu, choose Open Palette.
   The Open Palette File dialog box opens.
3. Select a palette file from the list.
4. Click the OK button.
   The Open Palette File dialog box closes. The Materials list updates to 
display the materials available in the selected palette file.
   


To modify a material definition
-------------------------------

1. Select a material from the Materials list.
   Settings for the selected material are displayed. The material is 
displayed in the Display area (unless Display is set to None).
2. Make required modifications to the material's settings.
   The Display area updates to display the current material.
3. Click the Replace button.
   The original material is replaced (in memory) by the new definition.
4. From the Define Materials settings box's File menu, choose Save Palette.
   The palette file is saved to disk, with the new material definition.
   
Note:
Modifications to material definitions take effect only when the material 
palette file is saved.



To define a new material
------------------------

1. In the Material Name field, key in the new material name.
2. Adjust the settings and select a pattern map or bump map, if required.
   After each adjustment, the Display updates to display the current 
material definition.
3. Click the Add button.
   The new material is added to the Materials list.
4. From the Define Materials settings box's File menu, choose Save Palette.
   The palette file is saved with the new material definition.
   
Note:
Your additions take effect only when the material palette file is saved.



To preview changes to a material's definition
---------------------------------------------

1. In the Define Materials settings box's Materials list, select a 
material.
2. Click the Preview button.
3. Identify an element in the model.
4. Accept the element.
   The Display area updates to show the element with the current material 
definition applied.
   
Note:
To preview the material on multiple elements, use the Element Selection 
tool to select the elements before clicking the Preview button.



Saving rendered images
----------------------

Two methods are available to save rendered images. The MDL application 
"scrncapt.ma" lets you capture the contents of your screen, while Save 
Image As saves the rendered image.

   Screen Capture and Dithering
   Save Image As
   To save a rendered image:


Screen Capture and Dithering
----------------------------

If your system cannot simultaneously display all the required colors, 
rendered images are dithered to simulate the extra colors. Dithering is the 
creation of a pattern of pixels, using available colors, to create any 
unavailable color(s). With screen capture you are limited to the number of 
colors your monitor can display. You should use Save Image As rather than 
screen capture (*Xref) if a high-quality image is required.



Save Image As
-------------

The Save Image As dialog box lets you save true-color images (also referred 
to as 24 bit or 16.7 million color images) that display or print in full 
color on a system with that capability, even if you do not have a true-clor 
display.



To save a rendered image
------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Save Image As.
   The Save Image dialog box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose the view number.
3. From the Format option menu, choose the format.
4. From the Mode option menu, choose the number of colors.
5. In the Resolution fields you can specify a different value to the 
default that appears. 
   Defaults are calculated according to the aspect ratio of the selected 
view (its height relative to its width). Changing either the X or Y value 
automatically changes the other.
6. If required, turn on Antialiased (with "jaggies" removed), Stereo, or 
both.
7. Click the Save button.
   The Save Image As dialog box opens. By default, the image file is given 
the same name as the design file, but with a suffix matching the format 
(for example, ".tif" or ".rgb")
8. Click the OK button.
   Rendering commences and the image file is saved.
   


Displaying Rendered Images
--------------------------

Rendered images that you have saved to disk can be recalled for viewing in 
MicroStation. 

   To view a saved rendered image:


To view a saved rendered image
------------------------------

1. From the File menu's Display sub-menu, choose Image.
   The Display Image File dialog box opens.
2. From the Type option menu choose the raster image format that you wish 
to view.
   The Filter updates to reflect the suffix of the file Type selected.
3. From Files list, select the file to display.
4. Click the Display button.
   The Display Image dialog box closes and a display window opens in which 
the selected file is displayed.
   


Solving Common Rendering Problems
---------------------------------

This section covers how to solve common rendering problems. 

   Screen remains blank
   Changes to light source cells do not take effect
   No shadows
   New or modified elements do not cast shadows


Screen remains blank
--------------------

Lighting illuminates the image. If no light shines on visible surfaces, the 
image stays "dark." Turn on Flashbulb in the Global Lighting settings box 
to remedy this.

>> To turn Flashbulb on and save the setting:

1. From the View menu's Rendering sub-menu, choose Global Lighting.
   The Global Lighting settings box opens.
2. Turn Flashbulb on and set its intensity at 1.0.
3. Click the Flashbulb Color button and check that it is set to white.
4. From the Command Window's File menu, choose Save Settings to save the 
new settings.
   


Changes to light source cells do not take effect
------------------------------------------------

Information about light sources is read the first time the design is 
rendered. If manual changes are then made to light sources, you must key in 
DEFINE LIGHTS to make the changes take effect. If you use the Source 
Lighting settings box (choose Rendering > Source Lighting from the Settings 
menu) to modify light sources, this key-in is not necessary.



No shadows
----------

Shadows are cast only if shadows are on for the view, light source, and 
material. For more information, see Shadows ).



New or modified elements do not cast shadows
--------------------------------------------

Shadow maps for a light source are calculated when you place it in the 
design. To save time, shadow maps are saved instead of being re-calculated 
each time a view is rendered.

You must clear the shadow maps (In the Source Lighting settings box, use 
Tools menu/Clear Shadow Map(s)) to ensure that shadows are calculated 
correctly, if you do either of the following:
*  Change the design -- add, delete, modify, or move elements.
*  Make any changes to a light source in any way except by using the 
controls in the Source Lighting settings box.
   
   



















Attaching Non-graphical Element Tags
------------------------------------

An engineering design is rarely communicated with a drawing alone. 
Non-graphical data is part of most projects; for example, material lists 
are commonly produced. MicroStation lets you attach non-graphical 
attributes or tags to elements you draw in designs.

If you delete or copy an element with attached tags, the tags are deleted 
or copied as well. If you move an element with attached tags, the tags are 
also moved.

Note:
When you open an AutoCAD drawing "DWG" file in MicroStation,  attributes 
are correctly converted and treated by exactly the same as tags that were 
attached in MicroStation. See DWG or DXF File Exchange for more 
information.

Note:
For more sophisticated usage of non-graphical data, MicroStation provides 
an interface to several external relational databases. For more 
information, see *Xref: Database Guide.

   TBD
   TBD
   Tools
   Tag Sets and Definitions
   Selecting Tagged Elements
   Reporting on Tags


TBD
---

TBD

   Preview


Preview
-------

TBD



TBD
---

TBD



Tools
-----

The Tags palette has tools for working with tags.

To:                      Use the tools in 
                         the:

Attach tags to elements, *Xref Ref Guide: Tags 
attached tags, or review palette
attached tags.

 



Tag Sets and Definitions
------------------------

Before you can attach tags to elements, you must define a tag(s). A tag 
definition specifies several tag attributes, such as whether the tag is 
displayed and its default value, if any. As a means of organizing tags, you 
can predefine sets of tags (tag sets). Tag sets are organizational; tags 
can only be individually attached to elements.

   defining a tag set:


defining a tag set
------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Tag Sets.
   The Tag Sets settings box opens.
2. In the New Set Name field, key in the set name.
3. Click the Add button.
   The new set name is displayed in the Sets list box.
4. Define each tag in the set. See To define a tag:.
   
   To define a tag:
   To edit a tag definition:
   To remove a tag set definition (and all instances of the set's member 
tags in the design):
   To remove a tag definition (and all instances of the tag in the design):


To define a tag
---------------

1. In the Tag Sets settings box, select the set to which you want to add 
the tag in the Sets list box.
2. Click the Add button in the Tags section of the settings box.
   The Define Tag dialog box opens.
3. Key in the tag name in the Tag Name field.
4. (Optional) To customize the prompt for keying in the tag value that 
appears in the Tag Value dialog box when using the Attach Tag tool, key in 
the desired text in the Prompt field.
5. (Optional) To use a predefined style to format the value when displayed, 
select a style name in the Text Style list box.
6. From the Type option menu, choose the tag data type (Character, Integer, 
or Real).
7. (Optional) To cause the Attach Tag tool to display an alert box to 
confirm the value keyed in in the Tag Value dialog box, turn on Confirm.
   or
   To cause the use of the default value upon attachment of the tag (and 
prevent the Tag Value dialog box from opening), turn on Default.
8. (Optional) To define a default value for the tag, key in the value in 
the Default Tag Value field.
9. (Optional) To prevent the tag value from being displayed with each 
element to which the tag is attached, turn off Display Tag.
10.Click the OK button.
   The tag is listed in the Tags list box in the Tag Sets settings box.
   


To edit a tag definition
------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Tags.
   The Tag Sets settings box opens.
2. Select the set in the Sets list box.
3. Select the tag in the Tags list box.
4. Click the Edit button.
   The Define Tag dialog box opens.
5. (Optional) Key in the tag name in the Tag Name field.
6. (Optional) To customize the prompt for keying in the tag value that 
appears in the Tag Value dialog box when using the Attach Tag tool, key in 
the desired text in the Prompt field.
7. (Optional) To use a predefined style to format the value when displayed, 
select a style name in the Text Style list box.
8. From the Type option menu, choose the tag data type (Character, Integer, 
or Real).
9. (Optional) To cause the Attach Tag tool to display an alert box to 
confirm the value keyed in in the Tag Value dialog box, turn on Confirm.
   or
   To cause the use of the default value upon attachment of the tag (and 
prevent the Tag Value dialog box from opening), turn on Default.
10.(Optional) To define a default value for the tag, key in the value in 
the Default Tag Value field.
11.(Optional) To prevent the tag value from being displayed with each 
element to which the tag is attached, turn off Display Tag.
12.Click the OK button.
   


To remove a tag set definition (and all instances of the set's member tags 
in the design)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Tags.
   The Tag Sets settings box opens.
2. In the Sets list box, select the set you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove button.
   An alert box opens, which asks if you are sure you want to remove the 
tag set definition and all instances of the set's member tags.
4. If you are sure, click the OK button.
   


To remove a tag definition (and all instances of the tag in the design)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Tags.
   The Tag Sets settings box opens.
2. In the Tags list box, select the tag you want to remove.
3. Click the Remove button.
   An alert box opens, which asks if you are sure you want to remove the 
tag definition and all instances of the tag.
4. If you are sure, click the OK button.
   


Selecting Tagged Elements
-------------------------

One of the most useful aspects of attaching tags is that you can easily 
select groups of elements whose tag values are equal to or fall within (or 
on either side) of a specified range. For example, TBD.

   Using Tag Values as Selection Criteria


Using Tag Values as Selection Criteria
--------------------------------------

1. From the Edit menu, choose Select By.
   The Selector settings box opens. The second option menu in the Mode 
section should be set to Selection.
2. (Optional) Use the controls in the Selector settings box to specify 
selection criteria based on graphical element attributes such as color and 
type. See *Xref: 202_Edit.fra.
3. Click the Properties button.
   The Select Tags settings box opens.
4. Use the controls in the Select Tags settings box to specify selection 
criteria based on tag values. See To specify selection criteria based on 
tag values:.
5. In the Selector settings box, click the Execute button.
   The elements meeting the specified selection criteria are selected and 
bracketed with handles.
   
Note:
The above procedure can be adapted for locating (highlighting) elements or 
filtering their display based on their tag values. The effect of the 
Execute button in the Selector settings box is controlled with the second 
option menu in the Mode section, which is set to Selection by default. For 
more information, see *Xref: 202_Edit.fra.

   To specify selection criteria based on tag values:


To specify selection criteria based on tag values
-------------------------------------------------

1. In the Select Tags settings box, select a tag name in the Tag list box.
2. In the Operator list box, select an operator, such as equal to or 
greater than.
3. In the Expression field, key in a value that is valid for the tag 
selected in the Tag list box.
4. Click the Insert button.
   The first criterion is displayed and automatically selected in the 
Criteria list box.
5. (Optional) If you want to specify additional criteria and the next 
criterion will not be mutually exclusive to the first, click the Or button.
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 1-4 for each additional criteria you want to 
specify. For each newly specified criterion that will not be mutually 
exclusive to the next, select the new criterion in the Criteria list box, 
and click the Or button.
   
Note:
If selection criteria based on tag values are specified, elements that do 
not have attached tags with the specified tag name(s) will not be selected.



Reporting on Tags
-----------------

You can generate many different variations of reports on tags. A report can 
only contain tags from a single set.

   generating a report:


generating a report
-------------------

1. From the File menu's Tag Reporting sub-menu, choose Generate Template.
   The Generate Template dialog box opens.
2. In the Tag Sets list box, select the set that contains the tags on which 
you want to report.
3. For each tag on which you want to report, select the tag in the Tags 
list box, and click the Add button.
   The tags are added to the Report Columns list box.
4. TBD


Labeling Designs
----------------

Make sure Data Fields is turned on in the views.

Right now, "sample.cel" is in \ustation\wsmod\default\cell. Are we going to 
have a learning workspace?

   Labeling a Design
   Dimensioning
   Tools
   Using Line Terminators
   Using Text
   Dimensioning
   Feature Control Frames
   Hatching and Patterning


Labeling a Design
-----------------

   Preview


Preview
-------

There is a floor plan design, "floor.dgn," in MicroStation's "learning" 
directory (in the "dgn" subdirectory). In this lesson, you will label the 
floor plan by adding
*  Dimensions
*  Notes
   
These tools are introduced in this lesson:
*  Dimension Size with Arrows
*  Dimension Element
*  Place Text
*  Auto Fill in Enter Data Fields
   
   If you have trouble
   About "floor.dgn"


If you have trouble
-------------------

If you have trouble when going through the lesson, doing one of the 
following usually helps
*  Reset, by pressing the Reset button. This is most helpful when you have 
trouble using a tool.
*  Undo, by choosing Undo from the Edit menu. This is most helpful after 
you finish using a tool and realize you've made a mistake. Remember 
MicroStation lets you undo more than just the last operation.
*  "Undo" a change made with a view control by choosing Previous from the 
View menu and selecting a view. This is helpful if you use a view control 
to zoom or window an area and lose your bearings.
   


About "floor.dgn"
-----------------

The design in "floor.dgn" is a simple office floor plan. A concrete slab 
that underlies the office building is represented by a red rectangle on 
Level 3, "Slab." The exterior walls are yellow multi-lines on Level 1, 
"Exterior." (The corner of the slab outside the exterior wall is a patio.) 
The interior walls are multi-lines with yellow and blue component lines on 
Level 2, "Drywall." Doors, jambs, and sweeps are placed on Levels 4, 5, and 
6, "Doors," "Jambs," and "Sweeps."

Working units in "floor.dgn" are feet (') and inches ("). Points on the 
grid are located on inch apart. Reference points on the grid are one foot 
apart. The design is oriented geographically so that the top of the screen 
is north, the bottom south, the right east, and the left west.



Dimensioning
------------

>> Open "floor.dgn" and adjust settings for dimensioning:

1. Open the design file "floor.dgn," which is in MicroStation's 
"dgn\learning" directory.
2. Open the Lock Toggles settings box and change (or confirm) these 
settings:
   * Grid Lock -- off
   * Snap Lock -- on
3. From the Elements menu, choose Text.
   The Text settings box opens.
4. In the Text settings box, change (or confirm) these settings:
   * Font -- 3 - Engineering
   * Height -- 0:9
   * Width -- 0:6
5. Set the active level to Dims (by keying in LV=DIMS).
6. Set the active color to cyan (7) (by keying in CO=7).
7. Set the active line weight to 1 (by keying in WT=1).
   
>> Dimension the south masonry wall:

1. From the Palettes menu's Dimensioning sub-menu, choose Dimensioning to 
open the Dimensioning palette.
2. In the upper right corner of the Dimensioning palette, tear off and 
float the Linear Dimensions sub-palette.
3. Turn on Association Lock in the Linear Dimensions sub-palette's 
pop-down.
   When you place dimensions, they will be associated with elements in the 
design. If the elements are moved, the dimensions will update to reflect 
the new distances between the dimension endpoints. 
   You can also turn the Association Lock off and on in the Locks and Lock 
Toggles settings boxes. For more information about the Association Lock, 
see *XRef.
4. Select the Dimension Size with Arrows tool, the leftmost tool in the 
Linear Dimensions sub-palette.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select start of dimension."
5. Enter a data point on the southwest (lower left) corner of the building 
(preview with a tentative point).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Define length of extension line."
6. Enter a data point about 10 feet to the south to define the extension 
line (extension line) length. The extension line extends from the points 
being dimensioned to the dimension line.
   The dimension is dynamically displayed.
7. Enter a data point on the south-southeast corner of the building 
(preview with a tentative point). This indicates the dimension endpoint. Be 
sure you snap to the multi-line that represents the masonry walls.
   The south masonry wall (21') is dimensioned.
8. Enter a data point on the southeast corner of the slab (preview with a 
tentative point).
   The south edge of the patio (21') is dimensioned.
9. Reset to place the dimensions.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Define length of extension line."
   
>> Dimension the south-east masonry wall and patio:

1. Enter a data point about 10 feet east of the east masonry wall to define 
the extension line direction and length.
   The north-south dimension is dynamically displayed.
2. Enter a data point on the east-southeast corner of the building (preview 
with a tentative point).
   The east edge of the patio (21') is dimensioned.
3. Enter a data point on the northeast corner of the building (preview with 
a tentative point).
4. The east masonry wall (39') is dimensioned.
5. Reset to place the dimensions.
   
Pause here and squint at the dimension text. Is it really text or is it 
boxes with "Xs" in them? The size threshold above which MicroStation draws 
text is a user preference.

>> Set the preference so that text is drawn regardless of its size.

1. From the User menu, choose Preferences to open the Preferences dialog 
box.
2. In the Preferences dialog box's Category list box, select Text.
   The controls for text display and editing preferences are displayed in 
the Preferences dialog box.
3. Key in 0 (zero) in the Smallest Text field.
4. Click the OK button.
   The dimension text is displayed. (You may have to update the view to see 
the text.)
   
Hint:
When working with files containing a lot of text, you may find it 
convenient to set the Smallest Text setting higher. That will prevent 
MicroStation from taking the time to draw text that may be too small to 
read.

>> Dimension the south edge of the slab:

1. In the lower left corner of the Dimensioning palette, select the 
Dimension Element tool. This tool is the logical choice for this task 
because the concrete slab is represented by a block.
2. To identify the block, enter a data point on the segment that represents 
the south edge of the slab. (Do not preview with a tentative point. If the 
wrong element is selected, Reset until the desired element is selected.)
   The dimension is dynamically displayed.
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet south of the existing 21' dimensions.
   The south edge of the slab (42') is dimensioned.
   The Dimension Element tool remains selected.
   
>> Dimension the east edge of the slab:

1. Enter a data point to identify the block on the segment that represents 
the east edge. (Do not preview with a tentative point.)
2. Enter a data point about 3 feet east of the existing north-south 
dimensions.
   The east edge of the slab (60') is dimensioned.
   
To dimension the diagonal (southeast) masonry wall, begin with the portion 
from the south-southeast corner of the building to the front doorway 
opening. Window as appropriate, and remember there are more than just two 
views available for your use. Consider opening a third view with the View 
menu's Open/Close sub-menu so you can see the south-southeast corner of the 
building and each door jamb.

>> Dimension the diagonal masonry wall:

1. Select the Dimension Size with Arrows tool.
   The Linear Dimensions palette should be floating. If it is not, tear it 
from the Dimension palette and float it.
2. Enter a data point on the south-southeast corner of the building 
(preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 5 feet to the southeast to define the extension 
line length.
   The dimension that is dynamically displayed is parallel to a view's y 
axis (horizontal). You need the dimension to be parallel to the southeast 
masonry wall.
4. From the Alignment option menu in the Linear Dimension palette's 
pop-down, choose True.
   The dynamic dimension now rotates about the first point as you move the 
pointer. (The Alignment control also appears in the Dimension Placement 
settings box, which you open by choosing Placement from the Element menu's 
Dimension sub-menu.)
5. Enter a data point on the southwest outer corner of the front doorway 
opening (preview with a tentative point).
   The dimension line is parallel to the wall. The dimension is 13'-2 1/4".
   The Dimension Size with Arrows tool remains selected, and a second 
dimension is dynamically displayed. Continue to dimension the southeast 
masonry wall.
6. Enter a data point on the northeast outer corner of the front doorway 
opening (preview with a tentative point).
   The front doorway width dimension is 3'-4".
7. Enter a data point on the east-southeast corner of the building (preview 
with a tentative point).
   The dimension is 13'-2 1/4".
8. Reset to place the dimensions.
   
>> Dimension the southeast masonry wall in its entirety:

1. Reset again.
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the southern corner of the diagonal masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point to the southeast to define a extension line length 
about 3 feet longer than the extension lines in the previous dimensions.
4. Enter a data point on the northern corner of the diagonal masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
5. Reset to place the dimension (29'-8 3/8").
6. Set Alignment back to View in the Linear Dimensions sub-palette's 
pop-down.
   
   Typical dimensions
   Interior dimensions
   Adding Notes


Typical dimensions
------------------

Typical dimensions are usually placed in the lower left corner of a 
drawing.

>> Dimension the masonry wall thickness, placing the dimension near the 
southwest corner of the building:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the outside southwest corner (preview with a 
tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet to the south to define the extension 
line length.
4. Enter a data point on the inside southwest corner (preview with a 
tentative point).
5. Reset to place the dimension (1'-1 1/4").
   
>> Dimension the typical distance from room corner to doorway, placing the 
dimension in the room near the southwest corner of the building:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the doorway opening at its corner 1' to the west 
of the northeast corner of the room (preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet to the south to define the extension 
line length.
4. Enter a data point on the northeast corner of the room (preview with a 
tentative point).
5. Reset to place the dimension (1').
   
>> Dimension the interior wall thickness, placing the dimension in the next 
room to the north:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. From the Element menu's Dimensions sub-menu, choose Placement.
   The Dimension Placement settings box opens.
3. In the Dimension Placement settings box, click the Extension lines check 
button to specify that dimensions be placed without extension lines (turn 
the check button off).
4. Enter a data point on the southeast corner of the room (preview with a 
tentative point).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Define length of extension line." 
Although the Extension lines setting is off, you still need to define the 
location of the dimension line.
5. Enter a data point about halfway between the south wall and the door in 
the east wall to define the location of the dimension line.
   The dimension is dynamically displayed without extension lines.
6. Enter a data point on the southwest corner of the central reception area 
(preview with a tentative point). The reception area is the central area of 
the floor plan onto which the office doors open.
7. Reset to place the dimension (4").
   
The other typical dimension is the width of the entry hallway between each 
partition and the adjacent doorway opening.

>> Dimension the width of the entry hallway:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Set Alignment to True in the Linear Dimensions palette's pop-down or in 
the Dimension Placement settings box.
3. Turn Extension lines on in the Dimension Placement settings box.
4. Enter a data point on the center line of the northernmost partition 
between the entry hallway and the adjacent room at its intersection with 
the southeast masonry wall (preview with a tentative point).
5. Enter a data point about 3 feet northwest of the southeast masonry wall 
to define the dimension line endpoint.
6. Enter a data point on the southeast masonry wall at the closest point 
where it is broken for the front doorway (preview with a tentative point).
   The dimension is 1'-5".
7. Turn Extension lines back off.
   
The notation "(TYP.)" is standard for typical dimensions. You will annotate 
these dimensions later.



Interior dimensions
-------------------

Standard interior size dimensions are between center lines of interior 
partitions. However, when an interior size is dimensioned to an exterior 
wall, the dimension is to the interior face of the exterior wall.

Begin placing interior dimensions in the room to the right (north) of the 
entry hallway. You may want to open two views with high magnification of 
the ends of the wall being dimensioned in order to snap accurately to them.

>> Dimension from the interior face of the southeast masonry wall to the 
partition that represents the room's northwest wall:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the room's southwest wall at the partition's intersection with the 
southeast masonry wall (preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point approximately half the distance to the northeast 
toward the east corner of the room.
4. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the room's northwest wall (preview with a tentative point).
5. Reset to place the dimension (12').
6. Set Alignment back to View.
   
So far, MicroStation has automatically centered dimension text along 
dimension lines. The Text Location setting in the Dimension Placement 
settings box controls where dimension text is located.

In the next series of dimensions, you will need to manually place some 
dimension text so it will not obscure other dimensions in the completed 
drawing. 

Now you will dimension the north-south size of each room, proceeding 
northward to the north masonry wall. You might find panning to be an easy 
way to control the view contents for this procedure because each data point 
is north of the previous one. There is no need to Reset when you alternate 
between panning and using the Dimension Size with Arrows tool.

>> Dimension the north-south size of the three rooms:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the south wall of the first rectangular room proceeding northward (preview 
with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet west of the east masonry wall to define 
the dimension line endpoint.
4. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the north wall of the room (preview with a tentative point).
   The north-south room dimension is 10'.
5. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the north wall of the next room to the north (preview with a tentative 
point).
   The north-south room dimension is also 10'.
6. Set Location to Manual in the Dimension Placement settings box.
7. Enter a data point on the interior face of the north masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
   The prompt in the Command Window is "Place dimensioning text", and the 
dimension text (11'-10") is dynamically displayed for positioning.
8. Enter a data point to position the dimension text a little south of what 
would be automatic placement (center justified). This positioning will 
prevent the east-west dimension you will place later from overlaying the 
text.
9. Reset to place the dimensions.
   
Hint:
Instead of using manual dimension text location, you could have used the 
Modify Element tool to move the dimension text after it was placed.

There is space for the east-west dimension of the rectangular rooms on the 
east side in the northernmost of the two rooms.

>> Dimension the east-west size of the two rectangular rooms on the east 
side of the building:

1. Set Location back to Automatic in the Dimension Placement settings box.
2. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
3. Enter a data point at the doorway on the center line of the partition 
that represents the west wall of the room (preview with a tentative point).
4. Enter a data point about 3 feet north of the doorway to define the 
dimension line endpoint.
5. Enter a data point on the interior face of the east masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
6. Reset to place the dimension (12').
   
>> Dimension the east-west sizes of the rooms in the north end of the 
building, proceeding from east to west:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the intersection of the interior faces of the 
north and east masonry walls (preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet south of the north masonry wall to 
define the dimension line endpoint.
4. Enter a data point on the center line of the north-south partition 
between the two rooms (preview with a tentative point).
   The east-west room dimension is 27'-9 1/2".
5. Enter a data point on the interior face of the west masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
   The east-west room dimension is 12'.
6. Reset to place the dimensions.
   
>> Dimension the north-south sizes of the rooms on the west side of the 
building:

1. Reset until the Dimension Size with Arrows prompt in the Command Window 
is "Select start of dimension."
2. Enter a data point on the intersection of the interior faces of the 
north and west masonry walls (preview with a tentative point).
3. Enter a data point about 3 feet east of the west masonry wall to define 
the dimension line endpoint.
4. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the south wall of the room in the northwest corner of the building (preview 
with a tentative point).
   The north-south room dimension is 27'-7 1/2".
5. Enter a data point on the center line of the partition that represents 
the south wall of the next room to the south (preview with a tentative 
point).
   The north-south room dimension is 18'.
6. Enter a data point on the interior face of the south masonry wall 
(preview with a tentative point).
   The north-south room dimension is 12'-2".
7. Reset to place the dimensions.
   
With that, all plan dimensions necessary to construct the building are 
placed.



Adding Notes
------------

Next, you will add notes to the design as text elements. When you are 
instructed to "type" text in the Text Editor window, do not press <Return> 
at the end of the text.

>> Set the active level to Notes:

1. In the Command Window, key in LV=NOTES.
   
You placed the 1'-1 1/4" masonry wall thickness dimension near the 
southwest corner of the building.

>> Note the 1'-1 1/4" masonry wall thickness dimension as typical:

1. Select the Place Text tool in the Main palette.
   The Text Editor window opens.
2. Type (TYP.) in the Text Editor (do not press <Return>).
   The text is dynamically displayed at the active angle; if the active 
angle is not 0d, open the Active Angle settings box from the Settings menu 
and set the active angle to 0d. Do not be concerned, however, if the text 
is in a different font and not scaled exactly the same as the text in the 
figure on the first page of this chapter.
3. Enter a data point to position the text below the dimension text. Leave 
the Text Editor open.
   While the Place Text tool is selected, the text "(TYP.)" is dynamically 
displayed. 
   
>> Annotate the other typical dimensions:

1. Enter a data point to position the text below the dimension text "1'-0"" 
in the room in the southwest corner of the building. Leave the Text Editor 
open.
2. Enter a data point to position the text below the dimension text "4"" in 
the next room to the north. Leave the Text Editor open.
3. Set the active angle to 45d-- the alternate key-in AA=45 is a fast way 
to do so. Before entering this key-in, you must first press <Esc> or click 
in the Command Window to give that window the focus for keyboard input.
4. Enter a data point to position the rotated text below the dimension text 
"1'-5"" adjacent to the entry hallway. Leave the Text Editor open.
5. Set the active angle back to 0d (by keying in AA=45 in the Command 
Window). 
   
The room label notes will be violet and slightly larger and heavier than 
the dimension text.

>> Change the appropriate settings:

1. Set the active color to violet (5) by keying in CO=5 in the Command 
Window.
2. Set the active line weight to 1 by keying in WT=1 in the Command Window.
3. From the Element menu, choose Text to open the Text settings box.
4. In the Height field, key in 1 to set the active text height to 1'.
5. Key in :9 in the Width field to set the active text width to 9".
6. Key in :6 in the Line Spacing field to set the active line spacing to 
6".
   
Suppose the client requires that the rooms adjacent to the entry hallway 
and the room in the northeast corner be numbered offices. To label the 
rooms, you can use enter data fields as placeholders for future entry of 
office numbers. Make the fields three characters long to allow space for 
three digit office numbers.

>> Place the enter data fields:

1. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
2. Type Office _ _ _ in the Text Editor. (Type a space after "Office" and 
press the underscore key (<Shift-Hyphen>) three times to enter the last 
three characters.)
   The text is dynamically displayed.
3. Enter three data points in succession in the fitted view to place the 
text in the numbered offices, starting with the office southwest of the 
entry hallway and finishing with the office in the northeast corner.
   
>> Label the other offices on the east side of the building:

1. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
2. Type Kim in the Text Editor.
3. Enter a data point to position the text in the rectangular office north 
of the odd-shaped office on the east side of the building.
4. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
5. Type Ray.
6. Enter a data point to position the text in the next office to the north.
   
>> Label the rooms on the west side of the building:

1. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
2. Type Library in the Text Editor.
3. Enter a data point to position the text in the library in the northwest 
corner of the building.
4. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
5. Type Kitchen.
6. Enter a data point to position the text in the next room to the south.
7. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
8. Type Storage.
9. Enter a data point to position the text in the room in the southwest 
corner of the building.
   
>> Label the central reception area:

1. Click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in the window.
2. Type Reception in the Text Editor, and then press <Return>.
   The insertion point moves to the second line in the window.
3. Type Area.
   Because you typed more than just one line of text, MicroStation will 
place the text as a text node. A block that denotes the range of the text 
node is dynamically displayed.
4. Enter a data point to position the text node in the reception area.
   
The text node is displayed with a small cross and a text node 
identification number. These are useful when placing empty text nodes that 
will be filled with text later.

>> Turn display of text node numbers off in the fitted view:

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes to open the View Attributes 
settings box.
2. If necessary, choose 2 [??] from the View Number option menu.
3. Turn off Text Nodes and click the Apply button.
   
At this point, the client tells you the office numbering scheme. The 
odd-shaped offices, from west to east, are #101 and #102. The office in the 
northeast corner of the building is #105. 

>> Fill in the enter data fields:

1. Open the Enter Data Fields sub-palette from the Main palette and select 
the Auto Fill in Enter Data Fields tool.
   If you closed the Text Editor after placing the last text, the box 
reopens.
2. Select the fitted view.
   The text element in office 101 highlights (the oldest text element in 
the view that has an enter data field). The enter data field is denoted by 
a rectangle.
3. If necessary, click the Text Editor's Reset button to clear the text in 
the window.
4. Key in 101. (Remember that "key in" means to press <Return> after typing 
the text.)
   The enter data field is filled in, meaning office 101 is properly 
labeled. The text element, with enter data field, in office 102 highlights. 
(If you make any mistakes, complete step 5, and then use the Fill in Single 
Enter Data Field tool to make corrections.)
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for office 102 and office 105.
6. Use the View Attributes settings box to turn off the display of enter 
data field characters (underscores) in the fitted view. The check button is 
labeled Data Fields.
   
Two cells that you will use to construct the north arrow are stored in the 
"sample.cel" cell library (in "ustation\wsmod\default\cell\."

>> Attach "sample.cel" to the design file:

1. From the File menu's Cell Library sub-menu, choose Attach to open the 
Attach Cell Library dialog box. [Where is it going to be?]
2. Select "sample.cel," and click OK.
   
>> Browse the newly attached cell library:

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells to open the Cells settings box.
2. For each of the two cells, select the cell name in the list box and look 
at the graphics in the box to the right. Observe the ARROW cell is the 
arrowhead and the DIRECT cell is used to indicate direction. Then leave the 
settings box open for the next procedure.
   
>> Activate the ARROW cell for placement:

1. In the Cells settings box, select ARROW.
2. Click the Placement button.
   
Now you will place the ARROW cell east of the east masonry wall and 
exterior dimensions so that the arrowhead points to the north.

>> Place the ARROW cell:

1. Open the Cells sub-palette from the Main palette, tear off the 
sub-palette, and select the Place Active Cell tool.
   The active cell, ARROW, is dynamically displayed to aid placement. The 
cell points to the east.
2. In the pop-down Active Angle field, key in 90. (Let the sub-palette 
float for the next procedure.)
   The dynamically displayed cell now points to the north.
3. Enter a data point to position the cell.
   
>> Place the DIRECT cell:

1. In the pop-down Active Cell field of the Cells sub-palette, key in 
DIRECT.
2. In the Active Angle field, key in 0.
3. Select the Place Active Cell tool.
4. Enter a data point on the midpoint of the arrowhead base (preview with a 
tentative point).
   
The north arrow is in place. At this point the design should look like the 
figure on the first page of this chapter.



Tools
-----

The most precise technical drawing is of little help without explanatory 
labels, including text and dimensions. Using MicroStation's associative 
dimensioning and patterning saves time and helps insure that the labels in 
a design are accurate, even after the design has been altered. These are 
the six palettes that contain labeling tools

To:                      Use the tools in 
                         the:

Place text in a design   *Xref: Text sub-palette

Dimension an angle       *Xref: Angular 
                         Dimensions sub-palette

Dimension a linear distan*Xref: Linear Dimensions 
                         sub-palette

Dimension a radius       *Xref: Radial Dimensions 
                         sub-palette

Dimension a segment of an*Xref: Miscellaneous 
element, dimension ordinaDimensions sub-palette
label a line, or place a note

Pattern an area          *Xref: Patterning 
                         palette





Using Line Terminators
----------------------

A line terminator may be anything from a simple arrowhead at the end of a 
line in a 2D design file to a cell representing a complex mechanism at the 
end of a pipe in a 3D design file.

   To designate a cell as the active line terminator:


To designate a cell as the active line terminator
-------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the cell.
3. Click the Terminator button.
   OR
1. In the Cells sub-palette, select the Place Active Line Terminator tool.
2. In the Terminator tool setting field, key in the cell name.
   


Using Text
----------

Text is useful for including any kind of useful information other than 
dimensions in a design.

As an element type, text differs in several obvious ways from other types 
of elements.

These attributes apply exclusively to text and text node elements:
*  font -- Text is placed in the Active Font. To change the selection of 
fonts, see *Xref: in Ch. 15, Creating Custom Modules.
*  justification -- TBD
*  text size (height and width) -- TBD
   
Text that exceeds the Active Line Length is automatically converted to a 
text node. Text nodes have a line spacing attribute, which is the space 
between each line of text.

   To turn the display of text on or off in one or more views:
   To turn the display of text on or off in all views:
   Setting Active Text Attributes:
   Text Editor window
   Enter data fields
   Importing text
   View independent text


To turn the display of text on or off in one or more views
----------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view.
3. Turn the Text check box on or off.
4. Click the Apply button.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for additional views.
   


To turn the display of text on or off in all views
--------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. Turn the Text check box on or off.
3. Click the All button.
   
Note:
For more information about the View Attributes settings box, see 
*XrefRefGd.



Setting Active Text Attributes
------------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Text.
   The Text settings box opens.
2. (Optional) To set the Active Font, choose the desired font from the Font 
option menu, or key in the font number in the Font field. If you wish, you 
can browse through the font selection by clicking the View button (see To 
browse fonts:).
3. (Optional) To set the Active Text Size, key in the Active Text Height 
and the Active Text Width, in working units (MU:SU:PU), in the Height and 
Width fields, respectively. To set the Active Text Height and Active Text 
Width to the same values (useful for TBD), click the lock control.
4. To set the Active Line Spacing, key in the desired distance, in working 
units (MU:SU:PU) in the Line Spacing field.
5. To set the Active Line Length, key in the desired length, in characters, 
in the Line Length field.
6. (Optional) To ... TBD ... , key in the desired distance, in working 
units (MU:SU:PU), in the Intercharacter Spacing field.
7. (Optional) To set the Active Text Justification, click in the quadrant 
of the Text String block that corresponds to the desired setting or choose 
the desired setting from the two option menus beneath the Text String 
block.
8. (Optional) To set the Active Text Node Justification, click in the 
quadrant of the Multi-line Text block that corresponds to the desired 
setting or choose the desired setting from the two option menus beneath the 
Multi-line Text block.
9. (Optional) To cause numeric characters separated by a slash (/) to be 
placed as single characters (numerator over denominator), turn on 
Fractions.
10.(Optional) To make text underlined, turn on Underline.
11.(Optional) To have each letter in text be placed below  (rather than to 
the right of) the previous letter, turn on Vertical Text.
12.(Optional) To set the degree to which text is slanted from vertical 
(90d), key in the desired angle, in degrees, in the Slant field. Positive 
values make text slant to the right; negative values make text slant to the 
left. A value of 0 is used for normal text (in which vertical components 
are at an angle of 90d from the x axis).
   
Hint:
Traditional MicroStation fonts usually look best when the active text width 
is about three-quarters of the active text height.

   To browse fonts:
   To graphically set the active text height: 
   To graphically set the active text width:
   To change the active text attribute settings to match the attributes of 
a previously placed text element:
   To place empty text nodes as placeholders for text to be added later:


To browse fonts
---------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Text.
   The Text settings box opens.
2. Click the View button.
   The Fonts settings box opens.
3. To see a type sample for a font, select the font in the list box.
   The font sample is shown on the large button beneath the list box.
4. (Optional) To set the Active Font to the selected font, click the large 
button.
   


To graphically set the active text height 
------------------------------------------

1. Key in ACTIVE TXHEIGHT PT2.
2. Enter a data point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the height.
   The active text height is set to me distance between the two points.
   


To graphically set the active text width
----------------------------------------

1. Key in ACTIVE TXWIDTH PT2.
2. Enter a data point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the width.
   The active text width is set to the distance between the two points.
   


To change the active text attribute settings to match the attributes of a 
previously placed text element
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Element menu, choose Text.
   The Text settings box opens.
2. In the Text settings box, click the Match button.
3. Identify the previously placed text element.
4. Enter a data point to accept the match.
   OR
1. In the Main palette's Text sub-palette, select the Match Text Attributes 
tool.
2. Identify the previously placed text element.
3. Enter a data point to accept the match.
   


To place empty text nodes as placeholders for text to be added later
--------------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Text sub-palette, select the Place Text Node 
tool.
2. (Optional) To make the text node view independent (readable in every 
view, no matter what its rotation), in the Text sub-palette's pop-down, 
turn on the View Independent check box.
3. Enter a data point to position the first text node's origin.
4. Reset to place the text node at the active angle.
   or
   Enter a data point to define the angle at which the text node is 
positioned.
5. To place more text nodes, repeat steps 2 through 4.
   (To add text to an empty text node, use the Place Text tool. See *XRef 
"Placing text".)
   


Text Editor window
------------------

Selecting a text placement or editing tool causes the Text Editor window to 
open, unless it is already open. Input from the keyboard (the letter keys 
and arrow keys) is treated as text input until the <Esc> key is pressed, 
another tool is selected, or the Command Window is clicked.

You can edit text in the Text Editor window (and in text fields in 
MicroStation dialog and settings boxes) using these functions:
*  New text is placed at the insertion point, which is indicated by a 
vertical bar. Click within text to place the insertion point. See "Moving 
the insertion point (*XRef)" for information about using the keyboard to 
move the insertion point.
*  New characters are inserted at the insertion point in the default insert 
mode. To toggle between insert mode and overwrite mode (in which each new 
character overwrites an existing character), press the <Ins> key.
*  The available options for text editing are covered in "Editing text 
(*XRef)."
*  After editing text, to restore the contents of a text field in a dialog 
box or settings box to its original value, press <Alt-Backspace>.
*  Enter data fields (*XRef) can be used as placeholders into which text is 
later inserted. 
   
   To replace text:
   To move text:
   To copy text:
   To insert a new line:


To replace text
---------------

1. Select the text. See *XRef"Selecting text."
2. Type the new text.
   The typed text replaces the selected text. 
   
Note:
You can switch between insert and overwrite modes by pressing the <Ins> 
key. Overwrite never replaces the small dot that denotes the end of a line 
in multi-line text (text nodes). Selecting text and typing the new text is 
usually more efficient than text editing in overwrite mode.



To move text
------------

1. Select the text. See *XRef"Selecting text."
2. Press <Shift-Del> or <Ctrl-X>.
3. Place the insertion point where the text is to be moved or copied. (If 
the text is to replace text, select the text to be replaced.)
4. Press <Shift-Ins> or <Ctrl-V>.
   


To copy text
------------

1. Select the text. See "Selecting text."
2. Press <Ctrl-Ins> or <Ctrl-C>.
3. Place the insertion point where the text is to be copied.  (If the text 
is to replace text, select the text to be replaced.)
4. Press <Shift-Ins> or <Ctrl-V>.
   


To insert a new line
--------------------

1. Press <Return>. 
   Multi-line text is automatically placed as a text node. Text elements 
are converted to text nodes if lines are added, and text nodes are 
converted to text elements if all except one line is deleted.
   


Enter data fields
-----------------

An enter data field is a one-or-more-character placeholder for future text 
input. You can insert empty enter data fields in a text element and fill in 
the actual text later. Enter data fields are particularly useful for 
variable text such as part numbers or detail numbers.

   To create an enter data field:


To create an enter data field
-----------------------------

1. Type the enter data field character ("_" by default) for every character 
in the enter data field. 
2. (Optional) Use the JUSTIFY key-in to change the justification of an 
enter data field. (All enter data fields are left justified when created.)
3. Key in a matched pair of field delimiters. Text can then be inserted 
between the delimiters.
   
What is all this about delimiters?????

To remove an enter data field, delete either the left or right bracket 
delimiter. The matching delimiter is automatically deleted. The text 
between the delimiters remains, but is no longer part of an enter data 
field.

Note:
The enter data field character (*XRef) is set in the Preferences dialog 
box. 



Importing text
--------------

You do not have to create all text to be placed in your design in the Text 
Editor dialog box. You can import text from a text file.

   To place the contents of a text file in the design:
   Glossary files
   To create a glossary file:
   To place text from a glossary file in the design:


To place the contents of a text file in the design
--------------------------------------------------

1. (Optional) To set the number of space characters that will be 
substituted for each Tab character in the file, key in ACTIVE TAB [spaces] 
or TB=[spaces].
2. From the File menu's Import sub-menu, choose Text.
   The Include Text File dialog box opens.
3. Select the file and click OK.
   The text contained in the file is dynamically displayed.
4. Enter a data point to position the text.
   If the file is larger than 128 lines or 2048 characters, the text is 
placed as a graphic group and the data point positions the upper left 
corner of the text block.
   Otherwise, the text is placed as a text node and the data point 
positions the text node origin.
   
Note:
The file can include MicroStation key-in strings to set text attributes 
(such as the font, text size, line spacing, and line length) and special 
control strings to specify indentation and graphic grouping. For more 
information, see *Xref: File menu.



Glossary files
--------------

A glossary file is a text file that contains commonly used text strings, 
each of which is abbreviated with a text alias. You can use the Glossary 
settings box to place text strings and combinations of text strings from a 
glossary file in the design.



To create a glossary file
-------------------------

1. TBD


To place text from a glossary file in the design
------------------------------------------------

1. From the User menu's Utilities sub-menu, choose Glossary.
   The Glossary settings box opens.
2. TBD


View independent text
---------------------

A view independent text element is displayed at the same orientation 
regardless of how the view is rotated. There is a check button in the Text 
sub-palette for placing view independent text.



Dimensioning
------------

A dimension is a label in a design showing a linear, angular, or radial 
measurement. 

A dimension can be placed with the dimensioning tools as separate lines, 
arcs, and terminators or as a single dimension element. A dimension element 
is a special element that is composed of up to five types of entities:

*  a dimension line
*  dimension text
*  extension lines
*  dimension line terminators
*  a mark (for center, diameter, radius, square, etc.)
   
Extension lines, terminators, and a mark are optional. You canDisplay of 
dimensions can be turned on or off in each view.

Dimension elements have the following advantages:
*  A dimension element can be modified easily.
*  Points in a dimension element can be associated with a point on the 
element or elements they dimension. Associated dimensions update 
automatically when the element they dimension is modified. An association 
point does not have its own coordinates, but is positioned by the 
coordinates of the point it is associated with. Associations are most 
useful for points that are "connected" to the element being dimensioned -- 
the dimension origin and the endpoint(s) of dimensions.
*  Using the dimension element can significantly reduce the size of a 
design file that has many dimensions, since a dimension element is usually 
smaller than the corresponding individual elements.
   
   To turn the display of dimensions on or off in one or more views:
   To turn the display of dimensions on or off in all views:
   To turn the display of an extension line off (in all views)
   To turn the display of selected extension lines on (in all views):
   Dimension settings
   Dimension settings group components
   Editing dimension text
   Associated dimensions
   MISCELLANEOUS DIMENSIONING TIDBITS TO INCORPORATE


To turn the display of dimensions on or off in one or more views
----------------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the desired view.
3. Turn the Dimensions check box on or off.
4. Click the Apply button.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for additional views.
   


To turn the display of dimensions on or off in all views
--------------------------------------------------------

1. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
   The View Attributes settings box opens.
2. Turn the Text check box on or off.
3. Click the All button.
   
Note:
For more information about the View Attributes settings box, see 
*XrefRefGd.



To turn the display of an extension line off (in all views)
-----------------------------------------------------------

1. Key in DIMENSION EXTENSION OFF.
2. Identify the extension line.
3. Enter a data point to accept the change.
   To turn off the display of additional extension lines, identify another 
extension line with each data point entered to accept the change to the 
extension line being hidden.
   


To turn the display of selected extension lines on (in all views)
-----------------------------------------------------------------

1. Key in DIMENSION EXTENSION ON.
2. Identify the extension line.
   Although the extension line is not displayed, you can usually identify 
it by placing a data point near the terminator. If that does not work, 
identify the dimension. All its extension lines will be displayed, and then 
you can turn off the display of any that you want to keep hidden.


Dimension settings
------------------

As they work, designers and drafters in particular disciplines usually only 
need to change a few settings relating to dimensions. However, each 
discipline seems to frequently use a different group of settings. 
MicroStation's dimensioning tools are flexible enough to accommodate users 
in all disciplines, so the number of dimension settings available can seem 
daunting at first. However, once you are familiar with their organization, 
finding the correct setting is no problem. (Also, the Settings Manager can 
take all the effort out of dimenion settings.)

The dimension settings are divided into three basic types, settings that:
*  Affect how a dimension is placed in the design. You may need to change 
these settings frequently during a session, so the controls are grouped in 
a single settings box.
*  Affect the attributes, shape, text, and symbols in the dimension. You 
will probably change these settings infrequently during a session, so the 
controls are grouped by type in a number of settings boxes.
*  Affect how a particular dimension tool operates.
   
To:                      Use controls in 
                         the:

Control how dimensions arDimension Placement 
placed (alignment, text  settings box
justification and location, 
etc.)

Override the active colorDimension Attributes 
style, line weight, and lsettings box
(for dimension lines, extension 
lines, terminators, and 
dimension text)

Override the font, heightDimension Attributes 
width of the active text settings box
settings

Include custom symbols inCustom Symbols settings 
dimension text           box

Control the shape (layoutDimension Geometry 
dimensions               setttings box

Use custom terminators inCustom Terminators 
dimensions               settings box

Define the units of measuDimension Units settings 
in dimensions            box

Specify the tolerance in (Dimension) Tolerance 
(mechanical) dimension   settings box

Control the operation of (Dimension) Tool 
specific dimensioning tooSettings settings box





Dimension settings group components
-----------------------------------

In general, emphasize use of dimension styles.

It's my understanding -- which may be wrong -- that there will be no 
separate dimesnion setting style resources. Jim says that the Settings 
Manager is supposed to take care of this and that "styles" will no longer 
exist. (Style was a bad word, he says, because styles are resources 
actively used when displaying elements as well as placing them: change a 
style and the element changes (e.g. UDLs).)

   To save the active dimension settings as a settings group component:
   To retrieve the dimension settings stored as a settings group component 
and make them active:
   To change the attributes of a dimension to the active settings:
   To change only some of a dimension element's attributes:
   To add an extension line to a dimension element:
   To remove an extension line from a dimension element:
   To move an extension line:
   To move dimension text:
   To change the view that determines the orientation of text in a 
dimension element:
   To place association points (to allow associative dimensioning):
   To place elements as primitives rather than dimension elements:
   To convert a dimension element to elements that can be displayed and 
modified with MicroStation 3.x or earlier:
   To temporarily convert a dimension element into a form that can be 
displayed by MicroStation 3.x or earlier:


To save the active dimension settings as a settings group component
-------------------------------------------------------------------

1. TBD


To retrieve the dimension settings stored as a settings group component and 
make them active
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. TBD


To change the attributes of a dimension to the active settings
--------------------------------------------------------------

1. In the Main palette's Change Element sub-palette, select the Change 
Dimension tool.
   or
   Key in CHANGE DIMENSION.
2. Identify the dimension.
3. Accept to change the dimension's attributes. (??)
   
Note:
If you use the Change Dimension tool to change a dimension element, more 
settings may be changed than you expect. If you are not sure how different 
the current dimension settings are from the settings at the time the 
dimension element was placed, use the following procedure, To change only 
some of a dimension element's attributes:



To change only some of a dimension element's attributes
-------------------------------------------------------

1. From the Match palette, select the Match Dimension tool.
   or
   Key in MATCH DIMENSION.
2. Identify the dimension element.
   The active dimension settings are matched to those of the identified 
dimension element.
3. Adjust the dimension settings as desired.
4. Use the Change Dimension tool to apply the changed settings to the 
identified dimension element.
   
The points that determine what a dimension element is dimensioning can be 
thought of as the vertices of the dimension element. As explained in the 
next two procedures, you can add and delete these points with the Insert 
Vertex and Delete Vertex tools. A dimension element must have at least two 
points or vertrices, just as a line must have two end points or vertices. 
Therefore, you cannot delete one of the extension lines of a dimension with 
only two extension lines.



To add an extension line to a dimension element
-----------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Modify Element sub-palette, select the Insert 
Vertex tool.
   or
   Key in INSERT VERTEX.
2. Identify the dimension element.
3. Enter a data point at the location at which you want the extension line.
4. Accept the new extension line.
   


To remove an extension line from a dimension element
----------------------------------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Modify Element sub-palette, select the Delete 
Vertex tool.
   or
   Key in DELETE VERTEX.
2. Identify the extension line.
3. Accept the deletion of the extension line.
   


To move an extension line
-------------------------

1. From the Main palette's Modify Element sub-palette, select the Modify 
Element tool.
2. Identify the extension line.
   The extension line is dynamically displayed as you move the pointer.
3. Enter a data point to position the extension line.
4. Reset to place the extension line.
   


To move dimension text
----------------------

1. From the Main palette's Modify Element sub-palette, select the Modify 
Element tool.
2. Identify the dimension text.
   The dimension text is dynamically displayed as you move the pointer.
3. Enter a data point to position the dimension text.
4. Reset to place the dimension text.
   
By default, the orientation of text in a dimension element is controlled by 
the view in which the first data point was entered when the element was 
placed.



To change the view that determines the orientation of text in a dimension 
element
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW [view_number].
2. Identify the dimension element.
3. Accept the change.
   OR
1. Identify the dimension element (or elements).
2. Key in CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW [view_number].
   


To place association points (to allow associative dimensioning)
---------------------------------------------------------------

1. In the pop-down of any dimensioning palette, the Locks settings box, or 
the Lock Toggles settings box, turn on the Association Lock.
2. Select the desired dimensioning tool.
3. Enter data points on elements in the design to associate the points with 
the elements.
   
Note:
A potential drawback of dimension elements is that neither MicroStation 3.x 
nor IGDS can read or display them. To allow dimension elements to be 
visible in pre-4.0 versions of MicroStation or in IGDS, you can place them 
as primitive elements, drop them to primitive elements, or freeze them. The 
next three procedures show how to do this.

 Frozen dimension elements can be restored to key in SET COMPATIBLE 
DIMENSION ON. To convert a dimension element(s) to elements that can be 
displayed and modified in previous versions, use the Drop Dimension tool or 
the FENCE DROP DIMENSION key-in. To temporarily convert a dimension 
element(s) into a form that can be displayed by previous versions, use the 
FREEZE or FENCE FREEZE key-in. "Frozen" dimension elements are treated as 
primitives and can be converted back to dimension elements using the THAW 
or FENCE THAW key-in. For more information about compatibility with 
previous versions, see *Xref.



To place elements as primitives rather than dimension elements
--------------------------------------------------------------

1. 
2. 


To convert a dimension element to elements that can be displayed and 
modified with MicroStation 3.x or earlier
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. TBD -- ADAPT FROM LONG NOTE PARAGRAPH ABOVE. THEN SHORTEN THAT 
PARAGRAPH.
2. 


To temporarily convert a dimension element into a form that can be 
displayed by MicroStation 3.x or earlier
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. TBD -- ADAPT FROM LONG NOTE PARAGRAPH ABOVE. THEN SHORTEN THAT 
PARAGRAPH.
To place association points, Association Lock (*XRef.) and Snap Lock must 
be on. (Turning Association Lock on automatically turns Snap Lock on.) 
Dimensions must be placed as dimension elements to have association points. 
Association Lock (*XRef.) is set in the Locks settings box.

>> To place an association point(s):

   The Dimension Element (*XRef.) tool creates all possible associations 
automatically if Association Lock is on. Snapping is unnecessary.
   When using dimensioning tools other than Dimension Element, snap a 
tentative point(s) to the element being dimensioned, usually when 
positioning a extension line endpoint.
   


Editing dimension text
----------------------

>> To edit text in a dimension element:

1. Select the Edit Text tool.
2. Identify the dimension text.
   The Dimension Text Editor opens. All text that is generated from the 
geometry of the dimension element is marked by asterisks (*). All text that 
was previously edited displays in the fields.
3. Edit the desired fields.
   Text placed before or after the asterisk precedes or follows the text 
that is generated from the geometry of the dimension.
   If the asterisk is deleted or replaced, then the text displayed in the 
dimension element is whatever is keyed in the field.
4. Click the OK button to make the change(s).
   or
   Click the Cancel button to leave the dimension text as it was.
   
>> To edit text when placing a dimension:

1. When the message "Press <Return> to edit dimension text" appears in the 
Command Window, press <Return>. (The time to do this is noted in this 
chapter for each dimensioning tool.)
   The Dimension Text Editor opens. All fields are marked with an asterisk 
(*).
2. Edit the desired field(s).
   The procedure is the same as for editing text in an existing dimension 
element.
   
Note:
Text that is keyed in the Dimension Text Editor is not associative -- it 
does not change when the dimension element is modified.



Associated dimensions
---------------------

SOME OF THIS MATERIAL DUPLICATES MATERIAL IN THE PREVIOUS SECTION. MERGE 
OPTIMALLY.Points in a dimension element can be associated with points on 
the elements they dimension. Such associated dimensions update 
automatically when the associated elements are modified. An association 
point does not have its own coordinates, but is positioned by the 
coordinates of the point with which it is associated. Associations are most 
useful for points that are "connected" to the element being dimensioned, 
such as dimension endpoints. Association points are created by snapping 
with Association Lock on.

Note:
The origin of a shared cell and vertices of a multi-line can also be 
associated with points on other elements. For example, if a shared door 
cell is placed in a wall and associated with that wall, the door will 
automatically move if the wall is moved.

The vertices of a multi-line can further be associated with vertices of 
other multi-lines.



MISCELLANEOUS DIMENSIONING TIDBITS TO INCORPORATE
-------------------------------------------------



Feature Control Frames
----------------------

TBD

   Building and Placing a Feature Control Frame:


Building and Placing a Feature Control Frame
--------------------------------------------

1. TBD


Hatching and Patterning
-----------------------

Patterning is the repeated placement of a line or cell through a closed 
area or along a linear path at a specified interval (spacing) and scale. 
For area patterning, the pattern angle(s) are also specified. Patterns can 
be placed on any designated level.

MicroStation designates each element in a pattern as a pattern element. 
Pattern element display can be enabled or disabled on a per view basis. 
Pattern elements cannot be snapped to and thus do not interfere with 
snapping to other elements.

The tools in the Patterning palette are used to pattern the area inside a 
closed element (ellipse, shape, multi-line, complex shape, or B-spline 
curve) or the fence. The element must have the area attribute of Solid. If 
there are Hole elements (having the area attribute of Hole) inside and on 
the same level as the Solid element, the enclosed area of each such element 
is not patterned. (The area below and immediately surrounding the text in a 
hole text element is not patterned.)

The Pattern Area tool is used to place the cell designated as the active 
pattern cell. For example, a wall face can be patterned with a brick cell 
for a more realistic appearance. The Hatch Area and Crosshatch Area tools 
are used to place lines (hatch lines). 

Area patterning is a time-intensive operation. The time depends on the 
complexity of the patterning cell and the size of the patterned area. The 
time also depends on the number, intricacy, and levels of hole elements 
within the area. More intricate elements may require several minutes to 
pattern. The area patterning process also creates elements and then deletes 
some of the elements it creates. Compressing the design file after complex 
patterning is recommended.

Note:
The linear patterning tools in previous versions are consolidated in 
Version 5.0 into a single tool, Linear Pattern. However, this tool is 
obsolete due to the addition in Version 5.0 of custom line styles; it is 
retained only for compatibility with previous versions.

   To designate a cell as the active pattern:
   Pattern cells


To designate a cell as the active pattern
-----------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu, choose Cells.
   The Cell Library settings box opens.
2. In the list box, select the cell.
3. Click the Pattern button.
   OR
1. In the Cells sub-palette, select the Place Active Line Terminator tool.
2. In the Pattern Cell tool setting field, key in the cell name.
   


Pattern cells
-------------

Pattern cells may contain any combination of elements, even text. Cells 
used for area patterning are typically designed specifically for that 
purpose. Two cell libraries supplied with MicroStation, "archpa.cel" and 
"geompa.cel," contain pattern cells that are useful for a variety of area 
patterning applications.

Additional pattern cells can be created in the same manner as standard 
cells. Here are some guidelines to follow and restrictions to be aware of 
when creating area pattern cells:
*  Area pattern cells should contain at least one full cycle of the pattern 
in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
*  The cell range is used to determine the pattern matrix size. If you want 
unused space at the pattern boundary, place point elements (zero length 
lines) to expand the pattern range. Point elements are not patterned.
*  If the cell is created as a point cell, the pattern components are 
placed on the active level in the active color and line weight. If the cell 
is created as a graphic cell, the pattern elements are placed with the same 
symbology and on the same level as the element being patterned.
*  The area patterning tools handle horizontal or vertical lines that span 
the entire pattern cell in a special manner. Instead of placing many 
contiguous line segments to create the pattern, these lines are extended 
through the entire pattern area. This results in a substantial increase in 
patterning speed and also requires much less room in the design file. 
*  MicroStation does not support nested area pattern cells or pattern cells 
larger than 8 KB.
   
   





















Generating Drawings from 3D Models
----------------------------------

This chapter covers MicroStation's tools for generating drawings from 3D 
models for plotting and/or review.
*  Visible Edges Design Files
*  Sections 
*  Drawing Composition
   
Note:
These tools are intoduced in the lesson Automating Drawing Production

   Basic Terms and Concepts
   Automating Drawing Production
   Create the Drawing Components
   Compose the Drawing Sheets
   Visible Edges Design Files
   Sections 
   Drawing Composition


Basic Terms and Concepts
------------------------

3D models make it relatively easy to update changes in all necessary 
drawings for a project. The following are typically involved.
*  Model file -- A design file that contains the model. Parts of the model 
may be in reference files that are attached to the model file.
*  Saved views -- Can be used to set up Standard views that can be 
attached. 
*  Visible edges -- Shows the edges visible in a 3D view (with the edges 
that would be hidden, removed).
*  Section -- Shows interior detail that is too complex to see clearly in a 
wireframe view. 
*  Sheet file -- A 3D design file in which views of the model file(s), 
including visible edges and sections, are attached.
   
Hint:
Drawing Composition is also an excellent way to prepare 3D models for 
review with MicroStation Review (*Xref), since it eliminates the need for 
the reviewer to understand 3D viewing methods.

   Producing Drawings from 3D Models


Producing Drawings from 3D Models
---------------------------------

1. Design the model.
   For more information, see 3D Design and Modeling.
2. In the model file, define saved views (*Xref), as needed.
3. In the model file, generate the following, as needed.
   Sections .
   Visible Edges Design Files.
4. Use Drawing Composition to set up the sheet file(s). 
5. In the sheet file, do the following:
   Attach views of the model -- saved, standard, and/or folded, as needed.
   Attach the sections and visible edges design files created in step 3, if 
there are any.
6. In the sheet file, add text and optionally, dimensions.
7. Generate a plotfile from the sheet file (see Plotting).
   or
   Submit the sheet file for review with MicroStation Review.
   or
   If required, generate a visible edges design file from the sheet file 
and generate a plotfile from the visible edges design file.


Automating Drawing Production
-----------------------------

In this lesson, you will learn do the following
*  Create the Drawing Components
*  Compose the Drawing Sheets
   


Create the Drawing Components
-----------------------------

In this exercise, you will create saved views of the plan and a section, a 
visble edges design file, and a planar section. 

>> Create saved views of the plan and section views:

1. Open the design file "newbldg.dgn."
2. Set up your screen with views 1 and 2 as Top and Right views, 
respectively.
3. Fit both views.
4. Using the Window Area tool, make both views display only the building.
5. Make a saved view "PLAN" of the Top view.
6. Set the Display Depth in the Right view to include the left side of the 
building only, from just right of the stairway. 
   You can use the Top view to set the front and back clipping planes in 
the Right view.
7. Make a saved view "XSECT1" of the newly defined Right view. 
   
>> Create a visible edges design file of the plan and elevations:

1. From the File menu's Export sub-menu, choose Visible Edges.
   The Visible Edge File Generation dialog box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose 1.
   This is the source view from which the edges design file will be 
produced.
3. From the File Dimension option menu, choose 2D.
   This specifies that the edges design file will be two-dimensional.
4. From the Surface Display option menu, choose Profile.
   Profile specifies that the edges only, of surfaces, are created, while 
Mesh specifies that the edges of the polygons, representing surfaces, be 
drawn.
5. Click the OK button.
   The Save Visible Edges Design File As dialog box opens.
6. Accept the default directory, and filename.
   By default, the edges design file is given the same name as the design 
file, but with a ".hln" suffix.
7. Click the OK button.
   The selected view blanks and the generated elements are displayed as 
they are placed in the edges design file.
8. When processing is complete, enter the edges design file "newbldg.hln."
9. Fit a Top view.
10.Make a saved view "ELEVS" of the fitted Top view.
   This saved view will be used in the finished drawing.
   
>> Prepare to create the section:

1. Open the design file "newbldg.dgn."
2. Make a view a Top view, and use the Fit Area control to fit it.
3. In the Top view, use the Window Area control to display the building 
only.
   
>> Create an output file for the section:

1. From the User menu's Utilities sub-menu, choose Section Generation.
   TheSection Generation settings box opens.
2. From the File menu in the Section Generation settings box, choose New 
Output File.
   The Create Section Output File dialog box opens. 
3. Click the Seed button 
   The Select Seed File dialog box opens
4. Select the seed file "sdmapm3d.dgn" from the Files list.
   You must use a 3D seed file for the output file. An Alert message 
appears if you choose a 2D seed file.
5. Click the OK button.
   The Select Seed File dialog box closes.
6. In the Name field, of the Create Section Output File settings box, key 
in "xsrt2.dgn". 
7. Click the OK button.
   
   The controls in the Section Generation settings box let you to contro 
how the section elements are generated.
   
>> Create the section and make a saved view of it:

1. From the Tools menu's Section by View sub-menu, choose Vertical.
2. In the Top view, enter a data point at the stairway's center.
   A vertical line appears in the Top view to indicate the section plane.
3. Enter a data point to accept the location.
   The section is generated.
4. From the Command Window's File menu, choose Open.
5. Open the design file "xsrt2.dgn."
6. From the View menu, choose Attributes.
7. From the View option menu, select the right view's number.
8. Turn off Constructions.
9. Click the Apply button.
10.The "default cube is hidden.
11.Fit the Right view.
12.Create a saved view "XSRT2" of the Right view.


Compose the Drawing Sheets
--------------------------

In this exercise, you will create a drawing sheet with the plan, 
elevations, visible edges, and section view of your model.

>> Set up a sheet file:

1. From the File menu, choose Drawing Composition.
   The Drawing Composition settings box opens. 
2. From the File menu in the Drawing Composition settings box, choose New > 
Sheet.
3. tbd = create a sheet file "newbldg,sht"
4. From the File menu's Open sub-menu, choose Model.
   The Open Model File dialog box opens.
5. From the Files list box, select "newbldg.dgn."
6. Click the OK button.
   The Open Model File dialog box closes, and "newbldg.dgn" appears in the 
Model File field in the Drawing Composition settings box. This is the model 
from which the various views will be attached.
   
>> Position the plan in a Top view:

1. From the Drawing Composition settings box's Tools menu, choose Attach 
Saved View.
   The Saved View dialog box opens, displaying the saved views in the model 
file "newbldg.dgn."
2. Select "PLAN" from the list of views.
3. Click the OK button.
   The Saved View dialog box closes. The model file is automatically 
referenced to the sheet file (in this case itself), and a dashed line 
rectangle appears, showing the clipping boundary of the saved view.
4. In the vacant Top view, place a data point to position the plan view.
   The plan is attached.
   
>> Place the front (South) elevation:

1. From the Tools menu's Attach Folded sub-menu, choose Orthogonal.
   You are prompted to select an element in the principle reference file 
attachment.
2. In the plan view, identify an element .
   A dynamic dashed rectangle appears around the plan, indicating the 
reference file clipping boundary.
3. Identify the lower (horizontal) dashed line.
   Another dynamic dashed rectangle appears, showing the "rotated" view. 
(The model file is referenced a second time automatically).
4. Enter a data point to position the elevation below the plan.
   The front view (the plan rotated orthogonally) is attached.
   
>> Place the right (East) elevation:

1. From the Tools menu's Attach Folded sub-menu, again choose Orthogonal.
2. In the newly created front elevation, identify an element.
   As before, a dynamic dashed rectangle appears around the selected 
attached view.
3. Identify the right side (vertical) dashed line.
   Another dynamic dashed rectangle appears, showing the "rotated" view. 
The model file again is referenced automatically.
4. Enter a data point to position the new view to the right of the front 
elevation.
   The right view (the front view rotated orthogonally) is attached.
   
>> Attach the section:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Attach Saved View.
   The Saved View dialog box opens.
2. Select "XSECT1" from the list of saved views.
3. Click the OK button.
   The Saved View dialog box closes and a dynamic rectangle appears, 
showing the section view.
4. In the Top view, to the right of the plan, enter a data point to 
position the section.
   
Now you can again use Drawing Composition to put the finished drawing 
together.

>> Create a drawing sheet:

1. From the File menu, choose Drawing Composition.
   The Drawing Composition settings box opens.
2. From the File menu's New sub-menu, in the Drawing Composition settings 
box, choose Sheet.
   The Create Sheet File dialog box opens.
3. Accept the default sheet Seed file, and enter "newbldg.sht" for the 
sheet file name.
4. Click the OK button
   The current design file is exited, and the sheet file is opened. This 
contains a title block, in a Top view.
   The new file name appears in the Sheet File name field of the Drawing 
Composition settings box.
   
>> Attach the main body of the drawing:

1. From the File menu's, Open sub-menu, in the Drawing Composition settings 
box, choose Model.
   The Open Model File dialog box opens.
2. Select the file "newbldg.hln"
   This is the edges design file created in a previous exercise.
3. Click the OK button
   The Open Model File dialog box closes. The selected file name appears in 
the Model File field.
4. From the Tools menu, choose Attach Saved View.
   The Saved View dialog box opens.
5. Select "ELEVS" from the list.
6. Click the OK button.
7. The Saved View dialog box closes. In this case no dashed line rectangle 
appears in the view, because the scale of the model is too big, relative to 
the title block.
8. In the Drawing Composition settings box, set the scale (Sheet:Model) to 
1:5.
   The rectangle now appears in the view, about the title block.
9. Enter a data point in the center of the view.
   The plan and elevations appear in the view.
   
>> Attach the section:

1. From the File menu's Open sub-menu, in the Drawing Composition dialog 
box, choose Model.
   The Open Model File dialog box opens.
2. Select the file "xsrt2.dgn."
3. Click the OK button.
4. From the Tools menu, choose Attach Saved View.
5. Select the Saved View "SECT2".
6. In the Drawing Composition settings box, set the scale (Sheet:Model) to 
1:5.
7. Position the section to the right of the Plan view to complete the 
drawing.
   


Visible Edges Design Files
--------------------------

You can create a visible edges design file -- a 2D or 3D design file that 
contains the edges visible in a 3D view (that is, with those edges that 
would be hidden, removed). 

   Exporting a Visible Edges Design File
   Controlling quality and processing time


Exporting a Visible Edges Design File
-------------------------------------

1. From the File menu's Export sub-menu, choose Export.
   The Visible Edge File Generation dialog box opens.
2. From the View option menu, choose the View.
3. Choose whether the visible edges design file will be 2D or 3D.
4. Adjust other settings as desired. See Controlling quality and processing 
time.
5. Click the OK button.
   The Save Visible Edges Design File As dialog box opens. By default, the 
visible edges file is given the same filename as the active design file but 
with the suffix ".hln."
6. (Optional) Change the filename and/or choose a different directory.
7. Click the OK button.
   
Hint:
You can export multiple visible edges design files on most systems. See 
*Xref for more information.



Controlling quality and processing time
---------------------------------------

When you choose Export>Visible Edges (*Xref) from the File menu, the 
Visible Edges File Generation dialog box opens, letting you control the 
View and dimension (2D or 3D) of the visible edges design file.

   Surface Display
   Drawing intersections
   How hidden edges are drawn
   Accuracy of curved surfaces and arcs
   Memory considerations


Surface Display
---------------

Surfaces can be drawn as a mesh or as a profile. With mesh, the boundaries 
of the simplified polygon mesh are drawn, while profile produces the outer 
boundaries of the elements.



Drawing intersections
---------------------

If Calculate Intersections (*Xref) is on, then intersections are drawn in 
the visible edges design file. This results in longer processing time.



How hidden edges are drawn
--------------------------

If Include Hidden Edges (*Xref) is on, hidden edges are included.

Hidden edges can have the same level and symbology as in the design file, 
or you can use the overrides to specify their level, color, line, style, or 
line weight.



Accuracy of curved surfaces and arcs
------------------------------------

The Stroke Tolerance (*Xref) determines how accurately curved surfaces are 
depicted. A higher stroke tolerance requires longer processing time.

Stroke          Description
Tolerance

100             Minimum

500             Coarse mesh

1000            Reasonable mesh; moderate 
                processing time

2000            Fine mesh

32000           Maximum; very long processing 
                time



Arcs are approximated by line strings. The Maximum and Minimum Arc Vertices 
settings determine the minimum and maximum number of vertices, 
respectively, in these line strings. Higher values require longer 
processing time

Arc        Minimum    Maximum
Vertices

Default    7          100
Value:

Must Be:   3 or greate200 or less

.



Memory considerations
---------------------

Visible edges design file creation is much faster if adequate memory is 
available, especially if the design is large or has many curved surfaces. 

The amount of memory used is difficult to quantify exactly, since the 
visible edges design file consists of polygons.
*  For a model with mostly flat surfaces, there is about a one-to-one 
correspondence between elements in the model and polygons in the visible 
edges design file. 
*  For a model with many curved surfaces, where a single curved surface can 
require hundreds or thousands of polygons in the visible edges design file, 
even a relatively small design can require large amounts of memory and 
processing time for visible edges design file creation.
   


Sections 
---------

Sections show interior detail that is too complex to see clearly in an 
ordinary wireframe view. 

To create a section, you define a plane that passes through a model, and 
use the Section tools to generate section geometry - new elements where the 
plane and the elements in the model intersect.

   Creating a Section:


Creating a Section
------------------

1. From the User menu's Utilities sub-menu, choose Generate Section.
   The Section Generation settings box opens.
2. Select the design file in which the section elements are placed using 
the File menu in the Section Generation settings box. By default, they are 
placed in the active design file.
3. Set the other settings in the settings box to the desired values. By 
default, the elements in the section geometry have the same level and 
symbology as the elements upon which they are based.
4. Select one of the Section tools from the Tools menu in the settings box. 
The tools differ only in how you define the plane on which the section is 
created. Depending upon which tool you select, you define the plane by 
reference to an element, a fence, three data points, projection of an 
element or line string, a plane perpendicular to the screen, or a plane 
parallel to the screen. For more information about section tools, see 
*Xref: User menu/Utlities > Generate Section.
5. Accept the definition of the plane.
   The Section tool creates the new geometry.
6. Accept the section geometry.
   
>> To create a new file to serve as the output file:

1. Choose New Output File from the File menu in the settings box.
   The Create Section Output File dialog box opens. The Create Section 
Output File dialog box operates in much the same way as MicroStation's 
Create 3D Design File dialog box.
2. (Optional) To use a seed file other than the default seed file, click 
the Seed button. If you attempt to use a 2D seed file, an alert box 
appears.
3. Key in the name of a new file in the Name field.
4. Click OK.
   
>> To open a file to serve as the output file:

1. Choose Open Output File from the File menu in the settings box.
   The Open Section Output File dialog box opens. The Open Section Output 
File dialog box operates in much the same way as MicroStation's Open Design 
File dialog box.
2. Key in the name of a new file in the Name field or select a file in the 
Files list box.
3. Click OK.
   


Drawing Composition
-------------------

Drawing Composition automates the creation of drawing sheets, which is 
familiar to the draftsperson who draws on paper, except that instead of 
redrawing the model's geometry for each view, you attach views of the model 
as reference files.
*  Sheet file -- A 3D design file in which views of the model design 
file(s) are attached. A sheet file can also contain borders and other 
standard items that are required in all of a workgroup's drawings. 
*  Model file -- A design file that contains the model and can contain 
saved views that are attached to the sheet file. 
*  Attached view -- A reference file attachment of the model file to the 
sheet file. 
*  Seed sheet file -- A seed file from which sheet files can be created.
   
Although drawing sheets can be created with reference file attachment and 
manipulation tools, the Drawing Composition settings box simplifies the 
process in a number of ways:
*  An attached view in a sheet file can be any standard (top, bottom, 
right, left, front, back, or isometric), fitted view or any saved view of a 
model file. Standard views can be clipped or set to display only certain 
levels.
*  An attached view of the model file can be attached in any position at 
any scale. Related attached views can be grouped. A group of attached views 
can be moved, scaled, or detached. Attached views can be added to or 
removed from a group.
*  If the model file has reference files attached, these references can be 
automatically attached to the sheet file. The level of reference file 
nesting can be controlled.
*  A view can be attached by folding an attached view about an orthogonal 
axis or a line defined by two data points. A folded view is automatically 
aligned and grouped with the attached view from which it is folded.
   
   Sample Seed Sheet Files
   Creating a Drawing Sheet


Sample Seed Sheet Files
-----------------------

The following sample seed sheet files are supplied

File        Drawing Size

"seed.sht"  11 x 17"

"seedah.sht"A (horizontal orientation)

"seedav.sht"A (vertical orientation)

"seedb.sht" B

"seedc.sht" C

"seedd.sht" D

"seede.sht" E

"seedf.sht" F





Creating a Drawing Sheet
------------------------

1. Create the model. If standard, fitted views are to be attached, go to 
step 4.
2. To use a saved view(s) to define the attachments, set up each view. The 
aspect ratio and the display depth of each view should be adjusted so that 
the view encloses only the desired portion of the model. 
3. Use the Saved Views setting box (opened from the View menu) or the SV= 
key-in to save the views. 
4. From the File menu, choose Drawing Composition.
   The Drawing Composition settings box opens.
5. Create a sheet file by choosing Sheet from the File menu's New sub-menu 
(in the Drawing Composition settings box) and using the Create Sheet File 
dialog box (see v below).
   or
   Open a sheet file by choosing Sheet from the File menu's Open sub-menu 
and using the Open Sheet File dialog box.
   The sheet file becomes the active design file.
6. Attach the model file to the sheet file by choosing Model from the File 
menu's Open sub-menu and using the Open Model File dialog box.
7. If necessary, set the Scale and Nested Attachment Depth in the Drawing 
Composition settings box.
8. Attach the desired view by choosing the appropriate item from the Tools 
menu or its sub-menus.
   Attach a standard view by choosing the appropriate item from the Attach 
Standard sub-menu. The Levels item in this sub-menu allows you to control 
the display of elements by level in the view.
   or
   Attach a saved view by choosing Attach Saved View.
   or
   Click Attach Copy to copy an attached view.
   or
   Fold an attached view about an orthogonal axis or line by choosing 
Orthogonal or About Line, respectively, from the Attach Folded sub-menu.
9. An attached view can be clipped, detached, grouped, moved, or scaled by 
choosing the appropriate item from the Tools menu.
   
Note:
The sheet file must be a 3D design file. A workgroup can have its own 
custom sheet seed file from which working sheet files are made. 

Hint:
Attaching a view by folding it orthogonally from another attached view 
ensures that the attached views are correctly aligned with each other. It 
is a good idea to attach as many views as possible by folding orthogonally.



Plotting
--------

TBD



Exchanging Data With Other Applications
---------------------------------------

This chapter covers exchanging data with other applications.
*  General information that applies to all data exchange is covered in 
Formats That Can Be Exchanged, General Data Exchange Information, and 
General Data Exchange Procedures.
*  Information that is specific to a particular exchange type is covered in 
DWG or DXF File Exchange and IGES File Exchange.
   
   Formats That Can Be Exchanged
   General Data Exchange Information
   General Data Exchange Procedures
   DWG or DXF File Exchange
   IGES File Exchange


Formats That Can Be Exchanged
-----------------------------

AutoCAD binary drawing files "DWG" can be opened or saved directly, with no 
intermediate translation to a format such as DXF or IGES required.

MicroStation Version 5.0 can also import and export the following formats:
*  DXF (Drawing Interchange) -- a file format created by Autodesk, Inc. 
that you can use to exchange data between MicroStation and many CAD and 
graphics applications.
   Since DWG and DXF files have the same entities, they are converted 
exactly the same way and the same settings are used for both. 
   For information that is specific to exchange with DWG or DXF, see DWG or 
DXF File Exchange.
*  IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) -- a public domain, ANSI 
standard, neutral file format that is intended as an international standard 
for the exchange of product definition data between different CAD/CAM 
systems.
   The former MicroStation IGES option is now included in MicroStation at 
no extra cost. For information that is specific to IGES translation, see 
IGES File Exchange.
   For information about exporting IGES files that are compliant with the 
CALS Class I or Class II specifications, see Exporting CALS-compliant IGES 
files. 
*  CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) -- an ANSI standard for the exchange of 
picture data between different graphics software that is device- and 
environment-independent.
   
MicroStation can output the following for use with other software for 
publishing or image processing:
*  Linework (wireframe) data can be plotted as PostScript or HPGL graphics. 
See *Xref for more information.
*  Rendered images can be saved as BMP, EPS, GIF, IMG, Intergraph RGB, PCX, 
PICT, Sun Raster, Targa, TIFF, or WPG files using the Save Image As (*Xref) 
item in the File menu or as RIB Files (*Xref).
*  "Screen shots" of palettes and dialog boxes. See "*Xref for more 
information.
   
A number of third-party translators to various formats are described in the 
MicroStation Solutions catalog, which you should receive after you return 
your registration card.



General Data Exchange Information
---------------------------------

This section has information that is relevant to any data exchange with 
another application or format.

Note:
For format-specific information, see the following sections.

Format  For more information,     Application[a]
        see:

DWG and DWG or DXF File ExchangeIm"dwgin.ma""dwgout.ma"
DXF

IGES    IGES File ExchangeImport I"igesin.ma""igesout.ma"

CGM     Import CGM File dialog box"cgmin.ma""cgmout.ma"

[a]The MDL applications, installed in MicroStation's "mdlapps" directory, 
that perform import (in) and export (out).
   
   Basic terminology
   Determining which translation to use
   Opening a 3D file
   Keeping units and measurements correct
   Using settings files
   Log File
   Versions supported


Basic terminology
-----------------

The following terms apply to file exchange in general
   Entity -- The fundamental unit of data in an AutoCAD, DXF, IGES, or CGM 
file. In general, entities are the equivalent of MicroStation elements.
   Receiving application -- Application into which an exported file will be 
imported.
   Sending application -- Application that created a file that is to be 
imported.
   Product-definition data -- Graphical information that describes a design 
(for example, a mechanical part, architectural design, site plan, map, and 
so on) in 2D or 3D, with real-world units and precision sufficient to 
create or build the actual product or design. Design files, DWG, DXF, and 
IGES files can store product-definition data.
   Picture data -- Graphical information that draws a picture. Real-world 
units and 3D are not required, and while the precision may be quite high, 
the information is usable only as an illustration. The CGM format stores 
picture data.
   


Determining which translation to use
------------------------------------

The best translation to use depends on factors that are unique to each 
translation, including
*  The sending application or receiving application and the type of data 
being translated. 
*  Whether you are converting product-definition data or picture data.
   
Hint:
For conversions between MicroStation and AutoCAD, the best method is to 
open and save DWG files directly. It is not necessary to use intermediate 
formats such as DXF or IGES to convert between MicroStation and AutoCAD.

Note:
The CGM format is not intended for the exchange of product- definition 
data, as are IGES and DXF.

   Preserving as much data as possible


Preserving as much data as possible
-----------------------------------

Items in one system may not have exact equivalents in the other. Also, 
items that are common to both systems may be expressed differently. In 
these cases, the goal is to perform a translation that preserves as much 
data as possible.

How completely this goal is achieved depends on a variety of factors. If 
you perform frequent translations, it helps to learn about the MicroStation 
and the DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM formats and to set up your designs in a way 
that minimizes data loss. This chapter has a number of suggestions for 
doing this.

Hint:
It is a good idea to test translation with small drawings. Use drawings 
that contain the same type of data used in your project -- preferably ones 
that have examples of all of the types of data used.



Opening a 3D file
-----------------

To open a 3D drawing file in MicroStation, the active design file must be 
3D. To open a 3D drawing file from the system command line, the default 
seed file must be 3D.

Certain IGES entities cannot be represented in 2D. Unless you are certain 
that the IGES file is 2D, it is recommended that the active design file be 
3D when the IGES file is imported.

Note:
The CGM format does not support 3D.



Keeping units and measurements correct
--------------------------------------

When opening a DWG, DXF, or IGES file, be sure that the design file into 
which you place the file has appropriate working units for the type of data 
in the file. 
*  For information about setting working units when importing a DWG or DXF 
file, see Limitations of DWG or DXF import and export.
*  For information about setting working units when importing an IGES file, 
see "Ensuring that coordinates remain correct" (*Xref).
   
Note:
The CGM format does not store data in real-world units.



Using settings files
--------------------

Import and export settings help make translation as accurate as possible 
with as little loss of "intelligence" as possible. Once you know how these 
should be set for your project, they can be saved in an import or export 
settings file that stores all settings for a particular conversion as they 
were when the settings file was created or last saved.

Settings    Adjusted In:               Config.        Default 
For:                                   Var.:          File:

DWG or DXF 

Import      Import Drawing File dialog MS_DWGINSET    "dwgin.sfi"

Export      Export Drawing File dialog MS_DWGOUTSET   "dwgout.sfi"

IGES 

Import      Import IGES File dialog boxMS_IGESINSET   "igesin.sfi"

Export      Export IGES File dialog boxMS_IGESOUTSET  "igesout.sfi"

CGM

Import      Import CGM File dialog box MS_CGMINSET    "cgmin.sfi"

Export      Export CGM File dialog box MS_CGMOUTSET   "cgmout.sfi"



For example, the import settings file for IGES Import is pointed to by the 
MS_IGESINSET environment variable. When you import an IGES file, the 
settings are read from this file. If an IGES import settings file does not 
exist, the default file "igesin.sfi" is created in MicroStation's "data" 
directory.

Hint:
Using settings files helps to insure consistent translations. It may be 
useful to have a different import and export settings file for each sending 
application, receiving application, client, or project.

   To attach a settings file other than the default:
   To save the current import or export settings:
   To save a new import or export settings file:


To attach a settings file other than the default
------------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu in the appropriate Import File dialog box, choose 
Attach from the Settings File sub-menu.
   The Attach Settings File dialog box opens.
2. Select the appropriate import or export settings file in the list box.
3. Click the OK button.
   See File menu/Settings File > Attach... for more information.
   


To save the current import or export settings
---------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu in the Import or Export File dialog box being used, 
choose Save from the Settings File sub-menu.
   The settings are saved in the attached settings file.
   


To save a new import or export settings file
--------------------------------------------

1. From the File menu in the appropriate Import or Export File dialog box, 
from the Settings File sub-menu, choose Save As.
   The Save Settings File dialog box opens.
2. Enter the filename and directory and click the Save button.


Log File
--------

A log file is a text file in which translation statistics and diagnostics 
-- the messages that display in the status box as a translation is in 
progress -- are saved. 

By default, the log file is saved with the same filename and directory as 
the file being translated with the extension ".log."

Note:
You view the log file by choosing Display > Text... from the File menu.

>> To specify an alternate log file:

1. Form the File menu in the appropriate Import File or Export File dialog 
box, choose Log File.
   The Log File dialog box opens.
2. Specify the filename and directory for the log file.
3. Click the OK button.
   


Versions supported
------------------

The following versions of each format can be converted

Format  Can Import         Can Export 
        Versions:          Versions:

DWG     2, 9, 10, 11, or 129, 10, 11, or 12 

DXF     10, 11, or 12      10, 11, or 12

CGM     1.0                1.0

IGES    2.0, 3.0, 4.0, or 54.0 or 5.0 
        fixed-length ASCII fixed-length ASCII





General Data Exchange Procedures
--------------------------------

This section has general procedures for opening (importing) and saving 
(exporting) files in other formats.

MicroStation lets you open DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM files in the following 
ways:
*  Directly by specifying its filename when starting MicroStation or by 
choosing Open from the File menu. The current import settings control the 
conversion.
*  Interactively by choosing DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM from the File menu's 
Import sub-menu. This method lets you adjust import settings before 
proceeding.
*  By issuing commands from the system prompt, on systems that have one; 
you can automatically convert multiple files to MicroStation design files. 
A symbol library of block definitions can be converted to cells in a cell 
library. 
   
MicroStation lets you save a design file as a DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM file 
in the following ways:
*  Directly by choosing Save As from the File menu. The current export 
settings control the conversion.
*  Interactively by choosing DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM from the File menu's 
Export sub-menu. This method lets you adjust export settings before 
proceeding.
*  By issuing commands from the system prompt, on systems that have one.
   
   Directly Opening a File in Another Format
   Starting MicroStation With a File in Another Format as the Active Design
   Interactively Importing a File in Another Format
   Directly Saving As Another Format
   Interactively Exporting to Another Format


Directly Opening a File in Another Format
-----------------------------------------

1. Open the design file (or create a new design file) into which the file 
is to be placed. 
   To open a 3D DWG or DXF file, the active design file must be 3D. Unless 
you are sure an IGES file is 2D, the active design file should be 3D. See 
Opening a 3D file for more information.
   If you are opening a DWG, DXF, or IGES file, the active design file 
should have appropriate working units. See Keeping units and measurements 
correct for more information.
2. From the File menu, choose Open.
   The Open File dialog box opens.
3. From the Type option menu, choose DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM.
4. Select the file to open and click the OK button.
   The file is opened. A status box displays messages which describe the 
transalation's progress, which are saved in a Log File.
   
Note:
The settings used the last time you opened a file of the selected Type 
interactively (by choosing Import from the File menu) control how entities 
are converted to elements in the design file.



Starting MicroStation With a File in Another Format as the Active Design
------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. At the system prompt, enter: ustation <filename>.
   To open a 3D DWG, DXF, or IGES file from the system prompt, the default 
seed file must be 3D (see Opening a 3D file).
   Be sure that the default seed file has its working units set 
appropriately (see Keeping units and measurements correct).
   If no filename is specified, the Open File dialog box opens, allowing 
you to select an DWG, DXF, IGES, CGM, or design file to open.
   
Note:
This procedure cannot be used on systems (for example, the Macintosh) that 
do not have a system prompt.



Interactively Importing a File in Another Format
------------------------------------------------

1. Open the design file (or create a new design file) into which the DWG, 
DXF, IGES, or CGM file is to be placed. 
   To open a 3D DWG or DXF file, the active design file must be 3D. Unless 
you are sure an IGES file is 2D, the active design file should be 3D. See 
Opening a 3D file for more information.
   Be sure the design file has appropriate working units (see Keeping units 
and measurements correct).
2. From the File menu's Import sub-menu, choose DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM.
   The Open File dialog box opens.
3. Use the list box to select the filename and directory, or in the Name 
field, key in the filename of the file to import.
4. Click the Open button.
   A dialog box opens depending on the fomat of the file being imported.
   
Type:   This dialog box opens:

DWG or  Import Drawing File dialog box
DXF

IGES    Import IGES File dialog box

CGM     Import CGM File dialog box


5. (Optional) Adjust the import settings.
6. Click the Open button.
   The file is opened. Messages that describe the conversion's progress are 
displayed in the Status area and saved in a Log File.


Directly Saving As Another Format
---------------------------------

1. From the File menu, choose Save As.
   The Save Design As dialog box opens.
2. From the Type option menu, choose DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM.
3. (Optional) In the Name field, key in a name for the file to be exported.
   By default, the file is saved with same filename as the design file, but 
with the suffix ".dwg," ".dxf," ".igs," or ".cgm."
4. Click the Save button.
   As the file is saved, you can monitor the status by reading the messages 
displayed in the Status window.
   
Note:
The settings that were set the last time you saved a design file as a DWG 
or DXF, IGES, or CGM file interactively (using the File menu's Export item) 
control how elements in the design file are converted to entities in the 
exported file.



Interactively Exporting to Another Format
-----------------------------------------

1. From the File menu's Export sub-menu, choose DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM.
   The Save As Drawing File dialog box opens.
2. (Optional) In the Name field, key in a name for the file to be exported.
   By default, the file is saved with same name as the design file, but 
with the suffix ".dwg," ".dxf," ".igs," or ".cgm."
3. Click the Save button.
   A dialog box opens which lets you adjust import settings for the type of 
file you are importing.
   
Type:   This dialog box opens:

DWG or  Export Drawing File dialog box 
DXF

IGES    Export IGES File dialog box

CGM     Export CGM File dialog box


4. Set the settings as desired.
5. Click the Export button.
   


DWG or DXF File Exchange
------------------------

Converting to and from DWG or DXF files is exactly the same. There are no 
separate procedures or settings for DXF translation. 

As used here, the words "drawing file" can refer to a file in either the 
DWG or DXF format, even though "drawing file" is normally used to refer 
just to the binary DWG format.

Note:
For information about which versions of DWG or DXF files can be opened or 
saved, see Versions supported.

Note:
For an introduction to how DWG or DXF files can be opened and saved in 
MicroStation, see General Data Exchange Procedures.

   Limitations of DWG or DXF import and export
   Controlling how specific entities are converted
   Translation tables
   Limitations when exporting to DWG or DXF
   Drawing file to MicroStation element conversions
   MicroStation to drawing file entity conversions


Limitations of DWG or DXF import and export
-------------------------------------------

Conversions between DWG or DXF and MicroStation cannot be exact because 
elements are defined differently.

In general, MicroStation has more element types and stores much more 
information about each element. These differences may affect conversion 
accuracy:
*  MicroStation elements can be placed on 63 levels and in eight numbered 
line styles. Cell names are limited to six characters ("A-Z" capital 
letters only, "0-9," "$," and "."). The design plane or design cube (3D) is 
finite.
   In DWG or DXF, the names of linetypes and blocks can all be up to 31 
characters long. The design plane is infinite.
*  DWG and DXF do not support these MicroStation elements:
   
Multi-line text (text nodes).

True ellipses, non-circular arcs (partial 
ellipses), curves, and B-splines. 

True complex shapes and complex chains.


   Special cases of the polyline entity are the closest DWG or DXF 
equivalents to MicroStation non-circular ellipses and arcs, B-splines, 
curves, and complex shapes or chains.
*  Although blocks (sets of entities that are grouped together) are used 
for the same purpose as MicroStation cells, each block must be stored in a 
separate drawing file, since there is no equivalent for MicroStation cell 
libraries.
*  AutoCAD's fixed 256-color palette can be modified (usually with a 
program provided with the graphics hardware), but the modified palette 
cannot be saved. MicroStation's default color table can be modified. The 
modifications can be saved as a color table file that can then be attached 
to a design file(s) as the active color table.
*  DWG and DXF have no equivalent for MicroStation graphic groups.
*  DWG and DXF support line widths only for polylines and cannot represent 
line weights.
   
Note:
See Limitations when exporting to DWG or DXF for more information about 
issues specific to exporting design files to DWG or DXF format.



Controlling how specific entities are converted
-----------------------------------------------

TBD -- This section has procedures for converting specific entities.



Translation tables
------------------

Translation tables define the mappings between names and codes in DWG or 
DXF files and MicroStation for:

DWG or      MicroStation Translation 
DXF                      Table

layers      levels       "dwglevel.tbl"

text styles fonts        "font.tbl"

linetypes   line styles  "linecode.tbl"

widths      line weights "weight.tbl"


Translation tables are ASCII files that are installed in MicroStation's 
"tables\dwg" directory, pointed to by the MS_DWGTABLES configuration 
variable. They can be edited in dialog boxes or with a text editor.

The following environment variables are used to locate translation tables:

Config.        Delivered Set To:
Variable:

MS_DWGTABLES   MicroStation's "tables\dwg" 
               directory 

MS_CGMTABLES   MicroStation's "tables\cgm" 
               directory





Limitations when exporting to DWG or DXF
----------------------------------------

Conversions between MicroStation and drawing files cannot be exact because 
elements are defined differently.

In general, MicroStation elements are more "intelligent" than DWG entities; 
some intelligence is lost when certain elements are converted to DWG 
entities, making is necessary to approximate their geometry.

Note:
If you are exporting to a receiving application that supports intelligent 
entities (for example, NURBS), using IGES usually provides a better 
translation than DXF. IGES is a more "robust" than DXF; that is it supports 
a far wider range of entities. IGES also is a non-proprietary format that 
does not favor one vendor's application. See IGES File Exchange for more 
information about IGES translation.

   A simple example -- the ellipse
   Differences in the way closed areas are represented
   3D surfaces are represented differently
   Differences in how reference files work
   Sheet files and paper space


A simple example -- the ellipse
-------------------------------

MicroStation stores an exact representation of a non-circular ellipse. DWG 
does not have an ellipse entity; the ellipse must be approximated as a 
polyline consisting of a series of circular arcs.

Therefore, converting an ellipse drawn in MicroStation to DWG or DXF 
involves some approximation. At certain zoom levels, the polyline may look 
identical to the original ellipse, but the approximation is inherently 
inferior to the true ellipse.

Measuring the bounded area of the MicroStation ellipse in produces the 
exact solution; measuring the area bounded by the polyline does not. 

The exact representation is more compact; the approximation requires 
storing more data, and results in larger drawing files.



Differences in the way closed areas are represented
---------------------------------------------------

In MicroStation, a closed planar areas can be defined with a shape, 
ellipse, closed B-spline curve, or complex shape.

MicroStation supports the following for closed elements:
*  All closed elements are considered to be opaque for all rendering, 
hidden line removal, and other processes that operate on bounded planes. 
*  The Group Hole (*Xref) tool can be used to designate a closed element as 
a hole. 
*  A closed element can be filled. A filled element displays filled with 
color in any view for which Area Fill (*Xref) is turned on.
   
AutoCAD can represent closed planar areas with these entities:
*  Polyline entities can be designated as closed, but closed polylines are 
not considered opaque by either AutoCAD's SHADE command or by AutoShade. 
*  Trace and solid entities are limited to planar triangles and 
quadrilaterals that are displayed as filled (if they are parallel to the 
viewing plane and FILLMODE is on). 
*  The 3D face entity also provides a way to describe triangles or 
quadrilaterals that are either planar or nonplanar. 3D faces are considered 
to be opaque by AutoCAD if they are planar.
*   Polyface meshes provide a way to group a set of triangular or 
quadrilateral faces without repeating duplicate vertices. The individual 
faces of a polyface mesh are considered to be opaque. 
   
AutoCAD's support for closed elements has these limitations:
*  The handling of nonplanar, closed entities varies with different 
rendering or application packages.
*  AutoCAD currently supports neither holes nor opaque, closed entities 
with more than four vertices.
   


3D surfaces are represented differently
---------------------------------------

MicroStation has a robust set of 3D elements that can exactly represent 
almost any conceivable 3D object. In particular, MicroStation's non-uniform 
rational B-spline (NURBS) surfaces, with their associated trim boundaries, 
provide a particularly compact and efficient way to describe complex 
surfaces.

In contrast, AutoCAD's polygon mesh entities can only approximate these 
surfaces. Not only do the polygon mesh approximations of true surfaces 
suffer from the same problems as the ellipse approximated with a polyline, 
but also the number of mesh vertices increases. The polygon mesh 
approximations also lack much of the information required for accurate 
surface rendering.



Differences in how reference files work
---------------------------------------

The following table compares MicroStation reference files to AutoCAD Xrefs

MicroStation Ref.      AutoCAD Xrefs:
Files:

Part of an attached    You cannot clip (hide part 
reference file can be  of) an Xreffed file.
clipped or masked (hidden)

A design file can referA drawing cannot Xref 
itself.                itself.

Levels in a reference fYou cannot turn the display 
can be turned on or offof levels in Xrefs on or 
                       off.




Sheet files and paper space
---------------------------

In MicroStation, Drawing Composition (*Xref) is used to create a sheet file 
with various views of a design -- this serves the same purpose as AutoCAD's 
paper space.

When you save a design file as a drawing file, a paper space entity is 
created if a sheet file with the same filename as the active design file 
(but with the extension ".s01") is found. The attached views in the sheet 
file are converted to paper space viewport entities.

Since there can be many sheet files (with extensions ".s01," ".s02," and so 
on) but only one paper space entity, only the first sheet file can be 
converted to paper space.



Drawing file to MicroStation element conversions
------------------------------------------------

Entities in the drawing file (left) are translated to the related 
MicroStation elements (right).

DWG or DXF      MicroStation Element
Entity

Line            3. Line

Point           3. Line (zero length)

Circle          15. Ellipse (circular)

Text            17. Text

Arc             16. Arc

Trace           6. Shape

Solid           6. Shape

Block           1. Cell (in cell library) 
                34. Shared Cell Definition

Insert          2. Cell (in design file) 
                35. Shared Cell Instance

Attribute       37. Tag[a]
Definition

Attribute       37. Taga

PolyLine        4. Line String 6. Shape 
                12. Complex Chain 16. Arc 
                24. B-Spline Surface 
                (Mesh) 27. B-Spline Curve 
                (Spline Fit)

Line (3D)       3. Line

Face (3D)       6. Shape

Dimension       Component elements

Viewport        5. Reference File 
                Attachments (in sheet  
                file)

[a]TBD
   
Note:
Extruded entities are converted to surfaces of projection.

Note:
If a drawing file has a paper space and viewport entities, a sheet file is 
created. The sheet file has same filename as the active design file with 
the extension ".s01." Viewport entities are converted to reference file 
attachments in the sheet file. 

   Conversions from tables in the drawing file


Conversions from tables in the drawing file
-------------------------------------------

Tables in the drawing file are converted as follows

Table       In MicroStation:

APPID       Not Currently Supported

DIMSTYLE    Not Currently Supported

LAYER       Named Levels

LTYPE       Line Styles

VIEW        Active View Configuration 
            Saved Views

VPORT       Active View Configuration

UCS         Auxiliary Coordinate Systems 
            (ACS)





MicroStation to drawing file entity conversions
-----------------------------------------------

Elements in the MicroStation design file (left) are converted to the 
related entities (right).

MicroStation Element   DWG or DXF Entity

1. Cell definition (in Block
library)

2. Cell                Insert

3. Line                Line

4. Line (zero length)  Point

5. Reference File AttacXref Insert
 (in design file)

5. Reference File AttacPaper Space Viewport
(in sheet file)

5. Saved View          Saved View

5. Auxiliary CoordinateSaved UCS
System

6. Shape 3-4 vertices   Solid 3D Face Closed 
(filled) 3-4 vertices  Polyline or Polyface Mesh 
(unfilled) More than 4 (see "Shape Output" *Xref)
vertices

7. Text Node           Text

11. Curve              Polyline

12. Complex Chain      Polyline(s)

14. Complex Shape      Closed Polyline or Polyface 
                       Mesh (see Closed Element 
                       Output)

15. Ellipse Circular    Circle Polyline 
Non-circular           (approximation)

16. Arc Circular        Arc Polyline 
Non-circular           (approximation)

17. Text               Text

18. Surface 19. Solid  Extruded planar entity or 
                       polygon mesh

23. Cone Right CircularPolygon mesh Extruded Circle
Cylinders

21. B-spline Pole 24.  Polygon mesh
B-spline Surface26. B-spline 
Knot28. B-spline Weight

25. B-spline Surface   Ignored
Boundary

27. B-spline Surface  2Polyline
B-spline Surface26. B-spline 
Knot28. B-spline Weight

33. Dimension          Text, Lines, and Polylines

34. Shared Cell DefinitBlock

35. Shared Cell InstancInsert

36. Multi-line         Polyline(s)

37. Tag                Attribute[a]

[a]TBD
   
Note:
If a sheet file with the same filename as the master design file (but with 
the extension ".s01") is found, a paper space entity is created and any 
reference file attachments in the sheet file are converted to paper space 
viewport entities.

   Conversions to tables in the drawing file


Conversions to tables in the drawing file
-----------------------------------------

 

MicroStation               Table in Drawing 
                           File

Named Levels               LAYER

Line Styles                LTYPE

View Attributes

Saved Views                VIEW

View Configuration         VPORT

Auxiliary Coordinate SystemUCS
(ACS)

Tables are created in the exported drawing file as follows:



IGES File Exchange
------------------

IGES is a public domain, neutral file format that is intended as an 
international standard for the exchange of data between different CAD/CAM 
systems. IGES is an ANSI standard maintained by the IGES/PDES Organization 
(IPO), under the direction of the National Institute of Standards and 
Technology (NIST). The National Computer Graphics Association (NCGA) acts 
as the administrator of the standard.

You can export IGES files that are compliant with the CALS Class I or Class 
II specifications. See Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files for more 
information.

Note:
For information about which IGES file versions can be opened or saved, see 
Versions supported.

Note:
For an introduction to how IGES files can be imported and exported in 
MicroStation, see General Data Exchange Procedures.

IGES supports many entity types, ranging in complexity from simple lines to 
complex surfaces. MicroStation can "cleanly" import a large subset of the 
IGES entities. See IGES to MicroStation element conversions for details 
about the conversion of specific IGES entities to MicroStation elements.

Warning:
Translating large files can require substantial amounts of memory. RAM and 
space on the hard disk are used. The message Aborting due to memory 
allocation failure indicates the need to add more memory or free up more 
hard disk space.

   IGES entities
   IGES file organization
   Issues that affect IGES import and export
   Issues that affect IGES import
   Issues that affect IGES export
   Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files
   IGES to MicroStation element conversions
   MicroStation to IGES element conversions
   IGES translation errors and warnings
   Available references about IGES 
   Parser/Verifier


IGES entities
-------------

The fundamental unit of data in an IGES file is the entity. There are two 
major categories of entities.
   Geometry entities define physical shapes; including points, curves, 
surfaces, solids, and relations (collections of similarly structured 
entities).
   Non-geometry entities provide specific attributes or characteristics for 
geometry entities. Non-geometry entities include view, drawing, general 
note, dimension, property, and associativity entities.
   
Some entities have several forms, or further definitions of the entity 
within the entity type. Each entity is represented by an entry in the 
directory entry section and the parameter data section of the IGES file 
(see IGES file organization).



IGES file organization
----------------------

MicroStation can import or export fixed-length ASCII IGES files with 80 
characters in each line. 

Note:
This section is intended to provide introductory information about IGES for 
MicroStation users. If you require more detailed information, see Available 
references about IGES  for information about obtaining documentation of the 
IGES standard.

Each IGES file has five sections; identified by the letter in column 73 of 
each line (S, G, D, P, or T).
   Start section 
   Global data section 
   Directory entry section 
   Parameter data section 
   Terminate section 
   A sample design file and exported IGES file


Start section 
--------------

Contains a human-readable comment; that is it is meant to be read by humans 
rather than by computers. 

By default, "This file was produced by MicroStation" is placed in an an 
exported IGES file's start section.

If desired, a text file can be specified using the Select Start Section 
File dialog box. For example, it might have information such as notes to 
the receiving company. If a text file is specified, the text is reformatted 
into standard IGES record format. See File menu/Start Section File... for 
more information. 



Global data section 
--------------------

Contains information -- the sending application, author, organization, 
drafting standard, measuring system, IGES version, and other data -- needed 
by the receiving application. Some of this information is specified in the 
Export IGES File dialog box.



Directory entry section 
------------------------

Serves as an index to the IGES file; there is one directory entry for each 
entity. A directory entry has 20 right-justified fields of 8 characters 
each in two consecutive lines that store information that is applicable to 
every type of entity. Important fields include

1. Entity type

2. Pointer to the parameter data for that entity

4. Line font pattern

5. Level

10. Line count from beginning of directory entry 
section

11. Entity type (same as field 1)

12. Line weight

13. Color

14. Number of fields in the parameter data entry for 
that entity

15. Form number

18. Entity label; IGESOUT writes the MicroStation 
element type the entity was created from

20. Line count from beginning of directory entry 
section (same as field 10)





Parameter data section 
-----------------------

Contains geometric information that is specific to each type of entity -- 
such as the endpoints of a line entity, the center and radius of a circle 
entity, or the text in a general note entity. Parameter data entries have a 
different length depending on the element type.



Terminate section 
------------------

One line long; must be the last line in the IGES file.



A sample design file and exported IGES file
-------------------------------------------

The example on page 10-25 shows a design file "output.dgn," settings set to 
the defaults (except for global data as specified in the Export to IGES 
File dialog box), and the exported IGES file "output.igs.



Issues that affect IGES import and export
-----------------------------------------

This section covers issues that affect IGES import and export.

   Converting subfigure names
   To map a subfigure name to a cell name:
   Converting text
   To specify a font mapping from IGES to MicroStation:
   Converting line styles


Converting subfigure names
--------------------------

IGES subfigures are similar to MicroStation cells. There is no limit to the 
length of IGES subfigure names, while MicroStation cell names are limited 
to six characters. 
*  When an IGES file is imported, a subfigure name is truncated to its 
first six characters. If the name already exists in the design file or 
attached cell library, the sixth character is replaced with a "0." This 
number is incremented until a unique name is found.
*  When exporting to IGES, it may be desirable to replace cell names with 
longer subfigure names to match the naming conventions of the receiving 
application.
   
You can use the Cell Names dialog box to customize how cell names are 
translated.

To Customize How:      Choose:

Subfigure names are    Settings menu/Cell Names... 
translated to cell namein the Import IGES File 
during import.         dialog box

Cell names are translatSettings menu/Cell Names... 
to subfigure names duriin the Export IGES File 
export.                dialog box



Hint:
Saving customized lists of conversions in an import and export settings 
file is particularly helpful if you must frequently exchange data between 
MicroStation and another system that supports subfigure names longer than 
six characters.



To map a subfigure name to a cell name
--------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu in the Import IGES File settings box, choose Cell 
Names.
   The Cell Names dialog box opens.
2. In the Subfigure field, key in the subfigure name to map. 
3. In the Cell Name field, key in the cell name to which to convert the 
subfigure name.
4. Click the Add button.
   


Converting text
---------------

A MicroStation font is assigned a number from 0 to 127 in a font library. 

The font library "igesfont.flb" has equivalents for the IGES standard text 
fonts. The default mappings from the IGES standard text fonts to the fonts 
in "igesfont.flb" are as follows:

Standard IGES Font  MicroStation 
                    ("igesfont.flb"

1.Standard Block    0. Standard

2.LeRoy             3. Engineering

17. Century Schoolbo2. Fancy

18. Helvetica       43. Low Res Filled

1001. Symbol Font 1 15. IGES Symbol Font 1

1002. Symbol Font   16. IGES Symbol Font 2

1003. Drafting Font 17. IGES Symbol Font 3



Any IGES font that is not explicitly mapped is translated to MicroStation 
font 1 (Working).

Note:
To use the "igesfont.flb" font library, be sure the MS_FNTLB environment 
variable is pointing to it. For more information about setting environment 
variables, see *Xref.

Hint:
Due to the wide variety of font conventions in different applications, 
getting a "perfect match" can be difficult. Each situation is different; 
you must decide which font mappings work best for your translation. The 
following are suggestions for making font translation as accurate as 
possible:

*  Limit font usage to one or two fonts that have a similar appearance in 
each package. 
*  Use "simple" fonts rather than "fancy" fonts.
   
Warning:
Features that are supported by the sending application may not be supported 
by MicroStation. For example, some applications support text attributes 
such as slanted (italics); MicroStation does not support italics as a text 
attribute.



To specify a font mapping from IGES to MicroStation
---------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu in the Import IGES File settings box, choose Text 
Fonts.
2. Key in the IGES font number in the Min field.
   or
   Key in the minimum and maximum of a range of IGES fonts in the Min and 
Max fields.
3. Key in the MicroStation font number in the uSTN field.
4. Click the Add button.
   


Converting line styles
----------------------

The IGES specification includes six standard line styles and custom line 
font patterns defined by line font definition entities (type 304). 

Custom line styles are not supported by MicroStation. The line font 
patterns of entities with custom line font patterns can be mapped to any of 
the MicroStation line styles.

The default line font pattern to line style mappings for IGES import are:

IGES line font       MicroStation line style
pattern

0. Undefined         0. Solid (SOL)

1. Solid             0. Solid (SOL)

2. Dashed            5. Short-dashed (SHD)

3. Phantom           6. Dash double-dot (DADD)

4. Centerline        7. Long dash-short dash (LDSD)

5. Dotted            1. Dotted (DOT)



The default line style to line font pattern mappings for IGES export are:

MicroStation line style IGES line font 
                        pattern

0. Solid (SOL)          1. Solid

1. Dotted (DOT)         3. Phantom

2. Medium-dashed (MEDD) 2. Dashed

3. Long-dashed (LNGD)   2. Dashed

4. Dot-dashed (DOTD)    4. Centerline

5. Short-dashed (SHD)   2. Dashed

6. Dash double-dot (DADD3. Phantom

7. Long dash-short dash 4. Centerline



The mappings between line styles and line font patterns can be customized. 
See Settings menu/Line Styles... (import) and Settings menu/Line Styles... 
(export).



Issues that affect IGES import
------------------------------

This section covers issues that you should be aware of when importing IGES 
files.

Note:
Certain IGES entities cannot be represented in 2D. Unless you are sure the 
IGES file is 2D, it is recommended that the active design file be 3D when 
an IGES file is imported.

   Keeping coordinate units correct
   Levels
   To specify a level mapping from IGES to MicroStation:
   Drawing sheets and view visibility


Keeping coordinate units correct
--------------------------------

Suppose an architect wants to import an IGES file into a design file where 
the master units are feet and sub-units are inches. If the file units of 
the IGES file being imported are inches, Translation Units should be set to 
sub-units so that the working units in the design file are correct.

Note:
IGES has no equivalent for MicroStation sub-units.



Levels
------

An IGES file can have an unlimited number of levels, numbered with any 
non-negative integer. A MicroStation design file can have up to 63 levels, 
numbered 1-63.

By default, when an IGES file is imported:
*  Entities on level 0 in the IGES file are put on level 1 in the design 
file. 
*  Entities on levels 1-63 in the IGES file are put on the same level in 
the design file. 
*  Entities on levels greater than 63 in the IGES file are mapped to levels 
in the design file using the formula:
   *design file level = 1 + IGES file level mod 63
   "IGES level mod 63" means "the remainder from the IGES level divided by 
63 (integer division)."
   
   Example: 


Example 
--------

By default, entities on levels 64 and 127 of the IGES file are put on level 
2 in the MicroStation design file; entities on levels 65 and 128 of the 
IGES file are put on level 3, and so on.

The mapping of levels from IGES files to design files can be customized in 
the Levels settings box (see Settings menu/Levels...).



To specify a level mapping from IGES to MicroStation
----------------------------------------------------

1. From the Settings menu in the Import IGES File settings box, choose 
Levels.
   The Levels dialog box opens.
2. Key in the IGES level number in the Min field.
   or
   Key in the minimum and maximum of a range of IGES levels in the Min and 
Max fields.
3. Key in the MicroStation level number in the uSTN field.
4. Click the Add button.
   


Drawing sheets and view visibility
----------------------------------

A single IGES file can represent both the model (the actual geometry) and 
one or more annotated drawing sheets that display the model from different 
views. Drawing entities (type 404) specify a drawing sheet as a collection 
of annotation entities and one or more views of the model. 

MicroStation does not directly support drawing entities; however, sheet 
files provide the same functionality. An IGES file to be split into a model 
file (design file with the model) and one or more sheet files (design file 
with a reference file attachment for each drawing view as well as any 
annotation entities associated with the drawing entity) that are created 
for each drawing entity.

IGES also has a capability called "views visible" that is not directly 
supported by MicroStation:
*  The display of an individual entity can be enabled or disabled for 
different views through the views visible form of the associativity 
instance entity (type 402, form 3). We will call this attribute view 
visibility. 
*  The symbology (line font pattern, color, or line weight) of an 
individual entity can be changed in different views through the views 
visible, color, or line weight form of the associativity instance entity 
(type 402, form 4). We will call this attribute view symbology.
   
The Drawings option menu in the Import IGES File dialog box controls how 
drawing entities, view visibility, and view symbology are handled when an 
IGES file is imported.



Issues that affect IGES export
------------------------------

This section covers issues that you should be aware of when exporting a 
design file to IGES.

   Excluding IGES entities
   Alternate entities for excluded IGES entities (export)


Excluding IGES entities
-----------------------

The breadth of the IGES specification makes it impractical for any 
receiving application to correctly interpret every IGES entity. It is 
usually desirable to exclude an entity that is not supported by the 
receiving application. 

If an IGES entity listed in Alternate entities for excluded IGES entities 
(export) is excluded, the geometry it represents is approximated with the 
corresponding alternate entity type. In most cases the approximation is 
less compact and "intelligent" than the entity it replaces. 

Warning:
If an entity is not listed in the table, its exclusion causes its geometry 
to be omitted from the IGES file.

The Exclude IGES Entities dialog box lets you exclude IGES entities. See 
Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities....

Examples include the following:
*  If the general note entity (type 212) is excluded, text elements are 
replaced with their stroked representation as copious data entities (type 
106). The text appears correctly in the IGES file, but requires far more 
file space and is interpreted as a series of vectors rather than as text.
*  If the receiving application does not support NURBS, they should be 
excluded.
   


Alternate entities for excluded IGES entities (export)
------------------------------------------------------

The table lists alternate entities for excluded IGES entities, unless the 
alternate is excluded as well:

IGES Entity            Alternate If Excluded

100. Circular Arc      126. Rational B-spline Curve 

102. Composite Curve    Individual component entities

104. Conic Arc         126. Rational B-spline Curve

106. Copious Data      110. Line(s)

108. Plane (Bounded)   230. Sectioned Area

116. Point             110. Line (zero length)

126. Rational B-spline 106. Copious Data

128. Rational B-spline 126. Rational B-spline Curves (rule lines)
Surface

142. Curve On Surface  B-spline Surface boundaries are ignored

144. Trimmed Surface   Grouped holes are exported as Sectioned Area 
                       entities (type 230)

212. General Note      106. Copious Data

230. Sectioned Area    Bounding elements with area pattern

308. Subfigure DefinitiIndividual component entities

314. Color Definition  Standard colors are used

408. Singular SubfigureAll cells are dropped (placed as individual 
Instance               entities in the IGES file)



Warning:
If an element does not appear in the table, its exclusion causes its 
geometry to be omitted from the IGES file.



Exporting CALS-compliant IGES files
-----------------------------------

CALS is an acronym for the United States Department of Defense 
Computer-aided Acquisition and Logistic Support initiative. The goal of 
CALS is to integrate and standardize the digital data received from 
Department of Defense suppliers. The CALS IGES specification is a series of 
different classes of IGES files. Each class is a subset of the IGES entity 
types, as specified in MIL-D-28000A.

CALS Class           Settings   For the Exchange of:
                     File

I. 2D Technical      "cals1.sfo"2D figures and illustrations normally found in 
Illustration                    technical publications.

II. 3D Engineering   "cals2.sfo"3D engineering drawings (export settings are 
Drawings                        very close to default IGES export settings). 

 

   Settings files for CALS export
   To export CALS Class I-compliant IGES files:
   To export CALS Class II-compliant IGES files:


Settings files for CALS export
------------------------------

The "cals1.sfo" and "cals2.sfo" export settings files specify export 
settings as follows

Setting               CALS Class I            CALS Class II 
                      "cals1.sfo:"            "cals2.sfo:"

Start Section File    "cals1.ssf" template for"cals2.ssf" template for 
                      CALS Class I start sectiCALS Class II start section

Flattening            On from the Top[a]      Off

Standard Colors       On[b]                   Off

Default Drawing[c]    On                      On

Excluded Entities(see All entities not in CALSTBD
Settings menu/Exclude Class I specification are 
                      excluded.

Fonts (see            All MicroStation fonts aAll MicroStation fonts are 
Settings menu/Text Fonmapped to IGES fonts 1, mapped to IGES fonts 1, 
                      and 1002 (the only fonts1001, 1002, and 1003 (the 
                      allowed in CALS Class I only fonts allowed in CALS 
                      files).                 Class II IGES files).

Level Placement (see  All elements in the desiTBD
Settings menu/Levels..file are placed on level 0 
                      in the IGES file.

[a]All entities in a CALS Class I file must be 2D. You can flatten in any 
standard view. If Flattening is set to None and the design file is 3D, the 
IGES file is not CALS Class I-compliant.
   
[b]Custom color definitions are not allowed in CALS Class I IGES files.
   
[c]CALS Class I and II IGES files must have at least one drawing entity.
   
Hint:
Either "cals1.sfo" or "cals2.sfo" can be customized. Once you have changed 
the export settings, choose Save As from the File menu's Settings File 
sub-menu to save your changes. 



To export CALS Class I-compliant IGES files
-------------------------------------------

1. Attach the export settings file "cals1.sfo." See To attach a settings 
file other than the default: for a step-by-step procedure. 
2. In the Export IGES File dialog box, fill in the Product Name field. The 
product name is required in CALS Class I IGES files. 
3. Using the Start Section dialog box, fill in the Start Section 
information specific to your project. See File menu/Start Section File... 
for more information.
   
Note:
An example of each of the entities allowed in CALS Class I files is in the 
sample IGES file "ientity.igs," which is installed in MicroStation's "???" 
directory.

Hint:
See File menu/Start Section File... for information about saving a custom 
start section file for your project or organization.



To export CALS Class II-compliant IGES files
--------------------------------------------

1. Attach the export settings file "cals2.sfo." See To attach a settings 
file other than the default: for a step-by-step procedure.
2. In the Export IGES File dialog box, fill in the Author, Organization, 
and Product Name fields. These are required in CALS Class II IGES files. 
3. Fill in the information specific to your project.
   
Hint:
An example of each of the entities allowed in CALS Class II files is in the 
sample IGES file "nentity.igs," which is installed in MicroStation's "xxx" 
directory.



IGES to MicroStation element conversions
----------------------------------------

IGES entities (left) are converted to the related MicroStation elements 
(right) 

IGES Entity                   MicroStation Element

100. Circular Arc             15. Ellipse  16. Arc

102. Composite Curve open clos 14. Complex Chain  12. Complex Shape

104. Conic Arc: Form 1  All ot 15. Arc  27. B-spline Curve
forms

106. Copious Data:[a] Form 11, 4. Line String 3. Line(s)  6. Shape
Form 20-21, 31-38, 40 Form 63

108. Plane:  bounded[b]  unbou Shape, Ellipse, closed B-spline Curve, or 
                              Complex Shape Not supported

110. Line                     3. Line

112. Parametric Spline Curve  27. B-spline Curve

114. Parametric Spline Surface24. B-spline Surface

116. Point                    3. Line (zero length)

118. Ruled Surface[c]         24. B-spline Surface

120. Surface of Revolution    24. B-spline Surface

122. Tabulated Cylinder       24. B-spline Surface

124. Transformation Matrix    Supported

125. Flash                    Not supported

126. Rational B-spline Curve (27. B-spline Curve
forms)

128. Rational B-spline Surface24. B-spline Surface
forms)

130. Offset Curve             27. B-spline Curve

132. Connect Point            3. Line (zero length)

134. Node                     Not supported

136. Finite Element           Not supported

138. Nodal Displacement and RoNot supported

140. Offset Surface           Not supported

142. Curve On A Parametric Sur27. B-spline Curve 24. B-spline Surface Boundary

144. Trimmed Parametric Surfac25. B-spline Surface with boundaries

146. Nodal Result             Not supported

148. Element Results          Not supported

150. Block                    19. Solid (of projection)

152. Right Angular Wedge      19. Solid (of projection)

154. Right Circular Cylinder  23. Cone

156. Right Circular Cone Frust23. Cone

158. Sphere                   19. Solid (of revolution)

160. Torus                    19. Solid (of revolution)

162. Solid Of Revolution      19. Solid (of revolution) 24. B-spline Surface 
                              (if cross-section is a B-spline curve)

164. Solid Of Linear Extrusion19. Solid (of projection) 24. B-spline Surface 
                              (if cross-section is a B-spline curve)

168. Ellipsoid                Not supported

180. Boolean Tree             Not supported

184. Solid Assembly           Not supported

202. Angular Dimension[e]     Component elements

206. Diameter Dimensione      Component elements

208. Flag Notee               Component elements

210. General Labele           Component elements

212. General Note             17. Text

214. Leadere                  Component elements

216. Linear Dimensione        Component elements

218. Ordinate Dimensione      Component elements

220. Point Dimensione         Component elements

222. Radius Dimensione        Component elements

228. General Symbole          Component elements

230. Sectioned Areae          Bounding elements with area pattern

302. Associativity Definition Not supported

304. Line Font Definition     Not supported

306. MACRO Definition         Not supported

308. Subfigure Definition[f]  1. Cell (in attached cell library) 34. Shared 
                              Cell Definition

310. Text Font Definition     Not supported

312. Text Display Template    Supported

314. Color Definition         Supported

320. Network Subfigure Definit1. Cell (in attached cell library) 34. Shared 
                              Cell Definition

322. Attribute Table DefinitioNot supported

402. Associativity Instance: F Graphic Group Supported (view visibility)
7, 9, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18 Form 3, 
4[g]

404. Drawing[h]               Supported

406. Property Form 1. (definit Supported Named level 36. Multi-line Supported 
levels) Form 3. (level functioView in sheet design file Units in sheet design 
Form 5. (line widening) Form 1file
(name) Form 16. (drawing size) Form 
17. (drawing units)

408. Singular Subfigure Instan2. Cell (in attached cell library)  35. Shared 
                              Cell Instance

410. View                     5. Saved View

412. Rectangular Array Subfigu2. Cell(s) (in attached cell library) 35. Shared 
Instancef                     Cell Instance(s)

414. Circular Array Subfigure 2. Cell(s) (in attached cell library)  35. Shared 
Instancef                     Cell Instance(s)

416. External Reference (Form 5. Reference File

418. Nodal Load/Constraint    Not supported

420. Network Subfigure Instanc2. Cell (in attached cell library)  35. Shared 
                              Cell Instance

422. Attribute Table Instance Not supported

430. Solid Instance           Not supported

[a]A MicroStation line string or shape element can have a maximum of 101 
vertices. If a copious data entity has more than 101 vertices, it is 
translated as a complex chain or complex shape that contains multiple line 
strings.
   
[b]Only bounded planes with a positive bounded area (form 1) are 
translated. In this case, the bounding curve is interpreted as closed. For 
example, if the bounding curve is a composite curve it is interpreted as 
complex shape rather than a complex chain.
   
[c]Form 1 ruled surfaces are approximated as form 0. The parameterization 
of the ruled surfaces is always taken from the rail curves as specified in 
form 0.
   
[d]Trimmed parametric surface entities are translated to B-spline surface 
elements with boundaries. Since MicroStation supports only polygonal 
surface boundaries, curved boundaries are approximated by stroking the 
curves to polygons.
   
[e]All IGES dimension entities are translated to the MicroStation 
primitives that form the dimension; that is lines, arcs, and text.
   
[f]The Subfigure Output setting in the Import IGES File dialog box 
determines how subfigures are translated. If no cell library is attached, 
Subfigure Output is set to shared cells.
   
[g]The Drawings setting in the Import IGES File dialog box controls how 
view visibility is handled. See also Drawing sheets and view visibility.
   
[h]The Drawings setting in the Import IGES File dialog box controls whether 
drawing entities are ignored, merged into the design file, or have a sheet 
file created with appropriate attached views. See also Drawing sheets and 
view visibility.
   
   

MicroStation to IGES element conversions
----------------------------------------

MicroStation elements (left) are translated to the related IGES entities 
(right) when the design file is exported, unless the IGES entity is 
excluded (see Excluding IGES entities).
   
MicroStation Element  IGES Entity

1. Cell Library Header308. Subfigure Definition

2. Cell Headers       408. Subfigure Instance

3. Line               110. Line

4. Line String        106. Copious Data

5. Group Data         Ignored

Saved View            410. View

Color Table           314. Color Definition

6. Shape              106. Copious Data

7. Text Node          212. General Note

11. Curve             126. Rational B-spline Curve

12. Complex Chain     102. Composite Curve

14. Complex Shape     108. Bounded Plane 

102. Composite Curve

15. Ellipse           100. Arc (Circles only) 104. Conic

16. Arc               100. Arc (Circular arcs only) 104. Conic

17. Text              212. General Note

18. Surface of Revolut128. Rational B-spline Surface

Surface of Projection 118. Ruled Surface

19. Solid of Revolutio128. Rational B-spline Surface

Solid of Projection   118. Ruled Surface

21. B-spline Pole     Exported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface header

22. Point String      116. Point(s)

23. Cone              128. Rational B-spline Surface

24. B-spline Surface  128. Rational B-spline Surface 144. Trimmed Surface (if 
Header                bounded)

25. B-spline Surface  142. Curve On A Parametric Surface
Boundary

26. B-spline Knot     Exported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface header

27. B-spline Curve    126. Rational B-spline Curve

28. B-spline Weight FaExported with B-spline Curve or B-spline Surface Header

33. Dimension[a]      Component entities

34. Shared Cell Defini308. Subfigure Definition

35. Shared Cell Instan408. Subfigure Instance

36. Multi-linea       Exported as primitive components

66. MicroStation      Ignored
Application

87. Raster Header     Ignored

88. Raster Data       Ignored

[a]MicroStation dimension and multi-line elements are translated to the 
IGES entities that form the dimension or multi-line -- lines, arcs, and 
text.
   
   

IGES translation errors and warnings
------------------------------------

Messages listed as errors are problems that cause import or export to fail. 
Messages listed as warnings do not cause failure, but indicate that the 
drawing may have lost some "intelligence" or had some part omitted during 
translation.
   
   Import and export errors
   Import errors
   Export error
   Import and export warnings
   Import warnings
   Export warnings


Import and export errors
------------------------




Message               Meaning

Unable to open output An error occurred opening the design file you are 
                      importing the IGES file into or the IGES file you are 
                      attempting to export to; caused by an invalid path 
                      specification, the existence a write-protected file with 
                      the same filename, or other similar condition. (Command 
                      line or batch method only) 

Aborting due to memorySufficient memory to complete the translation is not 
allocation failure    available. Translating large files can require substantial 
                      amounts of memory; both RAM and hard disk space are used. 
                      You must add more memory or free up additional hard disk 
                      space.





Import errors
-------------




Message                Meaning

Unable to open IGES filThe specified IGES file does not exist or cannot be 
                       opened.

Missing terminator sectThe terminator section was not found at the end of the 
                       IGES file. This usually indicates that the specified 
                       file is not a valid IGES file or is in some way 
                       truncated or corrupted. 

Invalid terminator sectThe format of the IGES file's terminator section is not 
                       valid. 

Unable to create designThe design file could not be created because the 
                       specified path does not exist, an existing file with 
                       that filename is write-protected, or some other 
                       condition prevents the creation of the specified file. 
                       (Command line or batch method only) 

Unable to open seed filThe seed file specified by MS_DESIGNSEED does not exist 
                       in the directory specified by MS_SEEDFILES. (Command 
                       line or batch method only) 





Export error
------------




Message                Meaning

Unable to open temporarThe parameter data for the IGES file is written to a 
file:                  temporary file (iges.pds) during translation. This file 
                       could not be created for some reason.





Import and export warnings
--------------------------

 

Message                Meaning

Unrecognized option    An option was specified that MicroStation could not 
                       understand. See *Xref or *Xref for information about the 
                       valid syntax. (Command line or batch method only) 

Invalid option format  The syntax of an option is incorrect. See *Xref *Xref 
                       for information about the valid syntax. (Command line or 
                       batch method only) 

Unable to open settingsThe indicated settings file does not exist or could not 
                       be opened.

Settings version mismatThe version for the settings file does not match the 
                       version of MicroStation's IGES translator. 

Unable to create settinThe specified path does not exist, a write-protected 
file                   file with the same filename exists, or the file cannot 
                       be created for some other reason.

Unable to add settings An error occurred when updating the settings file. This 
file                   usually indicates that the settings file is 
                       write-protected.

Unable to open specificThe specification file does not exist or could not be 
file                   opened.





Import warnings
---------------




Message                Meaning

Parameter type does notThe entity's parameter data does not match the type 
match directory record specified in its directory record. The entity is 
                       ignored.

Invalid Copious Data FoA copious data (type 106) entity of a form not supported 
                       by MicroStation was encountered. The entity is ignored.

Unsupported entity     An entity type in the IGES file is not supported and is 
                       therefore omitted from the design file. 

String constant broken These errors are caused by data that does not conform to 
before Hollerith characthe IGES syntax specification. IGESIN attempts to infer 
String field too long  or ignore the invalid data. However, missing or 
Hollerith character misincorrect geometry can result.
for string field  No field 
delimiter

Invalid directory type These errors are caused by IGES files that are 
Invalid PDS Pointer in syntactically correct yet contain data that is is 
directory record  Invalinconsistent with the IGES specification. In most cases 
directory sequence  InvIGESIN omits the erroneous entities and continues 
PDS count in directory translating.
record

Invalid line font (ignoAn invalid line font was encountered. The default line 
                       style is used for the entity.

Subfigure instance erroAn error was encountered extracting the subfigure 
                       definition for the specified instance. The instance is 
                       omitted from the design file.

Unsupported conic form An unsupported conic form was encountered. MicroStation 
                       currently supports all of the conic forms specified in 
                       the IGES standard (ellipses, hyperbolas and parabolas).

Invalid hyperbolic coniA degenerate hyperbola definition was encountered. No 
                       geometry is generated in the design file for the conic 
                       entity.

Invalid parabolic conicA degenerate parabola definition was encountered. No 
                       geometry is generated in the design file for the conic 
                       entity.

Unable to standardize cThe conic cannot be reduced to standard form through 
                       standard rotation and translation of axis techniques. No 
                       geometry is generated in the design file for the conic 
                       entity.

Invalid revolution axisThe axis for a surface of revolution (type 120) was not 
                       a valid line (type 110) entity. No geometry is generated 
                       in the design file for the surface of revolution.

Invalid entity pointer An invalid entity pointer was encountered in the 
                       parameter data for the indicated entity. The entity is 
                       ignored.

Invalid viewing        The transformation for a view entity was not 
transformation         orthonormal. The view definition is ignored.

Unable to create sheet The specified sheet design file could not be created 
<filename>             because the specified path does not exist, a 
                       write-protected file exists with the same filename, or 
                       the file cannot be created for some other reason. The 
                       drawing entity associated with this sheet is ignored.

Unable to open sheet seThe sheet seed file specified by the MS_SHEETSEED 
<filename>             environment variable could not be opened in the 
                       directory specified by MS_SEEDFILES. Either the file 
                       does not exist or read access is not available. The 
                       sheet design file is created by copying the header or 
                       the model design file rather than using the sheet seed 
                       file.

Invalid weight value   An invalid line weight value was encountered for the 
                       indicated entity. The weight of the entity is set to 
                       zero.

Subfigure name changed:The name of the IGES subfigure was altered to meet the 
<Subfigure_Name> =>    MicroStation requirement of six character alphanumeric 
<Cell_Name>            cell names. 

Can't add cell to libraThis error occurs if the active cell library is 
                       write-protected.

Can't find section pattA section pattern that is not in the "igespats.cel" cell 
<CODEnn>               library was encountered. The section pattern is ignored. 
                       You can correct this by creating a pattern cell for the 
                       section and adding it to "igespats.cel" with CODEnn as 
                       the cell name (nn is the section code number).

Unable to open pattern The pattern cell library "igespats.cel" was not found. 
library                This library is required for sectioned area entities 
                       (type 230). The environment variable MS_CELL is used to 
                       locate the cell library. Be sure that "igespats.cel" 
                       exists and that MS_CELL points to the directory that it 
                       is in.

Unsupported AssociativiAn unsupported associativity form was encountered. The 
Form                   associativity entity is ignored.

Element off design planThe geometry for an IGES entity is not included in the 
                       design plane (volume in 3D) of the design file, and is 
                       therefore omitted. This is usually means that the 
                       working units of the design file are not appropriate for 
                       the IGES file being imported. This can be corrected by 
                       choosing an appropriate seed file, adjusting the working 
                       units in the Working Units dialog box, or setting 
                       Translation Units to Sub-Units or Calculate (see 
                       "Translation Units").

Maximum cell size exceeMicroStation supports a maximum cell size of 65,000 
Subfigure dropped to   words (1 word = 2 bytes). If an IGES subfigure exceeds 
components             this limit, it is placed in the design file as 
                       individual components rather than as a cell or shared 
                       cell.

No UV Curve in Curve onA type 142 (curve on surface) entity was encountered 
Surface                with zero pointer for the UV curve entity. The curve is 
                       ignored. This usually causes a trim boundary to be 
                       omitted from a surface. 

Unsupported Line font  An invalid form for a Line Font Definition entity was 
definition (304) form  encountered. The font definition is ignored.





Export warnings
---------------




Message                Meaning

Geometry omitted by    Entities were omitted from the IGES file because the 
exclusion of Entity: Noindicated entities were excluded (see 
                       Settings menu/Exclude IGES Entities...) 
                       and there is no alternate entity type to represent it. 
                       This usually occurs only if the copious data (type 106) 
                       or point (type 116) entities are excluded.

Degenerate (zero radiusMicroStation design files can contain zero radius arc or 
omitted                circle elements. The IGES specification prohibits these 
                       entities and they are therefore they are not exported to 
                       IGES.





Available references about IGES 
--------------------------------




IGES Version 5.0       National Computer Graphics Association  2722 Merrilee 
                       Drive, Suite 200  Fairfax, VA 22031 (703) 698-9600 ext. 
                       325

IGES Versions 4.0 and 3National Technical Information Service  5285 Port Royal 
                       Road Springfield,VA 22161 (703) 487-4650 IGES 4.0 Order 
                       # PB 88-235452 IGES 3.0 Order # PB 86-199759*Society of 
                       Automotive Engineers Inc. 400 Commonwealth Drive 
                       Warrendale, PA 15096 (412) 776-4970 IGES 4.0 Order # 
                       SP767 IGES 3.0 Order # SP686CAD-CAM Data Exchange 
                       Technical Center 171 Woodhouse Lane Leeds LS2 3AR United 
                       Kingdom 532-334455 IGES 3.0 and 4.0 available

IGES 4.1 Recommended   NIST Bldg. 220, Room A127 Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 
Practices Guide        975-3982

PDES: First Working DraNational Technical Information Service 5285 Port Royal 
                       Road Springfield,VA 22161 (703) 487-4650 Order # PB 
                       89-144794

 



Parser/Verifier
---------------

Parser/Verifier is a utility that checks IGES files for conformance to the 
IGES standard. It generates reports on entity usage and errors. CALS 
conformance testing is optional. Parser/Verifier can greatly speed the 
identification and resolution of IGES translation problems. Parser/Verifier 
is available for PC, Intergraph Workstation, VAX/VMS, Sun SPARC, and other 
platforms from IGES Data Analysis; 5670 McDermott Drive; Berkeley, IL 
60163. Phone





This file was produced by MicroStation                                  S   
   1

1H,,1H;,4HIGES,10Houtput.igs,24HMicroStation Version 4.0,5H4.0.0,32,10, G   
   1

10,10,10,,1.,3,2HMU,32,0.1968503937007874,13H910904.082915,0.0001,,16HNiG   
   2

cole L. Shelby,25HLionville Power and Light,8,0;                        G   
   3

     110       1       0       1       1       0       0       000000000D   
   1

     110       0       8       1       0                    LINE       1D   
   2

     212       2       0       1       1       0       0       000000100D   
   3

     212       0       8       1       0                    TEXT       1D   
   4

110,-91.7913,76.3027,0.,-18.438,85.5454,0.;                            1P   
   1

212,1,6,28.2283,5.,1,1.5708,0.,0,0,-74.871,63.9,0.,6HSample;           3P   
   2

S      1G      3D      4P      2                                        T   
   1



Translating Designs Between 2D and 3D
-------------------------------------

Note
When a 3D file is translated to 2D , cones and cylinders are now converted, 
and degenerate arcs are now converted to lines. These Version 5.0 
enhancements are of particular interest to piping designers.





Using Applications
------------------

TBD

   MDL Applications
   Script Files
   User Commands
   Tutorials


MDL Applications
----------------

TBD



Script Files
------------

TBD



User Commands
-------------

User commands (UCMs) are macros that follow the logic and syntax of the UCM 
language. Sample UCMs are installed in MicroStation's "ucm" directory.

This section has information about running UCMs. For information about 
designing and programming UCMs, see *Xref: ["Developing User Commands" on 
page 1-1 in the Development and Support Guide].

   Activating a UCM
   Indexed UCMs


Activating a UCM
----------------

1. Key in USERCOMMAND <ucm>
   or
   UC = <ucm>.
   ucm is the UCM file. If the extension is omitted, ".ucm" is assumed.
   OR
1. From the User menu, choose User Command.
   The Run User Command dialog box opens.
2. In the list box, select the UCM.
3. Click the OK button.
   
With either method, MicroStation searches for ucm:
1. In the directory pointed to by the MS_UCM configuration variable
2. In the current directory.
   
Note:
It is possible to "compile" a UCM so it can be loaded by MicroStation more 
quickly after being located. For more information, see *Xref: ["Compiling 
UCMs" on page 1-# in the Development And Support Guide].



Indexed UCMs
------------

A user command (UCM) index file is a text file that contains an indexed 
list of up to 999 UCMs. Indexed UCMs can be activated by index number as 
well as by name. UCM index files can be created and edited with the Edit 
User Command Index File settings box *Xref:[(see "UCM Index Files:" on page 
15-#)]. Before you can use an indexed list, you must activate the UCM index 
file containing the list. 

>> To activate a UCM index file:

1. Key in ACTIVE INDEX <filename>.
   or
   OX=<filename>.
   If you do not specify the full path, MicroStation searches in the 
directory pointed to by the MS_DATA configuration variable. If the file 
extension is omitted, ".ndx" is assumed.
   
Note:
If a UCM index file is active, it is automatically deactivated when the 
design file is closed.

>> To activate an indexed UCM:

1. Key in UCI <index_number>.
   


Tutorials
---------

TBD

